808 891 060103

Comfort Controller
Overview and Configuration

Manual
Overview ..................................................................... 1
Introduction ............................................................... 5
Hardware Overview ................................................ 5
Comfort Controller 6400 ................................ 5
Comfort Controller 1600 ................................ 7
Software Overview ................................................. 9
Algorithms ..................................................... 9
Configuration Overview ....................................... 10
Interpreting Flow Diagrams .................................. 10
Custom Programming ........................................... 12
Foreign Language Conversion .............................. 12
How To Configure a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller ................................................. 13
Introduction ........................................................... 13
Configuration Process ........................................... 14
Creating the Database .................................. 14
Configuring the Database ............................. 20
Downloading a Controller ..................................... 20
How to Modify an Existing Comfort Controller
Database .................................................................... 23
How To Configure Points ....................................... 27
Analog Software Point .......................................... 28
Custom Milliamp Input ......................................... 30
Custom Milliamp Output ...................................... 35
Custom Voltage Input ........................................... 40
Custom Voltage Output ........................................ 45
Discrete Output ..................................................... 50
Discrete Software Point ........................................ 55
Latched Discrete Input .......................................... 57
Milliamp Input ...................................................... 59
Milliamp Output .................................................... 63
Network Input Point .............................................. 66
Network Output Point ........................................... 70
Pulsed Discrete Input ............................................ 73
Sensed Discrete Input ............................................ 77
Stepper Motor Output ........................................... 80

Temperature Input ................................................. 83
Voltage Input ......................................................... 86
Voltage Output ...................................................... 89
How To Configure Algorithms ............................... 93
AO-Adaptive Control ............................................ 95
AO-Cooling CV .................................................. 105
AO-Cooling VAV ............................................... 118
AO-Fan Tracking ................................................ 131
AO-Heating CV .................................................. 141
AO-Heating VAV ............................................... 155
AO-Humidity Control ......................................... 170
AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ .................................. 179
AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ ............................... 197
AO-Permissive Intrlock ...................................... 213
AO-Reset ............................................................. 221
AO-Shared Transducer ........................................ 231
AO-Static Pressure .............................................. 247
DO-Analog Comparison ..................................... 255
DO-DX Staging VAV ......................................... 262
DO-Electric Heat CV .......................................... 278
DO-Electric Heat VAV ....................................... 294
DO-Enthalpy Comparison ................................... 311
DO-Interlock ....................................................... 317
DO-Lighting Control ........................................... 322
DO-Permissive Intrlock ...................................... 326
DO-Prop Thermo Elec ........................................ 335
DO-Prop Thermo 2 Pipe ..................................... 347
DO-Prop Thermo 4 Pipe ..................................... 358
DO-Pump Control ............................................... 369
DO-Staged Thermostat ....................................... 381
DO-Staging ......................................................... 393
DO-Time Clock ................................................... 406
DO-Time Clock w Check ................................... 413
AOSS Schedule ................................................... 423
Network Broadcast .............................................. 440
Linkage/AOSS Schedule ..................................... 444
NTFC w Enthalpy Check .................................... 466
This document is the property of Carrier Corporation and is delivered on the express condition that it is not to be disclosed,
reproduced in whole or in part, or used for manufacture by anyone other than Carrier Corporation without its written consent, and
that no right is granted to disclose or so use any information contained in said document.
Carrier reserves the right to change or modify the information or product described without prior notice and without incurring any
liability.
2002, Carrier Corporation
Printed in U.S.A.
808-891 Rev. 06/03
Occupancy ........................................................... 477

Sensor Group ....................................................... 478
WSM Air Source ................................................. 484
WSM Cool Source .............................................. 490
Appendix H
Configuration Sheets for LID-based
Configuration ...................................................... 641
Index ....................................................................... 653
How To Configure Schedules ............................... 495

Holiday Schedule ................................................ 496
Network Time Schedule ...................................... 498
Setpoint Schedule ................................................ 499
Time Schedule ..................................................... 501
How To Configure Alarms ................................... 511
Discrete State Alarm ........................................... 512
First Out Alarm ................................................... 520
Limit Alarm ......................................................... 529
Number of Starts Alarm ...................................... 538
Runtime Alarm .................................................... 545
Setpoint Limit Alarm .......................................... 552
How To Configure System Functions .................. 563
Analog Trace Point ............................................. 566
Ctlr-ID ................................................................. 571
Consumable/Loadshed ........................................ 572
Database Status ................................................... 573
Discrete Trace Point ............................................ 575
Internal Consumable ........................................... 580
LID Processor ..................................................... 583
Real Time Clock ................................................. 587
Runtime ............................................................... 592
Configuration Sheets ............................................. 593
Appendix A
CCN Compatibility ............................................. 613
Appendix B
Standard Input and Output Devices .................... 617
Appendix C
Allowable Entries for AI/AO Display Units ....... 622
Appendix D
Allowable Entries for DI/DO Display Units ....... 623
Appendix E
Alarm Information .............................................. 624
Appendix F
LID Operation ..................................................... 627
Appendix G
How To Configure a Newly Installed Comfort
Controller Using a LID ....................................... 635
ii
Caution
Before changing an existing Comfort

Controller database, please read the
section How to Modify an Existing
Comfort Controller Database. If you do
not follow these procedures, the Comfort Controller database could become
corrupt, causing your Comfort Controller to operate improperly.
Manual
Revisions
The Comfort Controller Overview and Configuration Manual is
catalog number 808-891, Rev. 06/03. This manual replaces the
Comfort Controller Overview and Configuration Manual catalog
number 808-891, Rev. 03/02. The following changes have been made
since the 03/02 version.
Section/Chapter
How To Configure
Alarms
Changes
1.
Under Discrete State Alarm, revised the introductory

paragraphs, as well as the description of the Comparison Point
decision on page 513.
iii
iv
Overview
Overview
About this Manual
This manual contains information about the operations of the Comfort

Controller product family and how you must configure the controllers
to perform those operations. The table below describes the contents of
this manual.
Chapter Name
Page
Description
Overview
Presents an overview of the manual and

lists other required documentation.
Introduction
Provides an overview of the Comfort

Controller product family and discusses
the differences between the Comfort
Controller 1600 and Comfort Controller
6400. This section also provides a configuration overview, flow diagrams
overview, and a description of custom
programming and foreign language
conversion.
How To
13
Configure a
Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
Provides the procedure for configuring

a newly installed Comfort Controller
using the Building Supervisor or Network
Service Tool. It also provides instructions
for downloading an existing Comfort
Controller database to a new Comfort
Controller.
How to Modify
23
an Existing Comfort
Controller Database
Describes the operations that change the

Comfort Controller database and require
you to remove, add, and upload the controller to each PC that contains its old
database.
How To
Configure
Points
Provides the following information for

each point: purpose, typical application,
list of required and optional configuration decisions, and a description of each
decision that includes allowable entries
and default values. This chapter also
includes a list of applicable maintenance
decisions and a description of each one.
27
Chapter Name
Page
Description
How To
Configure
Algorithms
93
This chapter provides the following

information for each analog, discrete,
and global algorithm: purpose,
typical application, block diagram
illustrating flow of inputs and outputs,
list of required and optional configuration decisions, and a description of each
How To
Configure
Schedules
495

information for each schedule:
purpose, typical application, list of
required and optional configuration
decisions, and a description of each
How To
Configure
Alarms
511

information for each alarm: purpose,
typical application, block diagram
illustrating flow of inputs and outputs,
list of required and optional configuration decision that includes allowable
entries and default values. This section
also includes a list of maintenance
decision and a description of each
maintenance decision.
Chapter Name
Page
Description
How To
Configure
System Functions
563

information for each system function:
purpose, typical application, list of
required and optional configuration
decisions and a description of each
decision that includes allowable
entries and default values. This
chapter also includes a list of applicable maintenance decisions and a
description of each one.
Configuration
Sheets
593
This chapter contains perforated

configuration sheets for the Comfort
Controller.
Appendix A
613
This appendix lists the CCN system

elements that are compatible with the
Comfort Controller.
Appendix B
617
This appendix lists the engineering

units, ranges, resolutions, and accuracy for the standard input and output
devices supported by the Comfort
Controller.
Appendix C
622
This appendix lists the allowable

entries for analog input/analog output
display units.
Appendix D
623
This appendix lists the allowable

entries for discrete input/discrete
output display units.
Appendix E
624
This appendix lists alarm levels, alarm

sources, alarm description indexes,
and standard control characters for
alarm messages.
Other Required
Documentation
Chapter Name
Page
Description
Appendix F
627
This appendix describes the Local

Interface Devices (LIDs) menu
structure, default screen, keypad and
display. This appendix also provides
instructions for logging on and accessing items in both the status and edit
modes.
Appendix G
635
This appendix provides instructions

for configuring a newly installed
Comfort Controller using a LID.
Appendix H
641
This appendix, called Quickstart, is a

handy reference that provides you
with forms and reference sheets to
configure the Comfort Controller as
quickly as possible. This tear-out
section provides the best way to
quickly see the big configuration
picture plus some important details.
This manual makes reference to the following CCN manuals. All of

these manuals are available from Carrier Literature Distribution.
BEST++ Programmers Reference Manual (808-893)

Building Supervisor III Operation Manual (808-758)
Data Collection III Option Overview and Configuration Manual
(808-705)
Introduction
Introduction
The Comfort Controller product family provides general purpose
HVAC control and monitoring capability in a stand-alone or network
environment using closed-loop, direct digital control. This product
family can also control and monitor equipment such as lighting,
pumps, and cooling towers. The Comfort Controller product family
gives the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) the capability to control
non-Carrier equipment and Carrier HVAC equipment not equipped
with Product Integrated Controls (PICs).
You configure the Comfort Controller to contain a database of the
algorithms, points, schedules, alarms and system functions that are
necessary to control and monitor the equipment at your site. You
enter the configuration data using the following CCN operator interface devices:
Hardware
Overview
Network Service Tool III

Building Supervisor III
Local Interface Device (LID)
ComfortWORKS
There are two types of Comfort Controllers:

Comfort Controller 6400
Both controllers provide the same functions, such as:
Comfort Controller
6400
HVAC Control
proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) loop control
scheduling
custom programming
You can connect 16 field points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the Comfort Controller 6400, also known as the 6400. To connect additional
field points, add optional input/output modules (8 inputs and 8 outputs
per module) to the Comfort Controller 6400. By using multiple I/O
modules, you can connect 48 additional points to the Comfort Controller 6400, giving you the capability to control and/or monitor a total
of up to 64 field points. The appropriate number of I/O modules are
selected for each control situation and simply installed along with the
6400 in your field-selected NEMA-1 enclosure.
5
Figure 2-1
Example of Hardware
Configuration
Figure 2-1 illustrates one possible way to connect 40 points.
Comfort Controller 6400:

1st 6400-I/O Output Module:
2nd 6400-I/O Output Module:
16 I/O field points

16 I/O field points
+ 8 Input field points
40 I/O field points
Figure 2-2 lists the sensors and devices supported by the Comfort
Controller 6400s I/O channels. To determine these sensors and
devices engineering units, ranges, resolutions, and accuracy, refer to
Appendix B.
Figure 2-2
Sensors and Devices
Supported by the
8 INPUTS
Channels
1 to 8
Specifications
Discrete, analog, or temperature
Discrete
Dry contact
Pulsed dry contact
Analog
4-20 mA (2 wire and 4 wire)
0-10 Vdc
Temperature
5K & 10K ohm thermistors (YSI and MCI)
1K ohm nickel RTD (MCI and NTC)
8 OUTPUTS
Channels
9 to 16
Specifications
Discrete or analog
Discrete
24 Vdc@80 mA
Analog
4-20 mA
0-10 Vdc
The Comfort Controller 6400 gives you the capability to deactivate

all inputs, all outputs, or deactivate both inputs and outputs by
simply flipping a switch on the module.
The optional Comfort Controller 6400HOA (Hand-Off-Auto)
consists of eight switches that provide you with the capability to
manually override each discrete output point.
The Comfort Controller 6400 supports the UT203 FID family of I/O
modules for retrofit applications:
Comfort Controller
1600
8 Input
8 Output
4 Input/4 Output
Low Voltage DSIO

High Voltage DSIO*
You must install High Voltage DSIO Module(s) in their own

enclosure because they contain Class 1 wiring.
You can connect 16 field points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the

Comfort Controller 1600.
Figure 2-3 on the next page lists the sensors and devices supported
by the Comfort Controller 1600s I/O channels. To determine these
sensors and devices engineering units, ranges, resolutions, and
accuracy, refer to Appendix B.
Figure 2-3
Sensors and Devices
Supported by the
8 INPUTS
Channels
1 to 4
5&6
7&8
Specifications
Discrete or analog (0-10 Vdc)
Temperature
Discrete, analog, or temperature
Discrete
Dry contact
Pulsed dry contact
Analog
4-20 mA (2 wire only)
0-10 Vdc
Temperature
5K & 10K ohm thermistors (YSI and MCI)
1K ohm nickel RTD (NTC)
8 OUTPUTS
Channels
1 to 4
5&6
7&8
Specifications
Discrete
Analog
4-20 mA
Discrete or analog
Discrete
24 Vdc@80 mA
Analog
4-20 mA
0-10 Vdc
Software
Overview
Figure 2-4
Relationship Between
Library and Database
The Comfort Controller contains a software library and a blank

database. You select the algorithms, points, schedules, alarms, and
system functions required for your application from the library. The
Comfort Controller stores in its database the items you select. The
size of the database is relative to the amount of space the selected
items occupy. Once you establish the database, you configure it.
Library
Where you select:
points
schedules
algorithms
alarms
system functions
1. Select items
from library,
thus adding
them to the
database.
Database
Where selected
items are stored
and configured.
2. Configure the
items.
You can select more than one copy of each item, which allows you
to have multiple occurrences of the same item in the database. For
example, if your application involves controlling five air handlers,
you could select five copies of the AOHeating CV algorithm.
Each copy (occurrence) of the algorithm would have its own configuration and be independent of the others. This flexibility in
configuration gives you the capability to control and monitor HVAC
devices in the manner that you desire.
You can select items from the library until the available area in the
database is filled.
Algorithms
An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

you with the capability to control and monitor HVAC devices in a
safe, energy efficient manner.
Each pre-engineered algorithm contains some combination of
points, schedules, systems functions, and HVAC functions that
provide information to the algorithm. A typical grouping of items
for an algorithm is shown in the flow diagram in Figure 2-5.
Configuration
Overview
After the Comfort Controller is installed, you must create and

configure its database to meet the needs of your sites control
applications.
As you create and configure the database, you answer a series of
questions called configuration decisions. Configuration decisions
are logically grouped into configuration tables. The first tables you
must configure are Service-Config Tables. These tables define
which library items you want to add to the database. For example,
in the Service-Config Tables you specify the algorithms, alarms,
hardware and software points, and schedules needed for your application.
After configuring the Service-Config Tables, you must configure
decisions that provide details about the library items you selected.
For example, if you selected a heating coil algorithm, you would
specify such things as the point that is controlling the air handlers
hot water valve, the point that provides the on/off status of the air
handlers fan, and the Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop algorithm that
provides the occupancy and temperature setpoints for the algorithm.
To determine the values to enter in the configuration decisions, refer
to the completed configuration sheets for your application. These
sheets indicate whether to use the default values or to use an operator interface to change the default values to the ones shown on the
sheets. For your convenience, the configuration sheets list all
decisions in the order in which they appear on the operator interfaces and in this manual.
Interpreting Flow
Diagrams
Flow diagrams are used in this manual to illustrate the flow of

inputs and outputs among blocks of data within an algorithm, alarm,
or schedule. The figure on the next page is the flow diagram for the
AOCooling VAV algorithm.
Each block of data within an algorithm, alarm, or schedule represents a configuration decision, whose name appears at the top of the
block. Each block requires one or more inputs and outputs.
10
As shown in the figure below, inputs appear on the left side of the
block with arrows pointing inward, while outputs are shown on the
right side of the block with arrows pointing outward.
One blocks output becomes another blocks input. Sometimes an
output serves as an input to more than block. When that occurs, a
filled circle is placed on the outputs arrow to indicate the location
where its direction branches off.
Logical and relational operators are often used to connect inputs and
outputs. Sample interpretations are shown on the next page.
Figure 2-5
Sample Flow Diagram
Time
Schedule
Output
PID_Master Loop
Fan Status Point
Maintenance
Output
AND
Status
Enable
Output
Force Status
Cooling
Coil
Valve
Input
Output
Space Setpoint
Force
Low Setpoint
(Low Setpoint +
High Setpoint)/2
High Setpoint
Status
<
Status
Occupancy State ?
Supply Air
Setpoint
VAV
Setpoint
Reset
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
TS Override
(Software
Point)
Output
Status
Input
Sensor
Input
High
Output
Low
Sensor
Status
Average
Setpoint
Force
Status
Supply Air
Temperature
Sensor Input
Output
Status
Force Status
High Humidity Switch
Minimum Output
Output
OR
Status
Force Status
Maximum Output
High Humidity Sensor

Output
>
Status
Force Status
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
Humidity Setpoint
SELECT A
Occupied Low Setpoint

Occupied High Setpoint
SELECT A
-3
B
OR
11
Figure 2-6
Logical and Relational
Operator Usage
Interpretations
A
>
B
Interpretation: If A>B, then C=1 otherwise C=0
A
+
B
Interpretation: C=A+B
A
OR
B
Interpretation: If A=1 or B=1, then C=1 otherwise C=0
Select A
-3
Interpretation: If D=1, then C=-3 otherwise C=0
Custom
Programming
The industry-proven, pre-engineered algorithms provide the type of

control necessary for most applications, but you may want to further
customize and extend them to meet any unique control requirements.
The custom programming language, BEST++, is available to allow
you to easily supplement or enhance the algorithms. You create and
edit custom programs using the BEST++ Programmer's Environment.
For more information on custom programming, refer to the BEST++
Programmerss Reference Manual.
Foreign Language
Conversion
12
You can convert the Comfort Controller software to any language

whose alphabet is supported by the ANSI ASCII code set. If you
are not sure if the Comfort Controller software can be converted to
the language you desire, contact your local Carrier distributor.
How To Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
How To Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
Introduction
This section provides you with the procedures that are necessary to
configure a newly installed Comfort Controller using a Building
Supervisor III. In addition, you can use the Network Service Tool,
Quickstart, or ComfortWORKS. Refer to their respective operating
instructions for configuration procedures.
When installing a Comfort Controller, you must perform a number
of steps in a particular order. These steps are grouped into two
procedures:
Creating the Comfort Controllers database using the ServiceConfig Tables

Configuring the database using the configuration tables
The term create, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

specify information about the items being selected in the ServiceConfig Tables. You must specify information such as channel
types, sensor type or units, channel names, function types and
function units. For example, the AO-Cooling CV algorithms
function type is 2 and its function units might be 2, which indicates
0100%.
The term configure, as it is used in relation to the Comfort Controller, means to specify to the Comfort Controller the information that
it needs to control and monitor HVAC devices in the desired manner. For example, when configuring the AO-Cooling CV algorithm,
you must enter information such as the name of the AO point controlling the air handlers chilled water valve and the Sensor Group
or space temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature
inputs.
In a newly installed Comfort Controller, the database is effectively a
blank page. Based on your application, you decide which algorithms, points, alarms, schedules, and system functions are needed
to create the database. The database, therefore, only consists of the
features and functions required by your application.
13
Configuration
Process
Creating the Database
Follow the steps below to configure a newly installed Comfort

Controller. Only complete the steps needed to configure your
application. For example, if your application does not require
software points, then omit Step 9.
1.
Complete the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point

Configuration Sheets located in Appendix H (Quickstart) of
this manual. Use the reference sheets in that appendix to
assist you.
2.
Set the address of the Comfort Controller with the Network

Configuration Tool (NCT).
3.
Select Add, Controller, and Upload to add and upload the

Comfort Controller to the operator interfaces database.
Note:
4.
If the Upload fails, reset the Comfort Controller

using the RJ-14 reset jumper. Insert the jumper into
the modules modular phone jacks. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the reset to take place, then
remove the jumper.
From the operator interfaces menu, access the ServiceConfig Tables by completing the following steps.
a.
Select Select.
b.
Select the desired Comfort Controller.
c.
Select Diagnostic.
d.
Select Service-Config.
The operator interface displays the list of Service-Config
Tables.
You create the controllers database by defining the
required items in the Service-Config Tables. These
tables are listed in the table on the next page.
14
Table 3-1
Service-Config Tables
Table Name
Purpose
FNCxx-yy
To create a combination of up to 24 of
the following functions in a Comfort
Controller 1600 or up to 96 in a
Comfort Controller 6400: AO, DO,
and global (i.e., AOSS, Linkage)
algorithms, alarms, and time schedules.
HWxx-yy
To create up to 8 hardware points per

table for a total of 16 points in a
Comfort Controller 1600 or 64 points
in a Comfort Controller 6400.
NUMSYS
To create up to 16 holidays, 16 Network Time Schedules, 4 Consumable

Tables of up to 16 schedules each, 4
Runtime Tables of up to 16 schedules
each, and up to 16 Loadshed Tables.
SETPTDEF
To create up to 16 setpoint schedules.
SWxx-yy
To create up to 8 software points per

table for a total of 16 points in a
Comfort Controller 1600 or 32 points
in a Comfort Controller 6400.
UPDATEDB
To update the Comfort Controllers

database
15
Using the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point Configuration Sheets completed in Step 1, configure the ServiceConfig Tables by completing the following steps.
5.
Configure the FNCxx-yy Tables by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are creating each desired AO, DO,
and global algorithm, alarm, and time schedule.
a.
Select the FNCxx-yy Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables.
b.
Enter the function type and engineering unit for each

function.
Note:
Comfort Controller processing can be enhanced
if similar functions are grouped together in the
following order:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
c.
Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Save to

save the table.
d.
Select Download to download the table to the Comfort

Controller.
e.
If configuring a Comfort Controller 6400, repeat Steps a

through d for each table.
Configure the HWxx-yy Table by completing the steps below.

In these steps you are defining the hardware points in groups
of eight points per table.
a.
Select the HWxx-yy Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables.
b.
Enter the channel type, sensor or units, and channel name

for each hardware point.
Note:
16
Alarms
Occupancy
DOPermissive Intrlock
AOPermissive Intrlock
Discrete algorithms
Analog algorithms
Global algorithms
You must enter unique names for each point.
7.
8.
c.

save the table.
d.

Controller.
e.
Repeat Steps a through d for each table.
Configure the NUMSYS Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are indicating the number of
Holiday Schedules, Network Time Schedules, Consumables,
Runtimes, and Loadsheds required. You are also indicating if
language conversion will be performed.
a.
Select the NUMSYS Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables.
b.
Enter the quantity of each type of system function, and

specify whether language conversion will be performed.
c.

save the table.
d.

Controller.
Configure the SETPTDEF Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining the engineering units
(degrees F, % Rh, inches of water, etc.) for each Setpoint
Schedule.
Note:
Any Setpoint Schedule left at 0 is undefined and not

created.
a.
Select the SETPTDEF Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables.
b.
Enter the engineering unit for each Setpoint Schedule.
c.

save the table.
d.

Controller.
17
9.
10.
Configure each SWxx-yy Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining the software points in
groups of eight points per table.
a.
Select the SWxx-yy Table from the list of Service-Config

Tables.
b.
Enter the channel type, sensor or units, and channel name

for each software point.
c.

save the table.
d.

Controller.
e.
Repeat Steps a through d for each table.
Update the Comfort Controllers database with the items

selected in Steps 5 through 9.
a.
Select the UPDATEDB Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables.
b.
Press the Spacebar to toggle the value in the Update

Database configuration decision to Yes.
c.
Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Download to download the table to the Comfort Controller.
While the Comfort Controller database is updating, the
Comfort Controllers red LED blinks rapidly. The
update time varies with the size of the database. Wait
until the Comfort Controllers red LED blinks slowly
before proceeding to the next step.
Note:
18
All Comfort Controller communication with the

CCN is disabled during the update.
11.
Remove, Add, and Upload the Comfort Controller from the

operator interfaces database. This step is required because
the operator interfaces database no longer matches the
Comfort Controllers database.
Note:
12.
If the operator interface displays an error message,

the update was not yet completed. Wait until the
Comfort Controllers red LED blinks slowly again,
and repeat Step 11.
Verify that the uploaded database contains the correct quantity and type of points (from Points, Display), and the correct
quantity and type of functions including algorithms, alarms,
Time Schedules, Setpoint Schedules, etc. (from Modify,
Controller).
If the uploaded database is correct, proceed to Step 13.
If the uploaded database is not correct, check the
DBSTATUS maintenance screen for errors. If Yes is displayed in the Database Error maintenance decision, there is
an invalid entry in one of the Service-Config Table decisions,
or insufficient memory available for your application.
Note:
13.
Database items are created in their respective Service-Config Table. Each table is created in sequential order, with the FNC01-24 Table being first, as
shown in Table 3-1. If a configuration error is
encountered, the Comfort Controller will stop
updating the database at the point in the respective
Service-Config Table where the error occurred.
If you wish to modify the default hardware or software point

descriptions, complete the steps below.
a.
Select Points.
b.
Select the appropriate hardware or software table.
c.
Select the desired point.
d.
Press the F3 key, modify the description, then press

Enter.
e.
Repeat as necessary.
f.
Modify and Download the controller database to download the point descriptors to the Comfort Controller.
19
1.
Configuring the
Database
2.
Select Modify and Controller from the operator interfaces

menu.
Configure each table for points, algorithms, alarms, etc.
All the items to be configured in Step 2 (i.e., CCCV_,
MADVV, etc.) will be listed alphabetically with their associated function table number (01 to 96 for a Comfort Controller
6400 and 01 to 24 for a Comfort Controller 1600).
Note:
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Save to save
the table.
Select Download to download the table to the Comfort Controller.
Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each table.
Modify and Upload the Comfort Controllers database to the
operator interface. After completing this step, you will be
able to force points from the maintenance display.
Caution:
Downloading a
Controller
When configuring algorithms (such as AO-Humidity Control and Heating VAV), there are usually
optional inputs that are not used. Leave the inputs
set to their default values. For example, in Humidity
Control, keep the Fan Status Point default value set
to SENSDI00. Deleting default values will negatively affect Comfort Controller processing speed.
If you modify the Service-Config Tables IN ANY

WAY after this initial configuration, you must perform
Steps 10 through 12 under Creating the Database.
Use the following procedure to download an existing Comfort

Controller database from a Building Supervisor or Network Service
Tool to a new Comfort Controller. You can also use the procedure
when upgrading a Comfort Controllers software by downloading
the existing database into the new controller with the new software.
The procedure accomplishes three basic tasks:
Initializing the controller

Building the configuration tables
Downloading data to the configuration tables
1.
20
Using the LID Interface Cable, RAM flush the Comfort

Controller module by inserting the cable into both the
modules phone jacks. Power down the controller for 30
seconds, then remove the CCN communication bus. Power
up the module. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the reset
to take place, then remove the cable.
2.
Set the Comfort Controllers address with the Network

Configuration Tool, then replace the CCN communication
bus.
3.
From the Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool,

initialize the controller by completing the following steps:
a.
Select Select.
b.
Select the desired Comfort Controller.
c.
Select Modify.
d.
Select Download.
The download results (Downloaded or Rejected) will
display in the Results column. With the exception of the
Service-Config Tables, the status message Rejected will
display next to most tables.
4.
Build the configuration tables by completing the steps below:

a.
Select Diagnostic.
b.
Select Service-Config.
c.
Select the UPDATEDB Table from the list of ServiceConfig Tables
d.
Press the Spacebar to toggle the value in the Update

Database configuration decision to Yes.
e.
Press the F2 key to activate the menu, then select Download to download the tables.
Caution:
Do not select Save.
While the controllers database is updating, the Comfort

Controllers red LED blinks rapidly. Wait until the Comfort
Controllers red LED blinks slowly before proceeding to the
next step.
Note:
All Comfort Controller communication with the

CCN is disabled during the update.
21
5.
Download the data to the configuration tables by completing

the steps below:
a.
Select Modify.
b.
Select Download.
The download status (Downloaded, Different, or Rejected) displays in the Results column. Most tables will
have the message Downloaded displayed next to them.
BEST++ tables, however, will have the message Different
displayed next to them. (You will download BEST++
tables in Step 7.)
If the message Rejected displays next to a table, repeat
Step 5.
6.
Complete the steps below to verify that the tables successfully

downloaded.
a.
Select Diagnostic.
b.
Select Verify-Config.
If Different or Rejected is displayed next to tables other than

BEST++ tables, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
If the tables were downloaded properly, proceed to the next
step.
7.
22
If there are any BEST++ programs in your database, complete

the following steps:
a.
Enter the BEST++ environment.
b.
Select and Download the BEST++ file name(s) you wish

to download.
c.
When the download is complete, exit the BEST++ environment.
d.
Select Remove to remove the controller from the Building Supervisor or Network Service Tools database.
e.
Select Add, Controller, and Upload to copy the new

BEST or BEST++ data from the Comfort Controller to the
Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool.
How To Modify an
Existing Comfort
Controller Database
How to Modify an
Existing Comfort
Controller
Database
When using Building Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III, or
ComfortWORKS, it is important to maintain a current database on
each PC that will be accessing a Comfort Controller.
You should always keep a backup copy of the last known good
database. To copy the database, refer to the appropriate operator
interfaces manual and follow the instructions to add and copy a
currently uploaded controllers database.
The following operations change the Comfort Controller database
and require the controller to be removed, added, and uploaded to
each operator interface containing its old database.
Using QuickStart to change, add, or remove any item in the

Comfort Controller.
Note:
Using Building Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III, or

ComfortWORKS 1.0a or earlier to modify any entry in the
Diagnostic Service Configuration tables, and then performing an Update Database.
Note:
Verifying Database
Integrity
Changing items such as units on a hardware

point requires you to remove, add, and upload
that controllers database to all the operator
interfaces that contain it.
If you made any of the above changes, you can

update the ComfortWORKS 2.0 or later PC by
uploading the controller again. You do not need to
perform a controller Remove.
Since most installations use databases on multiple PCs, you should

always perform a Diagnostic-Verify Configuration before accessing
an installation with an old database.
If the Diagnostic-Verify of the database reports any items as different, follow the procedure listed below. You should not perform
Modify-Download at this time, since the database has changed.
23
If a Modify-Download of an old database is performed,

a database corruption may occur. This may cause
improper operation of functions, and input/outputs.
Caution:
1.
View the Diagnostic Maintenance DBSTATUS table. If

Database Error, EEPROM Error, or RAM Error is Yes, refer
to Correcting Database and Memory Errors below.
2.
If there are no DBSTATUS errors, print the DiagnosticVerify report or note the table names listed as different.
3.
Go to each of the configuration tables listed as different in the

Diagnostic-Verify Report, and upload the configuration table.
Carefully check the configuration before and after each
upload to see which configuration decisions changed.
If the changes are not desired, leave the table without

saving, then re-enter the table and download the last
know configuration.
If any garbled data appears in the upload or if a message

similar to Table or Block not Defined in Controller
appears, you should immediately remove, add, and
upload the controller to the operator interface.
Note:
Correcting Database
and Memory Errors
24
When this occurs, the database in the Comfort

Controller is different from the database in the
operator interface.
Use the following procedure to correct database and memory errors:

1.
If EEPROM or RAM error is Yes, the controllers database is

full and you need to delete at least one function, point, schedule, etc. in order to add any new items.
2.
If Database Error is Yes, invalid information has been downloaded to the controller. Do not Remove, Add, and Upload
the controller at this point, as the database could contain
improper data and the last known good configuration will be

lost. Database Error can be Yes for the following reasons:
You have entered an invalid entry in one of the Diagnostic-Service Configuration tables and then performed an
Update Database. The only way to put invalid entries in
the Diagnostic-Service Table is through Carrier Controls
or ComfortWORKS 1.0a or earlier Service Configuration.
If an invalid entry is placed in any Service entry, delete
or correct the entry and perform another Update Database. More information on correcting a problem of this
nature is in Step 12 of Creating the Database.
You have downloaded from an old database via Building

Supervisor III, Network Service Tool III (Carrier Controls), or ComfortWORKS. You can download the last
known good PC database to the controller by following
the procedure for Downloading a Controller above.
25
26
How To Configure
Points
How To
Configure
Points
Overview
This section provides the following information for each point:
Purpose
Typical application
List of required and optional configuration decisions
Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable entries and default values
List of maintenance decisions
Description of each maintenance decision
Note:
Some standard input/output (I/O) points do not have

configuration decisions because they are pre-configured.
Points with custom engineering units, such as Custom
Milliamp Input and Custom Voltage Input, however, do
require you to complete configuration decisions.
Discrete and analog software points do not have configuration decisions.
Description of Points
The Comfort Controller 6400 supports 64 hardware (I/O) points and

32 software points.
The Comfort Controller 1600 supports 16 hardware (I/O) points and
16 software points.
For easy reference, all points are presented in alphabetical order:
Analog Software Point
Custom Milliamp Input
Custom Milliamp Output
Custom Voltage Input
Custom Voltage Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Software Point
Latched Discrete Input
Milliamp Input
Milliamp Output
Network Data In
Network Data Out
Pulsed Discrete Input
Sensed Discrete Input
Stepper Motor Output
Temperature Input
Voltage Input
Voltage Output
27

ANSWPT_M
Software Point Type 2
Analog Software
Point
Analog software points serve three purposes:
Give a custom program created in BEST++ the capability to

display analog values that can be used as inputs to standard
algorithms
Make the output of any analog type algorithm the input to

another algorithm
Serve as the destination of a Broadcast or Data Transfer point.
An analog software point can be displayed and forced.

Typical Application
This point can be configured to receive a broadcasted outside air

temperature value.
List of Maintenance
Decisions
The following read-only, maintenance decisions are applicable to

this point type. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this point.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Maintenance Decisions
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any
algorithms that reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data that this point represents. This value
includes any conversions that are made based on point type or units.
This value also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
28
-9999.9 to 9999.9

ANSWPT_M
Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has
been applied to this point. The forces are listed in order from
highest to lowest priority, with 1 being the highest force priority.
Valid Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Building Supervisor Force
Monitor/Remote Force
Min Off Time Force
Controlling POC Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this point.
Valid Display
0 = Valid value
2 = Configuration error
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If
an alarm has not been configured for this point, the value in this
decision will always be Normal.
Valid Display
Normal = Point is within configured limits,

or it was not configured.
Alarm = Point is outside configured limits.
29

CMAMPI_C
Hardware Point Type 3
Custom Milliamp
Input
A custom milliamp input is a hardware point that converts an input

signal with a maximum range of 0-22 mA to a configurable range of
engineering units. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering
units and their conversion limits.
The equation for the input conversion is:
[(Input - Low Input Endpoint) * (High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint) /
(High Input Endpoint - Low Input Endpoint)] + Low Conversion Endpoint
The conversion is a linear interpolation of the input between the

Low and High Input Endpoint to the Low and High Conversion
Endpoint. Figure 4-1 illustrates the conversion.
List of Configuration
Decisions
The following decisions are applicable to this point type. You must
configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions are
optional.
*
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Low Input Endpoint

High Input Endpoint
Low Conversion Endpoint
High Conversion Endpoint
Low Input Fault
High Input Fault
Externally Powered

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Control Algorithm Name
Alarm Algorithm Name
30

CMAMPI_C
Figure 4-1
Linear
Interpolation
of Custom
Milliamp Input
VALUE
High
Conversion
Endpoint
Converted
Value
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
INPUT
Low
Input
Endpoint
High
Input
Endpoint
Configuration Low Input Endpoint

Decisions
You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input signal that will
be converted. For example, if you specify 4 mA and the input sensor is <=
4mA, the computed value will be the Low Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 22.0 mA
4.0
High Input Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input signal that will
be converted. For example, if you specify 18 mA and the input sensor is >=
18mA, the computed value will be the High Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 22.0 mA
20.0
31

CMAMPI_C

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion value when the
input signal is less than or equal to the Low Input Endpoint. For example, if
you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
0.00 to 100.00% and an entry of 90.00 is equal to 90% when the input signal is
<= Low Input Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Valid range based upon selected display units.

0.00

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion value when the
input signal is greater than or equal to the High Input Endpoint. For example,
if you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
>= High Input Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

90.00
Low Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the lower limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 22.0 mA
4.0
High Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the upper limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 22.0 mA
20.0
Externally Powered
You must configure this decision to indicate whether the sensor connected to
this channel is externally powered.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
32
Bldg. Supvr. = No/Yes

LID = 0(No) / 1(Yes)
No

CMAMPI_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any algorithms
that reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data
that this point represents. This value includes any conversions that are made
based on point type, units, or configured parameters. This value also includes
the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has been
applied to this point. The forces are listed in order from highest to lowest
priority, with 1 being the highest force priority.
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this hardware point.
It indicates whether the sensor reading of this device is valid.
Valid Display
0 = Valid sensor reading

1 = Reading out of range for this type of sensor, or
there is a communication error with the hardware
channel
33

CMAMPI_M
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point being monitored by an
Alarm Algorithm is in alarm. If an Alarm Algorithm has not been configured
for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
Valid Display
Normal = Point is not in alarm.

Alarm = Point is in alarm.
Sensor Value
The value in this decision represents the converted value of the physical sensor
into the configured engineering units, disregarding any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual sensor reading in unconverted
units. This value is the measurable result of the physical sensor.
Valid Display
0.0 to 22.0 mA
Channel Number
The value in this decision indicates the configured hardware channel number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

The value in this decision indicates the name of the standard control algorithm
configured to use this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name of
the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point is
not configured for use by any algorithm.
Valid Display
Eight-character algorithm name

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to monitor
this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any
alarm.
Valid Display
34

CMAMPO_C
Custom Milliamp
Output
A custom milliamp output is a hardware point that converts a

calculated input value with a configurable range of engineering
units to a configured range of 0-22 mA. Refer to Appendix C for a
list of engineering units and their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Conversion Endpoint) * (High Output Endpoint - Low Output Endpoint) /
(High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint)] + Low Output Endpoint
The conversion is a linear interpolation of the calculated input value

between the Low and High Conversion Endpoint to the Low and
High Output Endpoint. Figure 4-2 illustrates the conversion.
Decisions
configure the asterisked decisions.
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Low Output Endpoint

High Output Endpoint

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
35

CMAMPO_C
Figure 4-2
Linear
Interpolation
of Custom
Milliamp
Output
VALUE
High
Output
Endpoint
Output
Value
Low
Output
Endpoint
INPUT
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
Configuration
Decisions
High
Conversion
Endpoint
Low Output Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the lowest value the output can be
as a result of converting the input signal.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 22.0 mA
4.0 mA

You must configure this decision to indicate the highest value the output can be
Allowable Entries
Default Value
36
0.0 to 22.0 mA
20.0

CMAMPO_M

You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input value. When
the input value is less than or equal to the Low Conversion Endpoint, the output
signal equals the Low Output Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input value. When
the input value is greater than or equal to the High Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the High Output Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions

0.0
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algorithms that
reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data that
this point represents. This value includes any conversions that are made based
on point type, units, or configured parameters. This value also includes the
effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
37

CMAMPO_M
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If an alarm
type has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be
Normal.
Valid Display
Normal = Point is within configured limits, or it was

not configured.
Control Value
The value in this decision represents the converted value in the configured
engineering units, disregarding any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual output value. This value is the
measurable result of the physical output.
Valid Display
38
0.0 to 22.0 mA

CMAMPO_M
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to monitor this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by
any alarm.
Valid Display
39

CVOLTI_C
Custom Voltage
Input
A custom voltage input is a hardware point that converts an input

signal with a maximum range of 0-11 Vdc to a configurable range
of engineering units. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering
units and their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Input Endpoint) * (High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint) /
(High Input Endpoint - Low Input Endpoint)] + Low Conversion Endpoint

Decisions
optional.
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Low Input Endpoint

High Input Endpoint
Low Input Fault
High Input Fault

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
40

CVOLTI_C
Figure 4-3
Linear Interpolation of
VALUE
High
Conversion
Endpoint
Converted
Value
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
INPUT
Low
Input
Endpoint
Configuration
Decisions
High
Input
Endpoint
Low Input Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input
signal that will be converted. For example, if you specify 2Vdc and
the input sensor is <= 2Vdc, the computed value will be the Low
Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

2.0
High Input Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input
signal that will be converted. For example, if you specify 9Vdc and
the input sensor is >= 9Vdc, the computed value will be the High
Conversion Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

10.0
41

CVOLTI_C

You must configure this decision to indicate the Conversion Value when the
input signal is less than or equal to the Low Input Endpoint. For example, if
you select % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
<= Low Input Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.00

You must configure this decision to indicate the Conversion Value when the
input signal is greater than or equal to the High Input Endpoint. For example,
if you specify % as the engineering unit for the sensor, the allowable entries are
>= High Input Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

00.00
Low Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the lower limit that indicates the input sensor is out
of range.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

2.0
High Input Fault

Use this decision to specify the upper limit that indicates that the input sensor
is out of range.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
42
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

10.0

CVOLTI_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
43

CVOLTI_M
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If an alarm has
not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Hardware Value
units. This value is the measurable output of the physical sensor.
Valid Display
0 to 11Vdc
Channel Number
The value in this decision indicates the configured hardware channel number for
this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

configured to use this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name of the
last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point is not
configured for use by any algorithm.
Valid Display

alarm.
Valid Display
44

CVOLTO_C
Custom Voltage
Output
A custom voltage output converts an input signal with a

configurable range of engineering units to a configured range of 0 to
11 Vdc. Refer to Appendix C for a list of engineering units and
their conversion limits.
[(Input - Low Conversion Endpoint) * (High Output Endpoint - Low Output Endpoint) /
(High Conversion Endpoint - Low Conversion Endpoint)] + Low Output Endpoint

Decisions
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Low Output Endpoint


System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
45

CVOLTO_C
Figure 4-4
Linear
Interpolation
of Custom
Voltage
Output
VALUE
High
Output
Endpoint
Output
Value
Low
Output
Endpoint
INPUT
Low
Conversion
Endpoint
Configuration
Decisions
High
Conversion
Endpoint
Low Output Endpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the lowest value the output can be
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

2.0

You must configure this decision to indicate the highest value the output can be
Allowable Entries
Default Value
46
0.0 to 11.0 Volts

10.0

CVOLTO_M

You must configure this decision to indicate the minimum input value. When
the input value is less than or equal to the Low Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the Low Output Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum input value. When
the input value is greater than or equal to the High Conversion Endpoint, the
output signal equals the High Output Endpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions

0.0
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
47

CVOLTO_M
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be Normal.
Valid Display

not configured.
Control Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual output value. This value is the
measurable result of the physical output.
Valid Display
48
0 to 11Vdc

CVOLTO_M
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
49
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
Discrete Output
Normal Output Signal
A discrete output is a hardware point that converts an input state (on

or off) to a configurable discrete output signal that is used to drive a
relay. You can configure two output signal types: normal or inverted. For a list of discrete engineering units, refer to Appendix D.
If the output signal type is configured as normal and the input
transitions from off to on, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the delay timer and minimum off timer have expired.
If the timers have expired, the Comfort Controller turns on the

output and starts the minimum on timer.
If the timers have not expired, the Comfort Controller waits until
the timers do expire, turns the output on, and starts the minimum
on timer.
If the output signal type is configured as normal and the input

transitions from on to off, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the minimum on timer has expired.
Inverted Output Signal
50
If the minimum on timer has expired, the Comfort Controller

turns off the output and starts the minimum off timer.
If the minimum on timer has not expired, the Comfort Controller

waits until the timer does expire, turns the output off, and starts
the minimum off timer.
If the output signal type is configured as inverted and the input

transitions from on to off, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the delay timer and minimum off timer have expired.
If the timers have expired, the Comfort Controller turns on the

output and starts the minimum on timer.
If the timers have not expired, the Comfort Controller waits until
the timers do expire, turns the output on, and starts the minimum
on timer.
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
If the output signal type is configured as inverted and the input

transitions from off to on, the Comfort Controller checks to see
whether the minimum on timer has expired.
Decisions
If the minimum on timer has expired, the Comfort Controller

turns off the output and starts the minimum off timer.
If the minimum on timer has not expired, the Comfort Controller

waits until the timer does expire, turns the output off, and starts
the minimum off timer.
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Logic Type
Minimum Off Time
Minimum On Time
Delay Time

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
51
Discrete Output
DISCRO_C
Configuration
Decisions
Logic Type
You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion logic you desire.
Normal = Standard Logic
When the algorithm determines that the output should be 0
(off), the DO point will be turned off. When the algorithm
determines that the output should be 1 (on), the DO point
will be turned on.
Invert
= Reverse Logic
When the algorithm determines that the output should be 0
(off), the DO point will be turned on. When the algorithm
determines that the output should be 1 (on), the DO point
will be turned off.
Allowable Entries
Bldg. Supvr. = Normal/Invert

LID = 0(Normal) / 1(Invert)
Default Value
Normal
Minimum On Time
You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds the output
must remain on.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
0
Minimum Off Time

You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds the output
must remain off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
0
Delay Time
You must configure this decision to indicate the number of seconds that must
elapse before output is turned on.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
52
0 to 3600 seconds
0
Discrete Output
DISCRO_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual system value of this discrete
point. This value includes any output logic that may have been configured,
and also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on) for normal logic
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
53
Discrete Output
DISCRO_M
Alarm Status
type has not been configured for this point, the value in this decision will be
Normal.
Valid Display

not configured.
Control Value
The value in this decision displays the actual state of the point, disregarding
any applied forces.
Valid Display
Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on) for normal logic
Hardware Value
This decision displays the actual state of the hardware point, disregarding any
logic type conversion.
Valid Display
Open/Close
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
54

DISWPT_M
Discrete Software
Point
A discrete software point gives a custom program created in

BEST++ the capability to display discrete values that can be used as
inputs to standard algorithms. It is also used to make the output of
any discrete type algorithm the input to another algorithm.
A discrete software point can be displayed and forced.
Typical Application
This point can be used in a custom program to generate an alarm

when the value of the Discrete Software Point matches the alarm
state.
List of Maintenance
Decisions

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algorithms that reference this point. This value includes the effect of
any applied forces.
Valid Display
Open (DO = off) / Close (DO = on)
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
55

DISWPT_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this
hardware point. It indicates whether the sensor reading of this
device is valid.
Valid Display

1 = Reading out of range for this type of
sensor, or there is a communication
error with the hardware channel
Alarm Status
The value in this decision indicates whether the point is in alarm. If
an alarm has not been configured for this point, the value in this
decision will be Normal.
Valid Display
56
Normal = Point is within configured limits,

or it was not configured.

LATCHI_M
Latched Discrete
Input
A latched discrete input is a hardware point that detects a momentary input from a dry-contact, converts the input to the configured
logic state, and saves it until it is read by the algorithm that is
monitoring the point.
Typical Application
You can use this point to capture momentary contact closures such
as the closing of a door.
List of Maintenance
Decisions

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Channel Number
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by any
algorithms that reference this point. This value includes the effect
of any applied forces.
Valid Display
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
57

LATCHI_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this hardware point. It
indicates whether the sensor reading of this device is valid.
Valid Display

1 = Reading out of range for this type of sensor, or there is
a communication error with the hardware channel
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
The value in this decision displays the actual state of the discrete point, disregarding any applied forces.
Valid Display
Channel Number
this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

alarm.
Valid Display
58
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_C
Milliamp Input
Configuration Decision
A milliamp input is a hardware point that converts a 4-20 mA input

signal to a standard range of engineering units. Refer to Appendix
B for a list of standard types supported
The following decision is applicable to this point type. Configuring

it is optional.
Offset
List of Maintenance
Decisions

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
59
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M
Offset
Use this decision to indicate the value that is added to or subtracted from the
converted value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
The value in this decision represents the force level, if any, that has been applied to this point. The forces are listed in order from highest to lowest priority,
with 1 being the highest force priority.
Valid Display
60
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
Valid Display
Actual milliamp reading
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64
61
Milliamp Input
MAMP_I_M

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
62
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
Milliamp Output
List of Maintenance
Decisions
A milliamp output is a hardware point that converts an input signal

with a standard range of engineering units to a pre-configured range
of 4-20 mA. Refer to Appendix B for a list of standard types supported.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by algorithms that reference this point. The range of values is determined
by the type of data that this point represents. This value includes
any conversions that are made based on point type, units, or configured parameters. This value also includes the effect of any applied
forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
63
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
Valid Display
64

not configured.
Milliamp Output
MAMP_O_M
Control Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
Valid Display
Actual milliamp reading
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
65
Network Input Point

NET_IN_C
Network Input
Point
A network input point requests data from a point in another device

on the CCN at a configured timed interval. In order for this point to
retrieve data, it must be referenced by at least one standard algorithm, alarm, or system function.
Typical Application
You can configure this point to provide the fan status of a remote air
handler as input to a standard algorithm.
Decisions
optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
CCN Element Number

CCN Bus Number
Point Name
Communication Rate

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Configuration
Decisions
CCN Element Number

You must configure this decision to enter the element number of the
system element from which the point will be read.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
66
1 to 239
1
Network Input Point

NET_IN_M
CCN Bus Number

You must configure this decision to enter the bus number of the system element from which the point will be read.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 239
0
Point Name
You must configure this decision to specify the point name used in the system
element where the data is being requested.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
(blank)
Communication Rate
Use this decision to indicate how often (in minutes) the value will be read from
the selected system element. An entry of 0 indicates that this point will read
whenever requested by an algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 60 minutes
5
System Value
that this point represents. This value includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
67
Network Input Point

NET_IN_M
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this network point.
It indicates whether the value of this point was successfully read.
Valid Display
0 = Value read successfully

1 = CCN Communication Bus failure
Alarm Status
Valid Display
68

not configured.
Network Input Point

NET_IN_M

Valid Display

alarm.
Valid Display
69
Network Output Point

NETOUT_C
Network Output
Point
A network output point sends data from a point within the Comfort
Controller to a point in another device on the CCN at a configured
timed interval. In order for this point to transmit data, it must be
referenced by at least one standard algorithm, alarm, or system
function.
Typical Application
You can configure this point in an air handler to transmit the output
of its Permissive Interlock algorithm to control a damper position in
another air handler.
Decisions
optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
CCN Element Number

CCN Bus Number
Point Name
Communication Rate

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Configuration
Decisions
CCN Element Number

You must configure this decision to enter the element number of the
system element to which the point will be written.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 251
1
CCN Bus Number

You must configure this decision to enter the bus number of the
system element to which the point will be written.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
70
0 to 251
0

NETOUT_M
Point Name
You must configure this decision to specify the point name used in the system
element where the data is being transmitted.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
(blank)
Communication Rate
Use this decision to indicate how often (in minutes) the value will be written to
the selected system element. An entry of 0 indicates that this point will transmit
its value over the network whenever requested by an algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 60 minutes
5
System Value
this point represents. This value includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
71

NETOUT_M
Status
The value in this decision represents the system status for this network point. It
indicates whether the value of this point was successfully transmitted on the
CCN.
Valid Display
0 = Value sent successfully

1 = CCN Communication Bus failure
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
72

PULSDI_C
Pulsed Discrete
Input
A pulsed discrete input is a hardware point that:
Converts a pulsed dry-contact input to a configurable range of

engineering units (usage rate). The conversion is done using
configurable parameters for the conversion factor and sample
time.
The converted value is expressed as follows:
Converted value = (# of pulses over sample time) * conversion factor
You could convert a pulsed dry-contact to frequency using one

second as the sample time and Hertz as the conversion factor.
You could determine Kw demand by multiplying the number of
pulses by a wattmeter conversion factor.
Displays the number of accumulated pulses. If you select the

engineering unit to be type 46, which represents pulses and not a
usage rate, pulses will be displayed.
Typical Application
You can use this point to convert the input received from a flow
meter to gallons per minute (GPM) or liters per minute (L/min).
Decisions
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Conversion Factor
Sample Time

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
73

PULSDI_C
Configuration
Decisions
Conversion Factor
You must configure this decision to specify the amount that each pulse represents. For example, in a wattmeter application, the value you enter in this
decision would represent the number of Kilowatt Hours for each pulse.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 9999.99
1.00
Sample Time
You must configure this decision to specify the time period over which the
Comfort Controller collects input pulses before multiplying them by the Conversion Factor.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
74
1 to 1800 seconds
60

PULSDI_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
75

PULSDI_M
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Hardware Value
The value in this decision represents the actual sensor reading in pulses. This
value is the measurable output of the physical sensor.
Valid Display
Accumulated pulses
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

configured to monitor this point. If more than one algorithm applies, the name
of the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point
is not configured for use by any algorithm.
Valid Display

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to use this
point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any alarm.
Valid Display
76

SENSDI_C
Sensed Discrete
Input
A sensed discrete input is a hardware point that converts a dry-contact

input to a logic state based on the selected display units. For a list of
discrete engineering units, refer to Appendix D.
Use this type of point for devices that stay in a fixed state for a period
of time, such as a motor status relay.
Typical Application
You can use this point to monitor auxiliary contacts to indicate fan
status.
The following decision is applicable to this point type. You must

configure it.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Output Logic Type
The following read-only, maintenance decisions are applicable to this

point type. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this point.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Output Logic Type

You must configure this decision to indicate the conversion logic you
desire.
Normal = Standard Logic
The operator interface displays on when the sensor
contacts for this DI point are closed. The operator interface displays off when the sensor contacts are open.
Invert = Reverse Logic
The operator interface displays on when the sensor
contacts for this DI point are open. The operator interface displays off when the sensor contacts are closed.
Allowable Entries

Default Value
Normal
77

SENSDI_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
that reference this point. This value includes any logic type that may have been
configured, and also includes the effect of any applied forces.
Valid Display
Open (DI = off) / Close (DI = on) for normal logic
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
Valid Display
78

not configured.

SENSDI_M
Sensor Value
The value in this decision displays the converted value, disregarding any
applied forces.
Valid Display
Open (DI = off) / Close (DI = on) for normal logic
Hardware Value
This decision displays the actual hardware position of the physical sensor,
disregarding any logic type conversion.
Valid Display
Open/Close
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

any alarm.
Valid Display
79

STPMOT_C
Stepper Motor
Output
A stepper motor output gives the Comfort Controller the capability

to interface with a DSIO Module in order to control a stepper motor.
Note:
The algorithms do not support Stepper Motor Output.

Only custom programs created in BEST++ support Stepper Motor Output.
Typical Application
You can use this point in conjunction with a custom program to

control a four-winding stepper motor.
LIst of Configuration
Decisions
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Stepping Rate
Duty Cycle

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Channel Number
Configuration
Decisions
Stepping Rate
You must configure this decision to define the stepping rate for the
motor this output is controlling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 1000
30
Duty Cycle
You must configure this decision to specify the minimum pulse
width required to change the position of the stepper motor. When
the pulse width is high, the motor requires greater torque and power.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
80
33 to 100
100

STPMOT_M
Maintenance
Decisions
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
81

STPMOT_M
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to use this
point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use by any alarm.
Valid Display
82
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_C
Temperature Input
A temperature input is a hardware point that converts resistive input

from a thermistor type transducer for the sensor types listed below.
For a list of metric conversions, resolution, and accuracy, refer to
Appendix B.
Sensor Type
Range
1 = YSI 10K Thermistor
-40.0 to 245.0F
2 = 1000 ohm RTD
-40.0 to 220.0F
3 = 5K Thermistor
-40.0 to 245.0F
4 = Not supported
5 = MCI 10K Thermistor
Temperature Sensor
-40.0 to 245.0F
6 = NTC 100K Thermistor

Temperature Sensor
72.0 to 282.0F
Note:
If configuring a T-56 Space Temperature Sensor, refer to

the note in this chapters description of Voltage Input.
Typical Application
You can use this point to interface with a Carrier-approved temperature sensor to provide duct discharge temperature.
The following decision is applicable to this point type. Configuring

it is optional.
Offset
List of Maintenance
Decisions

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Channel Number
83
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_C and TEMP_I_M
Configuration
Decision
Offset
converted temperature value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
-10.0 to 10.0^F
0.0
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display
84

channel
Temperature Input
TEMP_I_M
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
Valid Display
Actual temperature reading
Channel Number
this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

alarm.
Valid Display
85
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_C
Voltage Input
A voltage input is a hardware point that converts a 0-10 Vdc input

signal to a standard range of engineering units. For a list of conversions, resolution, and accuracy, refer to Appendix B.
Note:
If connecting a T-56 Space Temperature Sensor to this

input, you must wire the sensor as a Temperature Input.
For example, on a Comfort Controller 6400, you must set
Switch 2 to Int and Switch 3 to Other. On a Comfort
Controller 1600, you must wire to Channels 5-8 and set
Switch 1 to Other (Off).
Typical Application
You can use this point to interface with a Carrier-approved temperature sensor to provide duct discharge temperature.
The following decision is applicable to this algorithm. Configuring

it is optional.
Offset
List of Maintenance
Decisions

System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Sensor Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
86
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_C and VOLT_I_M
Configuration
Decision
Offset
converted value in order to compensate for sensor inaccuracy.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decision
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0
System Value
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
87
Voltage Input
VOLT_I_M
Alarm Status
Valid Display

not configured.
Sensor Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
Valid Display
Actual voltage reading
Channel Number
this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

Valid Display

alarm.
Valid Display
88
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
Voltage Output
List of Maintenance
Decisions
A voltage output is a hardware point that converts an input signal

with a standard range of engineering units to a pre-configured range
of 0-10 Vdc. Refer to Appendix B for a list of standard types
supported.
System Value
Force
Status
Alarm Status
Control Value
Hardware Value
Channel Number
Maintenance Decision
System Value
The value in this decision represents the actual value used by the
algorithms that reference this point. The range of values is determined by the type of data that this point represents. This value
includes any conversions that are made based on point type, units,
or configured parameters. This value also includes the effect of any
applied forces.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
89
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
Force
Valid Display
0 =
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 =
10=
No force in effect
Fire Force
Safety Force
Service Force
Min Off Time Force
BEST Force
Temp Override Force
Loadshed Force
Status
Valid Display

channel
Alarm Status
Valid Display
90

not configured.
Voltage Output
VOLT_O_M
Control Value
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Hardware Value
Valid Display
Actual voltage reading
Channel Number
for this point.
Valid Display
1 to 64

the last configured algorithm is displayed. This field is blank when the point
is not configured for use by any algorithm.
Valid Display

The value in this decision indicates the name of the alarm configured to
monitor this point. This field is blank when the point is not configured for use
by any alarm.
Valid Display
91
92
How To Configure
Algorithms
How To
Configure
Algorithms
Overview
This section provides the following information for each algorithm:
Purpose
Typical application
Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable entries and default values.
Definition of an
Algorithm
An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

you with the capability to control and monitor HVAC devices in a
safe, energy efficient manner. An algorithm can consist of one or
more HVAC control routines, schedules, or input and output points.
Function Types
When configuring the FNCxx-yy Table's (Service-Config Table)

Function Unit decision, refer to the Tables 5-1 to 5-3. This same
information is also included in Appendix H on the Function Types,
Default Names and EEPROM Summary Sheet.
Table 5-1
Algorithm Function Types
AO Algorithm Name
Function Type
AOAdaptive Control........................... 1
AOCooling CV ................................... 2
AOCooling VAV ................................ 3
AOFan Tracking ................................. 4
AOHeating CV ................................... 5
AOHeating VAV ................................ 6
AOHumidity Control .......................... 7
AOMixed Air CV w IAQ ................... 8
AOMixed Air VAV w IAQ ................ 9
AOPermissive Intrlock ....................... 10
AOReset.............................................. 11
AOShared Transducer ........................ 12
AOStatic Pressure ............................... 13
93
Table 5-2
DO Algorithm Function
Types
DO Algorithm Name
Function Type
DOAnalog ........................................... 14
DODX Staging VAV .......................... 015
DOElectric Heat CV ........................... 016
DOElectric Heat VAV ........................ 017
DOEnthalpy Comparison ................... 018
DOInterlock ........................................ 019
DOLighting Control ........................... 020
DOPermissive Interlock ..................... 021
DOPump Control ................................ 022
DOProp Thermo ................................. 023
DOProp Thermo 2 Pipe ...................... 024
DOProp Thermo 4 Pipe ...................... 025
DOStaged Thermostat ........................ 026
DOStaging Control ............................. 027
DOTime Clock ................................... 028
DOTime Clock w Check .................... 029
Table 5-3
Global Algorithm
Function Types
Global Algorithm Name
Function Type
AOSS Schedule ...................................... 301

Network Broadcast ................................. 302
Linkage/AOSS Schedule ........................ 303
NTFC w Enthalpy Check ....................... 304
Occupancy .............................................. 305*
Sensor Group .......................................... 306
WSM Air Source .................................... 307
WSM Cool Source .................................. 308
*For information on occupancy, refer to Time Schedule in the How
to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
For easy reference, the algorithms are presented alphabetically in
this manual, with analog output (AO) algorithms appearing before
discrete output (DO) algorithms. Global algorithms (AOSS Schedule, NTFC w Enthalpy Check, etc.) are presented last.
94
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
AOAdaptive
Control
The AO Adaptive algorithm provides single loop PID-based analog

control based on a setpoint schedule that can be reset between the
occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoint values. A userconfigurable reset sensor is used to determine the amount of reset.
Both the Y axis and the X axis parameters of the reset schedule are
adjustable. By adjusting the setpoint schedule along with the Start
and Stop Reset decisions, you can create a positive, negative, or
constant setpoint slope.
Whenever the Stop Reset decision is less than the Start Reset decision, the slope of the setpoint line will be negative (the setpoint
decreases as the reset sensor value increases). If the Stop Reset
value is greater than the Start Reset value, the slope of the setpoint
line will be positive (the setpoint increases as the reset sensor value
increases) .
Note that the following two conditions will defeat the reset calculation and produce a setpoint equal to the configured low setpoint
value:
If the Stop Reset and Start Reset are equal

If the Low Setpoint is greater than the High Setpoint
The Time Schedule indicates the current occupancy state for this
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the controller is using
the occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoints. The Setpoint
Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints for both
occupied and unoccupied states.
The AO Adaptive and AO Reset algorithms are functionally the
same, however they differ in that AO Adaptive allows you to select
any engineering units for the control and reset sensors, but requires
that the engineering units of the output channel be in percent (%).
AO Reset, however, requires that the engineering units of the control and reset sensors be in temperature (degrees F or C), while the
output device may be in any engineering units.
Typical Application
You can use AO Adaptive with a variable speed pump that is speed
that is controlled to maintain a delta pressure signal on a chilled
water loop. This application would not use the setpoint reset capabilities of this algorithm.
95
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPT xxC
Function Type 1
Following are two examples of AO reset:

Example 1 - The most common application of setpoint reset is to
vary a setpoint with outside air such that the setpoint will increase as
the OAT sensor decreases. When graphed, such an arrangement will
produce a line with a negative slope.
Figure 5-0a
Setpoint Reset When Start
Reset > Stop Reset
High
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
Stop
Reset
Start
Reset
For example, if you were required to adjust a hot water setpoint

from 90 degrees F (32.2 degrees C) to 140 degrees F (60.0 degrees
C), as the OAT decreased for 60 degrees F (15.6 degrees C) to 0
degrees F (-17.8 degrees C), use the following configuration decisions:
Low Setpoint = 90 deg.F (32.2 deg.C)
High Setpoint = 140 deg.F (60.0 deg.C)
Start Reset = 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C)
Stop Reset = 0 deg.F (-17.8 deg.C)
Whenever the OAT is less than or equal 0 deg.F (-17.8 deg.C), the
setpoint is clamped at 140 deg.F (60.0 deg.C.) Whenever the OAT is
greater than or equal to 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C), the setpoint is
clamped at 90 deg.F (32.2 deg.C.) When the reset sensor is between
0 degrees F (-17.8 deg.C) and 60 degrees F (15.6 deg.C), the setpoint is adjusted in a linear fashion.
This would also work for chilled water reset by substituting the
following values:
Stop Reset = 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C)
95a
96
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPT xxC
Function Type 1
Example 2 - A less common application would be to increase the

static pressure setpoint of a variable volume fan as the OAT temperature increases. This would produce a setpoint line with a positive slope.
Figure 5-0b
Setpoint Reset When Stop
Reset > Start Reset
High
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
Start
Reset
Stop
Reset
The following settings illustrate this application:

Low Setpoint = 1.0" H2O (0.248 kPa)
High Setpoint = 2.5" H2O (0.621 kPa)
Whenever the OAT is less than or equal to 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C),
the setpoint is clamped at 1.0" H20 (0.248 kPa). Whenever the OAT
is greater than or equal to 90 deg.F (32.2 deg.C), the setpoint is
clamped at 2.5" H20 (0.621 kPa). When the reset sensor is between
60 degrees F (15.6 deg.C) and 90 degrees F (32.2 deg.C), the pressure setpoint is adjusted in a linear fashion.
95b
97
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
Decisions
The following decisions are applicable to this algorithm. You must

optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this algorithm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked decisions.
*
*
*
*
96
Analog Output Point

Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Reset Point
Reset
Start Reset Value
Stop Reset Value
Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Disabled Output Value
Minimum Output Value
Maximum Output Value
Starting Value
Block Iteration Rate
Power on Delay
Analog Output Point

Status Point
Occupied ?
Reset Point
Controlling Setpoint
Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
Maintenance
Output
Time
Schedule
Force
Output
Status
Control Point
Force
Status
Output
Status Point
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Occupied
High Setpoint
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Force
Status
Output
Disable
Sensor Input
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Output
Setpoint Reset
Low Setpoint
Reset
Point
NOT
AND
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Figure 5-1
AOAdaptive Control
Output
OR
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master_Loop
Input
Status
Status
Force
Output
Analog
Output Point
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
97
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is being controlled by this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Status Point
You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/
off status to enable this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Time Schedule
Use this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines the occupancy
state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this decision,
the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more information on
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules section in this
manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = OCCPCxx,

LID = xx, where xx = function number
OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule (temperature
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
98
Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTyy

LID = yy, where yy = 0 to 16
SETPT00
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPT xxC
Function Type 1
Reset Point
Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the input for determining
the amount of reset. The setpoint is reset between the configured high and low
setpoints, based upon the value in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Reset
Reset calculates the desired setpoint for the PID master loop based on the Reset
Point.
Start Reset Value
Use this decision to specify the X axis parameters of the reset schedule
(the Y axis parameters are set by the setpoint schedule.) If the configured Start Reset value is greater than the Stop Reset value, then the
setpoint will decrease as the reset sensor value increases. If the configured Start Reset value is less than the configured Stop Reset value, then
the setpoint will increase as the reset sensor value increases.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Based on selected display units

-40.0 (-40.0)
Stop Reset Value

(the Y axis parameters are set by the setpoint schedule.) If the configured Stop Reset value is greater than the Start Reset value, then the
setpoint will increase as the reset sensor value increases. If the configured Stop Reset value is less than the Start Reset value, then the setpoint
will decrease as the reset sensor value increases.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

245.0 (118.3)
Control Point
You must configure this decision to indicate the input point that the PID Master
Loop will compare to the calculated setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
99
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1
PID_Master_Loop
The master loop is a Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) control loop that
calculates the output required to achieve the calculated setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error to
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is expressed
in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
2.0
Integral Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error plus
the current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value in
this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current
error minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The
value in this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value to be maintained when the
Status Point is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
100
0 to 100%
0.0
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxC
Function Type 1

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the outputs starting value when the PID
Master Loop is enabled by the Status Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

The value in this decision indicates how often the PID Master Loop
calculates the output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
10
Power on Delay
Use this decision to specify the number of seconds the Comfort Controller must
wait to activate this algorithm after a power failure occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
101
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

This decision displays the output's actual state of the AO point being controlled
by this algorithm. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Valid Display
0.00 - 100.00%
Status Point
This decision displays the actual state of the status point which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured, then this
algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
This decision displays the current occupancy status based on the configured
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the
default mode will be Occupied.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Reset Point
This decision displays the value of the reset point. The configured setpoint is
reset based upon the value of this decision.
Valid Display
This decision displays the calculated setpoint for the PID Master Loop based on
the setpoint and reset values.
Valid Display
Control Point
This decision displays the value of the input point that this algorithm is controlling to.
Valid Display
102
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
PID_Master_Loop
PID Master Loop function calculates the desired output based on the configured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated output
is re-adjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to drive the
Analog Output Point.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term + Derivative
Term + Starting Value)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Proportional Term
This decision displays the proportional error term as it is calculated by
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - Control Point) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integral Term
This decision displays the integral error term as it is calculated by the
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint - Control Point) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Derivative Term
This decision displays the derivative error term as it is calculated by the
PID equation.
Derivative Term = (Current Error - Previous Error) * Derivative Gain
Note:
Error = (Setpoint - Control Point)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
103
AOAdaptive Control
ADAPTxxM
Function Type 1
Integrator Flags
This three-digit field displays the status of the PID Master Loop.
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
1 = PID Inactive (Disabled or Min/Max Clamp)
Center Digit
0 = Integrator calculating normally

1 = Integrator has been reset
Right Digit
0 = No Integrator clamp
1 = Integrator clamp active
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this algorithm
executes again. This algorithm will execute every ten seconds.
Valid Display
104
0 to 300 seconds
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
AOCooling CV
The AOCooling CV algorithm modulates the output to control a

chilled water valve in a constant volume air handler to prevent the
space temperature from exceeding the configured setpoint. This
algorithm can also be configured to perform dehumidification.
The Cooling algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster Loop to
control the valve. The PID Master Loop calculates the Supply Air
Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the
submaster reference by obtaining the highest sensor input from the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the high setpoint
from the Setpoint Schedule. During dehumidification, the
submaster reference is set to its minimum value. The submaster
reference is equal to the Disabled Output Value if the Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop computes the
chilled water valves position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature. The output
equals the Disabled Output Value whenever the fan is off or the
Supply Air Temperature status is invalid.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not
configure a Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
assume to be in the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low space
temperature setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a chilled water valve serving
an air handlers cooling coil in a constant volume system.
105
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
106
Cooling Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Supply Air Temperature
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
List of Maintenance
Decisions
The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this algorithm.

They provide useful information regarding the status and configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked decisions.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Cooling Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
High Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Cooling Coil Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
107
108
-3
SELECT A
Humidity Setpoint
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Occupancy State ?
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Maintenance
Occupancy
Time
Schedule
Figure 5-2
AOCooling CV
>
Output
SELECT A
A
B
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
OR
NOT
PID_Master Loop
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Force Status
Status
Output
Supply Air
Temperature
Output
OR
NOT
Force Status
Input
Point)
(Software
Cooling Coil
Subm Ref
NOT
AND
Output
OR
Clamp
PID
Integrator
Point Forced?
Reference Forced?
Setpoint
Enable
Input
Sensor
P_Submaster_Loop
Input
Status
Force
Status
Output
Cooling Coil
Valve
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
Configuration
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the air
handlers chilled water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/off
status of the air handlers fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single sensor that
is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on Sensor
Group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note:
Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Blgd. Supvr. = SNSGRxx

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules section in this manual.
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common air
handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = OCCPCxx

OCCPC00
109
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides
the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
chapter of this manual.
Note: Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms that
control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify the
DI point that indicates when dehumidification needs to be performed. The algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if
dehumidification is needed. If reheat is being done, the sensor specified here
should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Default Value
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
section in this manual. If reheat is being done, the setpoint specified here should
be the same one that is specified in the associated heating CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
SETPT00

AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is being done,
the occupied sensor specified here should be the same one that is specified in the
associated heating CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
110

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current error
minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The value in
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the Supply Air Temperature to be maintained when the space temperature input(s) are invalid . When the space
temperature input(s) are invalid, the value entered in this decision is
used as the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0
150.0
111
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Supply Air Temperature (minimum submaster reference). When dehumidification is being
performed, the value in this decision is used as the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0
45.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable Supply Air Temperature (maximum submaster reference).
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0
150.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Supply Air Temperature when the master loop is enabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0
55.0

Use this decision to indicate how often the master loop calculates the
submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the air
handlers supply air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop controls
to the difference between the submaster reference and the value of the point
that you specify in this decision.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Default Value
112
TEMP_I00
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxC
Function Type 2
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the chilled
water valves position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to the
Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
Use this decision to specify the value that is multiplied by the error to
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-9.0

Use this decision to specify the output to the chilled water valve when
the fan is off or when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the chilled
water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the chilled
water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Center Value
Use this decision to specify the output value appropriate for the no load
condition.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

30.0
113
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2

Use this decision to specify how often the submaster loop calculates a
new output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5 seconds
2
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Cooling Coil Valve

This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this
algorithm. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handlers fan which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the value is
off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor (if chosen) or the
highest sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00F to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
default mode will be Occupied and Yes will be displayed.
Valid Display
114
Yes/No
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint from the configured Setpoint Schedule.
The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is determined.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the high humidity switch sensor being
monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision specifies the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If the
decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which will
prevent any dehumidification. The algorithm obtains the occupied high
setpoint from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

This decision displays the value of the space or return air humidity sensor being
monitored. Dehumidification is required only if this value exceeds the High
Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
PID_Master_Loop
PID Master Loop function calculates the desired output based on the configured
PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated output is readjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated submaster reference value.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0
115
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) * Integral
Term + Previous Integral Term)
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Current Error - Previous Error) * Derivative Gain
Note:
Error = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Cooling Coil Subm Ref

This decision displays the value of the calculated submaster reference from the
PID Master Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the P
Submaster Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision.
Valid Display
116
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
AOCooling CV
CCCV_xxM
Function Type 2

This decision displays the value of the AI point that provides the air handlers
supply air temperature.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.3C)
P_Submaster_Loop
The P (proportional) Submaster Loop controls to the difference between the
submaster reference and the Supply Air Temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output
algorithm output point.
Reference Output = (Submaster Proportional Term + Submaster Center
Value)
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Proportional Term = (Submaster Reference - Supply Air Temperature)
* Submaster Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Submaster Flags
This two-digit field displays the status of the P Submaster Loop.
Left Digit
0 = Submaster Loop is Active

1 = Submaster Loop is Inactive (Disabled or
Clamped)
Right Digit
0 = No PID clamp
1 = PID Clamp Active
Valid Display
00 to 11
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every second.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
117
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
AOCooling VAV
The AOCooling VAV algorithm modulates the output to control a

chilled water valve in a variable air volume air handler to maintain a
constant supply air temperature and prevent the space temperature
from exceeding the configured setpoint. This algorithm can also be
configured to perform dehumidification.
The AOCooling VAV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to calculate the cooling coil valve position
required to achieve the configured Supply Air Setpoint. The supply
air setpoint is a configured value that can be reset linearly based on
the space temperature.
If one of the following conditions exists, the output value will be set
to the Disabled Output Value:
the space temperature is below the average value of the high and
low temperature setpoints.
the fan status indicates that the fan is off.
the Supply Air Temperature sensor is out of range.
During dehumidification, the output value will be set to the Maximum Output Value.
The Setpoint Schedule gives you the capability to configure high
and low space temperature setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application
118
You can use this algorithm to control a chilled water valve serving a
cooling coil in a variable air volume air handler.
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
Cooling Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
VAV Setpoint Reset
Supply Air Setpoint
Reset Ratio
Start Reset
Maximum Reset
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
119
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
120
Cooling Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
VAV Setpoint Reset
Setpoint
Setpoint Offset
CCV Supply Air Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
Humidity Setpoint
Status
Force Status
Output
Status
Force Status
Output
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Occupancy State ?
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Maintenance
Output
Time
Schedule
Figure 5-3
AOCooling VAV
A
B
-3
O
SELECT A
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Supply Air
Temperature
Sensor
Status
Sensor
Input
VAV
Setpoint
Reset
(Low Setpoint +
High Setpoint)/2
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
>
<
SELECT A
OR
Status
Force
Output
Point)
Input
(Software
Supply Air
Setpoint
AND
Output
OR
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Sensor Input
Setpoint
Enable
PID_Master Loop
Input
Status
Status
Force
Output
Cooling
Coil
Valve
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
121
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
Configuration
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the
air handlers chilled water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

Note:
Use the same sensor group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
122

OCCPC00
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
Setpoint Schedule
the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algorithm.
For more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure
Schedules chapter of this manual.
Note: Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms
that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
SETPT00
If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify
the DI point that indicates when dehumidification needs to be performed. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is needed. If reheat is being done, the sensor specified here should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating
VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
the Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm.
Schedules section in this manual. If reheat is being done, the setpoint specified
here should be the same one that is specified in the associated heating VAV
algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
SETPT00
the AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored. Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is
greater than the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is
being done, the sensor specified here should be the same one that is specified in
the associated heating VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value
MAMP_I00
123
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint to the master loop. The
configured setpoint can be reset upward based on space temperature.
Supply Air Setpoint
Use this decision to specify the minimum supply air temperature that
this algorithm will maintain.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 120.0F
55.0
(-17.8 to 48.9C)
(13.0)
Reset Ratio
If the supply air setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
amount of reset for every degree the space temperature is above the
value in the Start Reset configuration decision. The value in this
decision is expressed in degrees per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 5.0^F
0.0
(0.0 to 2.8^C)
(0.0)
Start Reset
If the Supply Air Setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
space temperature that must be exceeded before the Supply Air
Setpoint is reset. If you enter zero in this decision, the algorithm uses
the Occupied High Setpoint as the start reset temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 99.9F
0.0
(-17.8 to 37.7C)
(-17.8)
Maximum Reset
maximum amount the Supply Air Setpoint can be reset above the
configured value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
124
0.0 to 99.9^F
15.0
(0.0 to 55.5^C)
(8.3)
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

handlers supply air temperature to this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve position required to achieve the desired Supply Air
Setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-9.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-1.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0
125
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxC
Function Type 3

space temperature is below the average value of the temperature
setpoints, the fan status indicates the fan is off, or the supply air temperature sensor is out of range.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value. During
dehumidification, the algorithm sets the output to the value entered in
this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Starting Value
Master Loop is enabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

30.0

valve position.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
30
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
126
0 to 65535 seconds
0
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3
Maintenance
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is off or not configured, then
this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
default mode will be occupied and Yes will be displayed.
Valid Display
Yes/No

This decision displays the value of the high humidity switch being monitored.
If this decision is not configured, this value will default to the Off state.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If the
prevent any dehumidification. The algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint
that is obtained from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
127
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3

This decision displays the value of the space or return air humidity sensor
being monitored. Dehumidification is required only if this value exceeds the
High Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint value to the master loop.
Setpoint
This decision displays the calculated supply air setpoint that is used by
to the master loop. This value represents the sum of calculated offset
added to the configured Supply Air Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.0 to 120.0F
(-17.8 to 48.8C)
Setpoint Offset
This calculated value represents the amount of reset that is added to the
configured Supply Air Setpoint to generate the setpoint value.
Setpoint Offset = (VAV Start Reset - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Reset Ratio
Valid Display
-99.9 to 99.9

This decision displays the calculated Supply Air Setpoint for the PID Master
Loop. To override the Supply Air Setpoint, force this decision.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 240.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)

Valid Display
128
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air
Temperature) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
* Integral Term + Previous Integral Term)
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (CCV Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
Valid Display
129
AOCooling VAV
CCVAVxxM
Function Type 3
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
Valid Display
130
0 to 300 seconds
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
AOFan Tracking
The AOFan Tracking algorithm modulates the analog output to

control the return air fan speed or inlet guide vane position to maintain a constant delta pressure between the supply and return air fans
in a variable air volume system.
The Fan Tracking algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the fan speed or inlet guide vane
position. The PID Master Loop compares the Return Air Pressure to
a calculated setpoint in order to compute the desired output value.
The PID Master Loop calculates the output value in order to keep
the Return Air Pressure (CFM) equal to the Supply Air Pressure
(CFM) minus the configured Delta CFM Setpoint. If the fan is off
or either the supply or return air velocity pressure sensor value is
invalid, the output is set to the Disabled Output Value.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control the inlet guide vanes or speed
controller of a return air fan in a variable air volume system. In
such an instance, the return fan would be controlled to maintain a
delta pressure in CFM between the supply and return air fans in the
system.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Supply Air Pressure
Return Air Pressure
RAV Control (Return Air Velocity)
Delta CFM Setpoint
Supply Air Duct Area
Return Air Duct Area
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
131
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
List of Maintenance
Decisions
configuration of this algorithm. You can force the asterisked
decisions.
*
*
*
*
132
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Supply Air Pressure
Return Air Pressure
RAV Control
Setpoint RVP
Actual Supply Air Flow
Actual Return Air Flow
Return Air Flow Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
Output
Force Status
Status
Supply Air Pressure
Output
Force Status
Status
Return Air Pressure
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Figure 5-4
AOFan Tracking
NOT
RAV Control
Sensor Input (SVP)
Setpoint (RVP)
Sensor Input (RVP)
OR
AND
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Enable
Output
PID_Master_Loop
Input
Force Status
Status
Analog Output Point
OR
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
133
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

return air fan speed or inlet guide vane position.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handlers fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Supply Air Pressure

You must configure this decision to define the AI point that provides the
Supply Air Pressure for the air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
Return Air Pressure

You must configure this decision to define the AI point that provides the
Return Air Pressure for the air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
134

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
RAV Control
RAV (Return Air Velocity) Control computes the desired Return Air Pressure
based on the Supply Air Pressure and the configured Delta CFM Setpoint.
Delta CFM Setpoint
Use this decision to define the required difference between the Supply
and Return Air Pressure.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 40000.0 CFM

500.0
Supply Air Duct Area

Use this decision to define the area of the air handlers supply air duct.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.00 Sq Ft
10.0
(0.0 to 929.0 m2)

(9.3)
Return Air Duct Area

Use this decision to define the area of the air handlers return air duct.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0 Sq Ft
10.0
(0.0 to 929.0 m2)

(9.3)
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the return air fan speed or guide vane position required to achieve the
calculated setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.5
135
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxC
Function Type 4
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.5
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value (i.e., return air fan speed or
inlet guide vane position) to be maintained when the fan is off or when
either the supply or return air velocity pressure sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
136

3.0
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
10
Power on Delay
Use this decision to specify the number of seconds the Comfort Controller
must wait to activate this algorithm after a power failure occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Analog Output Point

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handlers which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the value
displayed in this decision is Off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off
Supply Air Pressure

This decision displays the value of the Supply Air Pressure for the air handler.
Valid Display
0.00 to 5.00 H20
(0.00 to 1244.4 Pa)
137
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Return Air Pressure

This decision displays the value of the Return Air Pressure for the air handler.
Valid Display
0.00 to 5.00 H20
(0.00 to 1244.4 Pa)
RAV Control
This function computes the desired Return Air Pressure based on the Supply Air
Pressure and the configured Delta CFM Setpoint.
Setpoint RVP
This decision displays the calculated Return Air Velocity Setpoint which
is used by the master loop.
Valid Display
0.00 to 5.00 H20
(0.00 to 1244.4 Pa)
Actual Supply Air Flow

This decision displays the calculated supply air flow.
Supply Air Flow = SQRT (Supply Air Pressure) * Supply Air Duct Area
* 4005
Valid Display
0.0 to 99999.9 CFM
Actual Return Air Flow

This decision displays the calculated return air flow.
Return Air Flow = SQRT (Return Air Pressure) * Return Air Duct Area
* 4005
Valid Display
0.0 to 99999.9 CFM
Return Air Flow Setpoint

This decision displays the setpoint value for the return air flow that is
necessary to achieve the desired return air pressure.
Return Air Flow Setpoint = (Actual Supply Air Flow - Delta CFM
Setpoint)
Valid Display
138
0.0 to 99999.9 CFM
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
PID_Master_Loop
The PID_Master_Loop function calculates the desired output based on the
configured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated
output is readjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure) * Integral Term +
Previous Integral Term)
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Setpoint RVP - Return Air Pressure)
Valid Display

139
AOFan Tracking
FANTRxxM
Function Type 4
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
Valid Display
140
0 to 300 seconds
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
AOHeating CV
The AOHeating CV algorithm modulates the analog output to

control a hot water or steam valve in a constant volume air handler
to prevent the space temperature from falling below the configured
setpoint.
The AOHeating CV algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional
Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster
Loop to control the valve. The PID Master Loop calculates the
Supply Air Temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The space temperature setpoint is increased by the Heating Setpoint Offset if dehumidification is being performed by the associated AOCooling CV
algorithm. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster reference
by obtaining the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT
Sensor and comparing it to the low setpoint from the Setpoint
Schedule. The PID Master Loop output equals the Disable Output
Value whenever the fan is off or the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor
status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop is a proportional loop that
computes the hot water or steam valves position by comparing the
calculated submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a hot water or steam valve
serving an air handlers cooling coil in a constant volume system.
141
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
142
Heating Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Heating Setpoint Offset
Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Heating Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Heating Coil Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
143
144
-3
SELECT A
Humidity Setpoint
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Occupancy State ?
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Average
Low
High
Status
Sensor
TS Override
Sensor Group/SPT
Force Status
Output
Status
Fan Status Point
Maintenance
Output
Time
Schedule
Figure 5-5
AOHeating
>
SELECT A
A
Heating
Setpoint
Offset
Select
OR
NOT
AND
Output
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master Loop
Force Status
Status
Output
Supply Air
Temperature
Input
OR
Status
Force
Output
Point)
(Software
Heating Coil
Subm Ref
NOT
Output
OR
Clamp
PID
Integrator
Point Forced?
Reference Forced?
Setpoint
Fan Status
Sensor Input
P_Submaster_Loop
Input
Status
Status
Force
Output
Heating Coil
Valve
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Configuration
Decisions
Heating Coil Valve

air handlers hot water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single sensor
that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on Sensor
Note:
Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = xx, when xx = function number
SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this
manual.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
145
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Setpoint Schedule
Note:
Use the same space temperature Setpoint Schedule for all algorithms
that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

the offset that will be added to the low heating setpoint during dehumidification.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.0 to 10.0^F
3.0
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(1.6)

the DI point that indicates if dehumidification needs to be performed. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being done, the
same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated cooling CV
algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
146

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Humidity Setpoint
Schedules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being done, the same
setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated cooling CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries

Default Value
SETPT00

the AI point that provides the space humidity to this algorithm. Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the occupied
high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is
being done, the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated
cooling CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve
the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
147
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the Supply Air Temperature to be maintained when all the space temperature input(s) are invalid or when the
fan status indicates the fan is off. When either of these events occurs,
the value entered in this decision is used as the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
45.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Supply Air Temperature (minimum submaster reference).
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
40.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

Allowable Entries
Default Value
148
-40.0 to 245.0F
140.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Supply Air Temperature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
80.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

Use this decision to indicate how often the PID Master Loop calculates
the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the hot water
or steam valves position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to
the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-5.5
149
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxC
Function Type 5

Use this decision to specify the output to the hot water or steam valve
when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the hot water
or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the hot
water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Center Value
condition.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

30.0

new output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5 seconds
2
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
150
0 to 65535 seconds
0
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
Maintenance
Decisions
Heating Coil Valve

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

lowest sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint of the configured Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
151
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5

monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. The
algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint from the humidity Setpoint Schedule.
If the decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which
will prevent any dehumidification.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
152
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) *
Integral Term + Previous Integral Term)
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F (-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Heating Coil Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Master
Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the submaster
loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.3C)

supply air temperature. This must be configured to enable the submaster loop
to execute properly.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.3C)
153
AOHeating CV
HCCV_xxM
Function Type 5
P_Submaster_Loop
submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output
Value)
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Valid Display
Submaster Flags
Left Digit

Clamped)
Right Digit
0 = No PID clamp
Valid Display
00 to 11
Task Timer
Valid Display
154
0 to 300 seconds
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
AOHeating VAV
The AOHeating VAV algorithm modulates the analog output to

control a hot water or steam valve in a variable air volume air
handler for morning warm-up or to prevent the space temperature
from falling below the configured setpoint.
The AOHeating VAV algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional
Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster
loop to control the value. The PID Master Loop calculates the
Supply Air Temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The space temperature setpoint is increased by the Heating Setpoint Offset if dehumidification is being performed by the associated AOCooling
VAV algorithm. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster
reference by obtaining the lowest sensor input from the Sensor
Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the low setpoint from the
Setpoint Schedule. The PID Master Loop output equals the Disabled Output Value whenever the fan is off or the Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor status is invalid. The P Submaster Loop computes the
hot water or steam valves position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
For applications that have alternate heat sources, you can use Morning Warmup to preheat the space prior to occupancy.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a hot water or steam valve
serving an air handlers heating coil in a variable air volume system.
155
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
156
Heating Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Occupied Heating
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
Power on Delay
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Heating Coil Valve

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Space Setpoint
Morning Warm Up
Reference Output
Morning Warmup ?
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
HCV Supply Air Setpoint
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
157
158
-3
SELECT A
Occupied
High Setpoint
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Humidity
Setpoint
Status
Force Status
Output
High
Humidity Sensor
Force Status
Status
Output
High
Humidity Switch
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Status
Force Status
Output
Fan
Status Point
Figure 5-6
AOHeating VAV
>
NOT
OR
AND
Select
Setpoint
Heating
Setpoint
Offset
SELECT A
A
Status
Occupancy
State?
Space
Temp.
Disable
Fan Status
Morning
Warm Up
Output
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master_Loop
Force Status
Status
Output
Supply Air
Temperature
OR
Status
Force
Output
Point)
Input
(Software
Heating
Coil Subm
Ref
NOT
Output
OR
Clamp
PID
Integrator
Point Forced?
Forced?
Reference
Setpoint
Fan Status
Sensor Input
P_Submaster_Loop
05
Status
Status
Force
Output
Input
Heating
Coil
Valve
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Configuration
Decisions
Heating Coil Valve

air handlers hot water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 character

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or a single sensor
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
manual.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
159
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Setpoint Schedule
For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure
Note:
Use the same Space Temperature Setpoint for all algorithms that
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

the offset that will be added to the low heating setpoint during dehumidification.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.0 to 10.0^F
3.0
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(1.7)

the DI point that indicates if dehumidification needs to be performed. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being performed,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated cooling VAV
algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
160

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Humidity Setpoint
Schedules section in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the
same setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated cooling VAV
algorithm.
Allowable Entries

Default Value
SETPT00

the AI point that provides the space humidity to this algorithm. Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the occupied
high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is
being performed, the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated cooling VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
Occupied Heating
Use this decision to enable heating during Occupied periods.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = No or Yes

LID = 0 (No) or 1 (Yes)
No
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the Supply Air Setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
161
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.4
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the Supply Air Temperature to be maintained when all the space temperature input(s) are invalid or when the
fan status indicates the fan is off. When either of these events occurs,
the value entered in this decision is used as the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
45.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Supply Air Temperature (minimum submaster reference).
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
40.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

Allowable Entries
Default Value
162
-40.0 to 245.0F
140.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Supply Air Temperature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
80.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(27.0)

Use this decision to indicate how often the PID Master Loop calculates
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120

handlers supply air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop controls to the difference between the submaster reference and the value of the
point that you specify in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the hot water
or steam valves position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to
the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-7.5
163
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxC
Function Type 6

Use this decision to specify the output to the hot water or steam valve
when the Supply Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the hot water
or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the hot
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Center Value
condition.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

30.0

new output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5 seconds
2
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
164
0 to 65535 seconds
0
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Maintenance
Decisions
Heating Coil Valve

This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor (if chosen) or the lowest
sensor in the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If no Time Schedule has been selected, then the
default mode will be Yes.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint of the configured setpoint schedule.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

monitored. If this decision was not configured, the value will default to the Off
state.
Valid Display
On/Off
165
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6

from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
Morning Warmup
Morning Warmup function is used to bring the space temperature up to occupied setting after a setback period. Once the setpoint is reached, Heating will
be disabled for the remainder of that occupied period, unless Occupied Heating
configuration decision is set to Yes.
Reference Output
This decision along with the Fan Status determines whether the PID
loop becomes enabled. If Occupied Heating is Yes, the output is On
whenever Fan Status is On. Otherwise, the output is On only when Fan
Status is On and Morning Warmup is True.
Valid Display
On/Off
Morning Warmup?
This decision tells if the algorithm is executing the morning warmup
function.
Valid Display
166
True/False
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)
* Proportional Gain
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F
(-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Space Setpoint - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor) * Integral
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F
(-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F
(-5555.5 to 5555.5^C)
167
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
HCV Supply Air Setpoint

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Master
Loop. This value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the P Submaster
Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this point.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F

supply air temperature. This must be configured to enable the submaster loop
to execute properly.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
P_Submaster_Loop
submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every
two seconds.
Reference Output
Value)
Valid Display
168
AOHeating VAV
HCVAVxxM
Function Type 6
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Valid Display
Submaster Flags
Left Digit

Clamped)
Right Digit
0 = No PID clamp
Valid Display
00 to 11
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
169
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
AOHumidity
Control
The AOHumidity Control algorithm provides an output to a humidifier that requires modulating control. The humidifier is controlled to
maintain the space or return air humidity to the configured setpoint.
The Humidity Control algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the humidifier. The PID Master
Loop uses the Space Humidity Sensor input and compares it to the
configured occupied low setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule
to compute the desired amount of humidification. If the Space Humidity Sensor input is greater than the configured occupied high setpoint
or if the High Humidity Switch is closed, the output is set to the
Minimum Output Value. If the air handler supply fan is off, the output
is set to the configured Disabled Output Value.
The Humidity Setpoint schedule provides the occupied high and low
humidity setpoints. The algorithm uses the high setpoint to determine
if dehumidification is required. It uses the low setpoint as the reference for the PID Master Loop to control the humidifier.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a steam grid type of humidifier.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
170
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Space Humidity Sensor
Humidity Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Humidity Setpoint
High Humidity Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
171
172
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Humidity Setpoint
Status
Force Status
Output
Status
Force Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Space
Humidity Sensor
Figure 5-7
AOHumidity Control
>
OR
NOT
SELECT A
A
-3
SELECT A
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point

AND
Output
Reset Integrator
OR
Clamp Integrator
Setpoint
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master_Loop
Status
Force
Status
Analog Output Point

Input
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

air handlers humidifier.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that is providing the
space or return duct humidity input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00

If the air handler is performing humidification, use this decision to specify the
DI point that indicates when supply duct humidity is unacceptably high. The
algorithm can use a High Humidity Switch or Space Humidity Sensor to determine if the humidity is unacceptably high.
Note:
Use the same High Humidity Switch to determine dehumidification in

all algorithms that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Default Value
SENSDI00
173
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
Humidity Setpoint
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that will
provide the Humidity Setpoint and High Humidity Limit for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules section in this manual.
Note:
Use the same Humidity Setpoint schedule for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries

Default Value
SETPT00

If the air handler is performing humidification, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Note:
Use the same High Humidity Sensor to determine dehumidification in all

algorithms that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the amount of humidification that is required to achieve the desired
space or return air humidity.
Proportional Gain
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is expressed in
units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
9.0
Integral Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the error plus the
current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value in this
decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
174
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxC
Function Type 7
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the output value to the humidifier when the
fan is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value to the
humidifier. During dehumidification, the value in this decision is used
as the output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value to the
humidifier.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 100.0
Starting Value
Master Loop is enabled by the Fan Status Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

20.0
175
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7

The value in this decision indicates how often the master loop calculates
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Analog Output Point

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the humidity sensor providing the duct or
space humidity input.
Valid Display
176
0.00 to 100.00% RH
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7

This decision displays the High Humidity Switch sensor being monitored. If
this decision is not configured, the value will default to the Off state.
Valid Display
On/Off
Humidity Setpoint
This decision displays the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. This algorithm
uses the occupied low setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

This decision displays the value of the supply duct humidity sensor being
monitored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Limit, humidification will
be needed.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
High Humidity Limit

This decision specifies the high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If a
setpoint schedule is not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which
will prevent dehumidification. The algorithm uses the occupied high setpoint
from the Humidity Setpoint schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
177
AOHumidity Control
HUMIDxxM
Function Type 7
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor) *
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Humidity Setpoint - Space Humidity Sensor)
Valid Display
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
Valid Display
178
0 to 300 seconds
AOMixed Air CV w IAQ

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
The AOMixed Air CV w IAQ algorithm controls the outside air,
AOMixed Air CV
return air, and exhaust dampers in a constant volume air handler.
w IAQ
When outside air conditions are unsuitable for cooling, the algorithm holds the dampers at an adjustable, minimum position. If
outside air conditions are suitable for cooling, the algorithm modulates the mixed air dampers as required to maintain a space temperature that is between the low and high occupied setpoints.
PID Master Loop and
P Submaster Loop
This algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative)

Master Loop and a P (Proportional) Submaster Loop to control the
damper position. The PID Master Loop calculates the mixed air
temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to achieve the
desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates
the submaster reference by obtaining the highest or lowest space
temperature sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the space temperature setpoint. The high space
temperature input is used during Night Time Free Cooling or when
summer conditions exist. The low space temperature input is always used when winter conditions exist. If the outside air conditions are unacceptable for cooling, the submaster reference is set to
its configured maximum value. The P Submaster Loop computes
the dampers position by comparing the calculated submaster reference to the Mixed Air Temperature. If the air handlers supply fan
is off or if the Mixed Air Temperature sensor is out of range, the
output is set to the configured Disabled Output Value.
Indoor Air Quality
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) allows the algorithm to override the

damper position, thus allowing additional outside air into the building when the indoor air quality is below the configured limit. The
damper position is computed every two minutes.
IAQ controls the level of carbon dioxide (CO ), volatile organic
2
compounds (VOCs), or other indoor air pollutants by modulating the
mixed air damper. Varying quantities of outdoor air are admitted
during the occupied period to maintain pollutants at or below the
configured setpoints of the IAQ sensors.
179

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
VOC, or other types of sensors, can be field-supplied and installed,

and configured in two ways:
Schedules
One sensor can be installed in either the space or return air

stream to continuously monitor a single gas.
Two sensors (typically VOC sensors monitoring the same gas)

can be installed inside and outside the occupied space for comparative measurements. The control is configured to modify the
damper position based on the value of the sensor in the occupied
space, but before admitting outside air, the control performs a
differential check to determine if the value of the sensor measuring the outside air is higher. If the outside sensor has a higher
pollutant value, the damper does not change position.
180
Night Time Free

Cooling
NTFC w Enthalpy Check is required if the air handler is equipped to

use outside air as a suitable source for cooling the space during night
time unoccupied hours or if the air handler needs to modulate the
dampers in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to store excess internal heat within the
structure during winter months, or to use cool outside air during
summer months to the greatest possible extent. This minimizes the
need for heating or mechanical cooling.

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
NTFC Algorithm
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Mixed Air Temperature
P_Submaster_Loop
Proportional Gain
Center Value
IAQ Sensor
Comparison IAQ Snsor
Indoor Air Quality
IAQ Setpoint
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Temp & Humidity Test
Differential Gas
Power on Delay
181

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
182
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
NTFC Active?
NTFC Setpoint
Outside Enthalpy Good?
Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Mixed Air CV Subm Ref
P_Submaster_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
IAQ Sensor
IAQ Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Clamp
Task Timer
Bias Input
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Status
Output
Force Status
Mixed Air
Temperature
Output
Status
Force Status
Fan Status
High Humidity
Setpoint
Output
Status
Force Status
High Humidity
Sensor
Status
Force Status
Output
Comparison AQ
Sensor PPM
Status
Force Status
Output
IAQ Sensor PPM
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy State?
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
High
Low
Average
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Figure 5-8
>
NOT
NOT
AND
AND
NOT
AND
Input
Output
Force Status
Mixed Air Subm Ref
NOT
AND
Output
Maintenance
Time Schedule
NOT
NTFC
Enthalpy Test
Setpoint
NTFC ALGORITHM
Output
Clamp
PID
Integrator
Output
Point Forced?
Setpoint
Reference Forced?
Sensor Input
Output
Override
Enable
Minimum
P_Submaster_Loop
Humidity Check?
Sensor Input (IAQ2)
Output
Sensor Input (SPT)
Sensor Input (IAQ1)
Enable
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
NTFC?
Control Point
High Sensor
Low Sensor
Sensor Select
NOT
>
OR
Select
Status
Force
Status
Input
Analog
Output
Point
OR
Output
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
Maximum Output
Sensor Input
Enable
Setpoint
Minimum Output
PID_Master_Loop

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
183

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Configurations
Decisions
Analog Output Point

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling
the air handlers outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on
Sensor Group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note:
Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
184

OCCPC00

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

If the indoor air quality is being monitored and Temp & Humidity Test is set to
Yes, use this decision to specify the maximum allowable return air humidity
before the IAQ control routine is disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0%
99.0

Yes, use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air humidity. When the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the High Humidity
Setpoint, the IAQ control routine will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling will be performed or the dampers will modulate in
either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation, use this decision to
specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable for cooling the space. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling during unoccupied
hours, the submaster reference is held to the configured Maximum Output
Value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = NTFC_xx,

NTFC_00
185

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the mixed air temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the Mixed Air Temperature to be maintained when the space temperature sensor has failed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
186
-40.0 to 245.0F
240.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(115.6)

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Mixed Air Temperature. The value entered in this decision is known as the minimum
submaster reference. The submaster reference is equal to this value
during unoccupied hours when Night Time Free Cooling is not being
performed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
40.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(4.4)

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable Mixed Air Temperature. The value entered in this decision is known as the maximum
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
150.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(65.6)
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the starting value for the Mixed Air
Temperature when the PID Master Loop is enabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
65.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(18.3)

The value in this decision indicates how often the master loop calculates the submaster reference.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the
mixed air temperature to this algorithm. The submaster loop controls to the
point that you specify in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
187

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
P_Submaster_Loop
The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes the outside
air, return air, and exhaust damper positions by comparing the calculated
submaster reference (mixed air temperature setpoint) to the Mixed Air Temperature. The damper positions will be controlled by the Indoor Air Quality
or the P Submaster Loop, depending on whose calculated output value is
greater.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-9.0

Use this decision to specify the output to the dampers when the fan is
off or when the Mixed Air Temperature sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the outside
air, return air, and exhaust dampers. During the unoccupied state, the
Minimum Output Value is overriden to 0, thus allowing the dampers
to fully close.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the outside
air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
188

100.0

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Center Value
Use this decision to specify the output value appropriate for the no
load condition.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

30.0

new output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5 seconds
2
IAQ Sensor
If the indoor air quality is being monitored, use this decision to specify the
indoor air quality sensor.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00

If Differential Gas is configured to Yes, use this decision to specify the outdoor air quality sensor.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00
189

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Indoor Air Quality

Indoor Air Quality is a proportional and integral control loop that compares
the IAQ setpoint to the IAQ sensors in order to compute the return air, outside air, and exhaust air damper positions. The damper positions will be
controlled by the Indoor Air Quality or the P Submaster Loop, depending on
whose calculated output value is greater.
IAQ Setpoint
Use this decision to specify the Indoor Air Quality setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 2000 PPM
650
Proportional Gain
produce the proportional term. The value in this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-1.00 to 1.00
-0.10
Integral Gain
the current integral term to produce the new integral term. The value
in this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-1.00 to 1.00
-0.03

Use this decision to disable the IAQ control routine if either the space
temperature setpoint or High Humidity Setpoint is exceeded.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
190

LID = 0 (No)/1(Yes)
No

MADCVxxC
Function Type 8
Differential Gas
Use this decision to indicate if the outside air is being tested to determine its suitability for use. If the Comparison IAQ Snsor value (outside air quality sensor value) is greater than the IAQ Sensor value
(indoor air quality value), the IAQ control routine will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 0 (No)/1 (Yes)
No

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the mixed
air damper for the IAQ control routine.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the mixed
Allowable Entries
Default Value

50.0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
191

MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

This decision displays the output value of the AO point being controlled by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

average of the Sensor Group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being monitored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Setpoint, the IAQ control
routine will be disabled.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates when Night Time Free Cooling is active. If the NTFC
w Enthalpy Check algorithm was not selected as part of the configuration,
Night Time Free Cooling will be inactive and No will be displayed.
Valid Display
192
Yes/No

MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
NTFC Setpoint
This decision displays the space temperature setpoint when Night Time Free
Cooling is active. The space temperature setpoint will be the occupied high
setpoint from the configured Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision indicates when the outside air is suitable for cooling. If the value
displayed in this decision is No, the submaster reference is maintained at its
configured maximum value.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Control Point
This decision displays the space temperature sensor value from the sensor group
being used as the control point when Night Time Free Cooling is active.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Term
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
193

MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Gain + Previous
Integral Term
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Derivative Term
This decision displays the derivative error term as it is calculated by
the PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor)
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Integrator Flags
This three digit field displays three reference flags which indicate
certain statues for the PID_Master_Loop.
Left Flag
0 = PID Active
Center Flag

Right Flag
0 = No Integrator Clamp
1 = Integrator Clamp Active
Valid Display
000 to 111
Mixed Air CV Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated submaster reference from the PID Master Loop. This value is used with the Mixed Air Temperature by the P
Submaster Loop. To override the submaster reference, force this decision to
the desired value.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the AI point that provides the mixed air
temperature.
Valid Display
194
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
P_Submaster_Loop
The P (proportional) Submaster Loop controls to the difference between the submaster
reference and the supply air temperature. This loop executes every two seconds.
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to determine the
algorithm's output point value. The algorithm's output point value will be
either that of the IAQ Reference Output or the value displayed in this
decision, depending on which is greater.
Value)
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the submaster loop.
Valid Display
Submaster Flags
Left Digit

Clamped)
Right Digit
0 = No PID clamp
Valid Display
00 to 11
IAQ Sensor
This decision displays the value of the indoor air quality in parts per million
(ppm).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99

This decision displays the value of the outdoor air quality in parts per million
(ppm).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
195

MADCVxxM
Function Type 8
IAQ Setpoint
This decision displays the value of the configured indoor air quality setpoint in
parts per million (ppm).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99
Indoor Air Quality
This function monitors the indoor air quality, and if desired, the outdoor air quality.
Reference Output
algorithm's output point value. The algorithm's output point value will
be either that of the P Submaster Loop's Reference Output or the value
displayed in this decision, depending on which is greater.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term)
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the IAQ Submaster Loop.
Proportional Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
IAQ Submaster Loop.
Integral Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) + Integral Gain +
Previous Integral Term
Valid Display
Clamp
This decision displays whether the IAQ control routine is being clamped.
The clamp is set whenever the output is less than the minimum output
value or greater than the maximum output value.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
196
AOMixed Air VAV w IAQ

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
AOMixed Air
VAV w IAQ
The AOMixed Air VAV w IAQ controls the outside air, return
air, and exhaust dampers in a variable air volume air handler.
PID Master Loop
The Mixed Air VAV w IAQ algorithm uses a PID (Proportional

Integral Derivative) Master Loop to control the damper position.
The PID Master Loop calculates the damper position required to
achieve the desired mixed air temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the damper position by comparing the mixed air
temperature to the associated cooling coil supply air setpoint minus
three degrees. If the outside air conditions are unacceptable for
cooling, the output is set to its configured Minimum Output Value.
Indoor Air Quality
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) allows the algorithm to override the

damper position, thus allowing additional outside air into the building when the indoor air quality is below the configured limit. The
damper position is computed every two minutes.
IAQ controls the level of carbon dioxide (CO2), volatile organic
compounds (VOCs), or other indoor air pollutants by modulating the
mixed air damper. Varying quantities of outdoor air are admitted
during the occupied period to maintain pollutants at or below the
configured setpoints of the IAQ sensors.
VOC, or other types of sensors, can be field-supplied and installed,
and configured in two ways:
One sensor can be installed in either the space or return air

stream to continuously monitor a single gas.
Two sensors (typically VOC sensors monitoring the same gas)

can be installed inside and outside the occupied space for comparative measurements. The control is configured to modify the
damper position based on the value of the sensor in the occupied
space, but before admitting outside air, the control performs a
differential check to determine if the value of the sensor measuring the outside air is higher. If the outside sensor has a higher
pollutant value, the damper does not change position.
197

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Schedules
Night Time Free

Cooling
NTFC w Enthalpy Check is required if the air handler is equipped to

use outside air as a suitable source for cooling the space during night
time unoccupied hours or if the air handler needs to modulate the
dampers in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to store excess internal heat within the
structure during winter months, or use cool outside air during summer months to minimize the need for heating or mechanical cooling.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
*
198
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
NTFC Algorithm
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
IAQ Sensor
Comparison IAQ Sensor
Indoor Air Quality
IAQ Setpoint
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Differential Gas
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
NTFC Active?
Mixed Air Subm Ref
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
IAQ Sensor
IAQ Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Clamp
Task Timer
199
200
Output
Status
Force Status
Fan Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Mixed Air
Temperature
Status
Output
Force Status
Supply Air
Setpoint
High Humidity
Setpoint
Output
Status
Force Status
High Humidity
Sensor
Status
Force Status
Output
Comparison AQ
Sensor PPM
Status
Force Status
Output
IAQ Sensor PPM
Low
Average
TS Override
Status
High
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Maintenance
Occupancy
Time Schedule
OR
>
NAND
NOT
AND
OR
AND
NTFC
Enthalpy Test
Setpoint
NTFC ALGORITHM
AND
NOT
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Figure 5-9
NOT
Output
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Sensor Input
Enable
Setpoint
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
PID_Master_Loop
Humidity Check?
Sensor Input (IAQ2)
Output
Sensor Input (IAQ1)
Enable
Sensor Input (SPT)
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Indoor Air Quality
>
Select
Input
Status
Force
Status
Analog
Output Point
OR

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

air handlers outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
group, refer to that section in this chapter of the manual.
Note:
Use the same sensor group or SPT sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
201

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

Yes, use this decision to specify the maximum allowable return air humidity
before the IAQ control routine is disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 100.00% RH
80.00

Yes, use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air humidity.
When the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the High Humidity Setpoint, the IAQ control routine will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling will be performed or the dampers will be modulated
in either a drybulb or enthalpy type economizer operation, use this decision to
specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable for cooling
the space. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling during unoccupied hours,
the submaster reference is held to the configured Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
202
Bldg. Supvr. = NTFC_xx

NTFC_00

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9

You must configure this decision to specify the name of the supply air setpoint
(software point) in the associated AOCooling VAV algorithm whose value
minus three degrees will be used as the PID Master Loop setpoint. Enter the
same point name that is displayed in the associated AOCooling VAV
algorithm's maintenance table CCV Supply Air Setpoint decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = CCVVRFxx

LID = xx, where xx = function number of the
AOCooling VAV (CCVAVxx) algorithm as
listed in the FNCxx-yy Table
CCVVRF00

mixed air temperature to this algorithm. The master loop controls to the point
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the output required to achieve the desired mixed air temperature.
The damper positions will be controlled by the Indoor Air Quality control
routine or the PID Master Loop, depending on whose calculated
output value is greater.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-5.0
203

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-2.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the output damper position to be maintained when any of the following three situations occurs: The fan is off,
the mixed air temperature sensor is out of range, or the CCV Supply Air
Setpoint in the associated AOCooling CV algorithm is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output damper position. If the outside air is not suitable for cooling, the output is set to the
value in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output damper position. During Night Time Free Cooling, the output is set to the value in
this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
204

100.0

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value

50.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
30
IAQ Sensor
If the indoor air quality is being monitored, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the air quality of the space being conditioned.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00
Comparison IAQ Sensor

If Differential Gas is set to Yes, use this decision to specify the outdoor air
quality sensor.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00
205

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Indoor Air Quality

Indoor Air Quality is a proportional and integral control loop that compares the
IAQ setpoint to the IAQ sensors in order to compute the return air, outside air,
and exhaust air damper positions. The damper positions will be controlled by
the Indoor Air Quality control routine or the P Submaster Loop, depending on
whose calculated output value is greater.
IAQ Setpoint
Use this decision to specify the Indoor Air Quality setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 2000 PPM
650
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-1.00 to 1.00
-0.10
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-1.00 to 1.00
-0.03

Use this decision to disable the IAQ control routine if either the space
temperature setpoint or High Humidity setpoint is exceeded.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
206
Bldg. Supvr. = Yes/No

LID = 0(Yes) / 1(No)
No

MADVVxxC
Function Type 9
Differential Gas
Use this decision to indicate if the outside air is being tested to determine its suitability for use. If the Comparison IAQ Snsor value (outside air quality sensor value) is greater than the IAQ Sensor value
(indoor air quality sensor value), the IAQ control routine will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Yes/No

LID = 0(Yes) / 1(No)
No

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output to the mixed
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output to the mixed
Allowable Entries
Default Value

50.0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
207

MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

average of the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being monitored. If this value exceeds the High Humidity Setpoint, the IAQ control
routine is disabled.
Valid Display
208
0.00 to 100.00% RH

MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates whether Night Time Free Cooling is active. No will be
displayed in this decision if the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm was not
configured.
Valid Display
Yes/No

This decision indicates whether the outside air is suitable for cooling. If the value
displayed in this decision is No, the damper is maintained at its configured minimum position.
Valid Display
Yes/No

This decision represents the supply air setpoint value from the associated AO
Cooling VAV algorithm.
Valid Display
0.00 to 120.00F
(-18.00 to 48.80C)
Mixed Air Subm Ref

This decision displays the value of the CCV Supply Air Setpoint minus 3 degrees.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the AI Point that provides the mixed air temperature.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
PID_Master_Loop
209

MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Reference Output
Analog Output Point. The Analog Output Point will be the greater of
this value or the IAQ Reference Output value.
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Term
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Gain + Previous
Integral Term
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Valid Display
210

MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Integrator Flags
This three digit field displays three reference flags which indicate certain
statues for the PID_Master_Loop.
Left Flag
0 = PID Active
Center Flag

Right Flag
0 = No Integrator Clamp
1 = Integrator Clamp Active
Valid Display
000 to 111
IAQ Sensor
This decision displays the value of the indoor air quality in parts per million
(PPM).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99 PPM

This decision displays the value of the outdoor air quality in parts per million
(PPM).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99 PPM
IAQ Setpoint
This decision displays the value of the configured indoor air quality setpoint in
parts per million (PPM).
Valid Display
-9999.99 to 9999.99 PPM
Indoor Air Quality

This function monitors the indoor air quality, and if desired, the outdoor air quality.
Reference Output
algorithm output point value. The algorithm output point will be this
value or the PID Master Loop Reference Output value, whichever is greater.
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Integral Term)
Valid Display
211

MADVVxxM
Function Type 9
Proportional Term
the IAQ Submaster Loop.
Proportional Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
IAQ Submaster Loop.
Integral Term = (IAQ Setpoint - IAQ Sensor) + Integral Gain +
Previous Integral Term
Valid Display
Clamp
This decision displays if the IAQ control routine is being clamped. The
clamp is set whenever the output is less than the minimum output value
or greater than the maximum output value.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
212
0 to 300 seconds
AOPermissive Interlock
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
AOPermissive
Intrlock
The AOPermissive Intrlock algorithm overrides the value of an

analog point. The algorithm bases its decision on the current state
of the Discrete Control Point or the current value of the Analog
Control Point compared to a setpoint.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be discrete and
the Discrete Control Point is equal to the configured occupied or
unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm
forces the Analog Output Point to the Override Value. If the control
point is not equal to the configured occupied or unoccupied discrete
state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm sets the Analog Output
Point to automatic control.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be analog and
the Analog Control Point is higher or lower (based on the occupied
or unoccupied analog test decision) than the configured low setpoint
for the Persistence Time, the algorithm forces the Analog Output
Point to the Override Value. If this condition is not true for the
Persistence Time, the algorithm sets the Analog Output Point to
automatic control.
do not configure a Setpoint Schedule, the algorithm sets the Analog
Output Point to automatic control.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints and indicates the
test conditions used to override the point. If you do not configure a
Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure the low setpoint for
both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application
You could use this algorithm to control a preheat coils two-way

steam valve. For example, when the outside air temperature is
above 38F, the valve would be forced closed. When the outside air
temperature is below 38F, the valve would be modulated to maintain a 45F setpoint.
213
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Decisions

optional.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
214
Analog Output Point

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Permissive Interlock
Control Point Type
Occ Discrete State
Unocc Discrete State
Occ Analog Test
Unocc Analog Test
Override Value
Hysteresis
Persistence Time
Analog Control Point
Discrete Control Point
Power on Delay
Analog Output Point

Occupied ?
Reference Output
Perm Interlock Flag
Conditional
Modified Setpoint
Persistence Timer
Setpoint Limit
Task Timer
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Status
Force
Output
Controlling Point
Figure 5-10
AOPermissive Intrlock

Bias Low Offset
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Bias High Offset
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State
Setpoint
Disable
Sensor Input
Output
Input
Analog Output Point
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
215
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point that will be overridden when the test conditions have been met for the configured Persistence
Time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Time Schedule
manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
If the Control Point Type decision is set to Analog, use this decision to specify
the Setpoint Schedule (temperature type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoint to which the controlling point will be compared.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
216

SETPT00
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Permissive Interlock determines if the Analog Output Point should be forced to
the configured override value when the input conditions are met.
Control Point Type

You must configure this decision to define whether the Control Point is
an analog or discrete type point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Analog/Discr
Analog
Occ Discrete State

If the Control Point Type is discrete, use this decision to define the
input state when the Time Schedule is occupied that will cause the
Analog Output Point to be overridden.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
On/Off
On

If the Control Point Type is discrete, use this decision to define the
input state when the Time Schedule is unoccupied that will cause the
Analog Output Point to be overridden.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
On/Off
Off
Occ Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the occupied low
setpoint in order to override the Analog Output Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
High/Low
High
217
AOPI_xxC
Function Type 10
Unocc Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the unoccupied low
setpoint in order to override the Analog Output Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
High/Low
Low
Override Value
Use this decision to specify the value to which the Analog Output Point
is forced when the proper input condition for the configured Persistence
Time exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0
Hysteresis
If the Control Point Type is analog, use this decision to specify the
number of degrees above or below the setpoint (based upon the analog
test) the Analog Control Point must be before the override is released.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 9999.9
1.0
Persistence Time
Use this decision to indicate how long the input condition must exist
before the Analog Output Point is overridden or how long the input
condition must not exist before the Analog Output Point is returned to
automatic control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
30

Use this decision to configure the analog point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Analog Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Analog.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
218

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PNT_NAME
AOPI_xxM
Function Type 10

Use this decision to configure the discrete point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Analog Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Discr.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PNT_NAME
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Analog Output Point

Valid Display
Occupied ?
This decision displays the current occupancy status based on the configured data
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the default
mode will be Yes.
Valid Display
Yes/No
This function determines if a configured condition has occurred, and if so, the
Output point is overridden and set equal to the Reference Output, until the causal
condition no longer exists.
Reference Output
This decision displays the configured Override Value that the output will
be driven to.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9
Perm Interlock Flag

This decision indicates whether Permissive Interlock is in effect.
Valid Display
True/False
219
AOPI_xxM
Function Type 10
Conditional
This decision displays the current analog conditional value (High or
Low) based on the Occupancy state.
Valid Display
High/Low
Modified Setpoint
This decision displays the modified Setpoint Value that is currently
being used to compare with the Analog Control point. It includes a
configured hysteresis, and allows for the conditional check being
performed (High or Low). This value will be 0 if the Control Point
Type is discrete.
Valid Display
Persistence Timer
This decision displays how much time is left before the Permissive
Interlock condition will take effect.
Valid Display
0 to 3600 seconds
Setpoint Limit
This decision displays the Low Setpoint from the Setpoint Schedule that is being
compared to determine if the Permissive Interlock condition will take effect.
Valid Display
This decision displays the value of the configured Analog Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur when the Control
Point Type is analog.
Valid Display
This decision displays the value of the configured Discrete Point which is
being used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur when the
Control Point Type is discrete.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every five seconds.
Valid Display
220
0 to 300 seconds
AOReset
RESET xxC
Function Type 11
AOReset
The AO Reset algorithm provides single loop PID-based analog

control based on a setpoint schedule that can be reset between the
occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoint values. A userconfigurable reset sensor is used to determine the amount of reset.
Both the Y axis and the X axis parameters of the reset schedule are
adjustable. By adjusting the setpoint schedule along with the Start
and Stop Reset decisions, you can create a positive, negative, or
constant setpoint slope.
Whenever the Stop Reset decision is less than the Start Reset decision, the slope of the setpoint line will be negative (the setpoint
decreases as the reset sensor value increases). If the Stop Reset
value is greater than the Start Reset value, the slope of the setpoint
line will be positive (the setpoint increases as the reset sensor value
increases) .
Note that the following two conditions will defeat the reset calculation and produce a setpoint equal to the configured low setpoint
value:
If the Stop Reset and Start Reset are equal

If the Low Setpoint is greater than the High Setpoint
the occupied or unoccupied high and low setpoints. The Setpoint
Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints for both
occupied and unoccupied states.
The AO Reset and AO Adaptive algorithms are functionally the
same, however they differ in that AO Adaptive allows you to select
any engineering units for the control and reset sensors, but requires
that the engineering units of the output channel be in percent (%).
AO Reset, however, requires that the engineering units of the control and reset sensors be in temperature (degrees F or C), while the
output device may be in any engineering units.
Typical Application
You can use AO Reset to control a three-way valve serving a hot

water loop, such that the loop supply temperature increases with a
decrease in outside air temperature.
221
AOReset
RESET xxC
Function Type 11
Following are two examples of AO reset:

Example 1 - The most common application of setpoint reset is to
vary a setpoint with outside air such that the setpoint will increase as
the OAT sensor decreases. When graphed, such an arrangement will
produce a line with a negative slope.
Figure 5-10a
Setpoint Reset When Start
Reset > Stop Reset
High
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
Stop
Reset
Start
Reset
For example, if you were required to adjust a hot water setpoint

from 90 degrees F (32.2 degrees C) to 140 degrees F (60.0 degrees
C), as the OAT decreased for 60 degrees F (15.6 degrees C) to 0
degrees F (-17.8 degrees C), use the following configuration decisions:
Stop Reset = 0 deg.F (-17.8 deg.C)
Whenever the OAT is less than or equal 0 deg.F (-17.8 deg.C), the
setpoint is clamped at 140 deg.F (60.0 deg.C.) Whenever the OAT is
greater than or equal to 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C), the setpoint is
clamped at 90 deg.F (32.2 deg.C.) When the reset sensor is between
0 degrees F (-17.8 deg.C) and 60 degrees F (15.6 deg.C), the setpoint is adjusted in a linear fashion.
This would also work for chilled water reset by substituting the
following values:
221a
222
AOReset
RESET xxC
Function Type 11
Example 2 - A less common application would be to increase the

static pressure setpoint of a variable volume fan as the OAT temperature increases. This would produce a setpoint line with a positive slope.
Figure 5-10b
Setpoint Reset When Stop
Reset > Start Reset
High
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
Start
Reset
Stop
Reset
The following settings illustrate this application:

Low Setpoint = 1.0" H2O (0.248 kPa)
High Setpoint = 2.5" H2O (0.621 kPa)
Whenever the OAT is less than or equal to 60 deg.F (15.6 deg.C),
the setpoint is clamped at 1.0" H20 (0.248 kPa). Whenever the OAT
is greater than or equal to 90 deg.F (32.2 deg.C), the setpoint is
clamped at 2.5" H20 (0.621 kPa). When the reset sensor is between
60 degrees F (15.6 deg.C) and 90 degrees F (32.2 deg.C), the pressure setpoint is adjusted in a linear fashion.
221b
223
AOReset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
222
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Temperature Setpoint
Reset Point
Reset
Start Reset Value
Stop Reset Value
Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Reset Point
Control Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Figure 5-11
AOReset
Force
Status
Output
Sensor
Input
Sensor
Status
High
Setpoint
High
Setpoint
Bias Input
Reset Point
Low
Setpoint
Low
Setpoint
Output
Setpoint
Reset
NOT
Occupancy
State?
Output
Force Status
Status
Discharge Temperature
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point

AND
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Enable
Output
PID_Master_Loop
Input
Force Status
Status
Analog Output Point
OR
AOReset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
223
AOReset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

valve or damper.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters,

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
the occupied and unoccupied temperature setpoints for this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
224
Bldg. Supvr. =SETPTyy

SETPT00
AOReset
RESET xxC
Function Type 11
Reset Point
Use this decision to specify the AI point that will reset the setpoint to the PID
Master Loop. This setpoint is reset between the configured low and high
setpoints from the Setpoint Schedule based on the value from the sensor specified in this decision. If you do not configure the sensor, the low setpoint will be
used.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Reset
Reset calculates the desired setpoint to the PID Master Loop based on the reset
temperature input and the configured temperature setpoints.
Start Reset Value
(the Y axis parameters are set by the setpoint schedule.) If the configured Start Reset value is greater than the Stop Reset value, then the
setpoint will decrease as the reset sensor value increases. If the configured Start Reset value is less than the configured Stop Reset value, then
the setpoint will increase as the reset sensor value increases.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

-40.0 (-40.0)
Stop Reset Value

(the Y axis parameters are set by the setpoint schedule.) If the configured Stop Reset value is greater than the Start Reset value, then the
setpoint will increase as the reset sensor value increases. If the configured Stop Reset value is less than the Start Reset value, then the setpoint
will decrease as the reset sensor value increases.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

245.0 (118.3)
Control Point
discharge air or water temperature that will be compared to the calculated
setpoint by the PID Master Loop.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
225
AOReset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve or damper position to maintain the desired calculated
setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
2.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
1.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the damper or valve position to be maintained when the fan status is off or the Control Point status is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
226

0.0
AOReset
RESETxxC
Function Type 11

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output value to the
valve or damper.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output value to the
valve or damper.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
10
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
227
AOReset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

This decision displays the value of the AO point being controlled by this algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the default mode will be Yes.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Reset Point
This decision displays the value of the point used to reset the Temperature
Setpoint.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
This decision displays the calculated Temperature Setpoint used by the PID
Master Loop.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Control Point
This decision displays the value of the discharge air or water temperature that is
compared to the Controlling Setpoint.
Valid Display
228
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
AOReset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Controlling Setpoint - Control Point) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Controlling Setpoint - Control Point) *
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Controlling Setpoint - Control Point)
Valid Display
229
AOReset
RESETxxM
Function Type 11
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
Valid Display
230
0 to 300 seconds
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
AOShared
Transducer
The AOShared Transducer algorithm controls sequenced heating

and cooling coil valves in a constant volume air handler.
The AOShared Transducer algorithm uses both a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) Master Loop and a P (Proportional)
Submaster Loop to control the chilled water and hot water or steam
valve positions.
The PID Master Loop calculates the supply air temperature setpoint
(submaster reference) required to achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the submaster reference by obtaining the highest or lowest sensor inputs from the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and comparing it to the high or low space
temperature setpoint. The high space temperature input and high
setpoint are used when the highest space temperature is greater than
the high setpoint minus 1.5F. The low space temperature input and
low setpoint are used when the lowest space temperature is less than
the low setpoint plus 1.5F. If the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor status
is invalid the Submaster Loop is set to the disabled output value. If
the highest space temperature is less than the high setpoint minus
1.5F and the lowest space temperature is greater than the low
setpoint plus 1.5F, then the No Heat/No Cool flag is set and the
submaster reference is set to the Minimum Output Value. The P
Submaster Loop computes the valve position by comparing the
calculated submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature. The
PID Master Loop starting value and the P Submaster Loops Proportional Gain and Center Value are set based on whether the
algorithm is heating or cooling.
configure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low temperature setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control sequenced heating and cooling
coil valves in an air handler.
231
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Heat Cool Select
Heat Proportional Gain
Cool Proportional Gain
Heat Center Value
Cool Center Value
Heat Starting Value
Cool Starting Value
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
**
Starting Value
* Supply Air Temperature
Submaster Loop - Shared
**
Proportional Gain
Heating Minimum Output
Heating Maximum Output
Cooling Minimum Output
Cooling Maximum Output
**
Center Value
Power on Delay
** NOTE:
Do not configure these decisions. The appropriate value

from the Heat Cool Select configuration will be used.
232
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Low SPT Setpoint
High SPT Setpoint
Heat Cool Select
Controlling Sensor
Cool
No Heat No Cool
Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Shared Xducer Subm Ref
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Submaster Flags
Task Timer
233
234
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
NOT
Low Sensor
No Heat / No Cool
Low
Average
High Sensor
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Output
Setpoint
Cool
Starting Value
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Kp
Center Value
Low Setpoint
Fan Status
Heat / Cool Select
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Status
Force Status
Output
Fan
Status Point
Figure 5-12
AOShared Transducer
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Enable
Output
Minimum Output
Starting Value
Sensor Input
Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Force
Status
Status
Output
Input
Supply
Air
Setpoint
Force
Status
Status
Output
Supply
Air
Temp
OR
OR
NOT
Point Forced?
Forced?
Reference
Setpoint
Enable
Sensor Input
Cool
Center Value
Kp
OR
Clamp
PID
Integrator
Output
Submaster Loop-Shared
Status
Status
Force
Output
Input
Analog
Output
Point
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

Use this decision to specify the AO point that is controlling the air handlers
sequenced chilled water valve and hot water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

Use this decision to specify the DI point that provides the on/off status of the air
handlers fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control a common air
handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
235
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Setpoint Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides the occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints for this algorithm. For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
Note:
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Heat Cool Select

Heat Cool Select determines if the space requires heating, cooling, or neither.
If heating is required, it provides the lowest space temperature, low setpoint,
Heat Starting Value, Heat Center Value, and Heat Proportional Gain. When
cooling is required, it provides the highest space temperature, high setpoint,
Cool Starting Value, Cool Center Value, and Cool Proportional Gain.
Heat Proportional Gain

produce the P Submaster Loop proportional term during heating. The
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-6
Cool Proportional Gain

produce the P Submaster Loop proportional term during cooling. The
Allowable Entries
Default Value
236
-100.0 to 100.0
-10
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Heat Center Value

submaster error condition for heating. This value will override the P
Submaster Loops Center Value configuration decision during heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

35.0
Cool Center Value

submaster error condition for cooling. This value will override the P
Submaster Loops Center Value configuration decision during cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

70.0
Heat Starting Value

Use this decision to specify the PID Master Loop Starting Value when in
heating mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
85.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(29.4)
Cool Starting Value

Use this decision to specify the PID Master Loop Starting Value when in
cooling mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
55.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(12.78)
237
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the supply air temperature setpoint (submaster reference) required to
achieve the desired space temperature.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
Integral Gain
this decision is expressed in units-per-unit of error per iteration.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.4
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the Supply Air Temperature to be maintained when the space temperature input(s) are invalid or if the fan
status is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
238
-40.0 to 245.0F
75.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(24.0)
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable Supply Air Temperature (minimum submaster reference). When no heating or cooling is
required the submaster reference is set to this value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
45.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(7.2)

Allowable Entries
Default Value
-40.0 to 245.0F
150.0
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
(70.0)
Starting Value
This decision is not used. The value is overridden by the appropriate
Starting Value from the Heat/Cool select function.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
120

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
239
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12

The submaster loop is a proportional control loop that computes a sequenced
heating coil and cooling coil valve position by comparing the calculated
submaster reference to the Supply Air Temperature.
Proportional Gain
This decision is not used. The value is overridden by the appropriate
gain from the Heat/Cool Select function.

Use this decision to specify the output value when the Supply Air
Temperature sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

50.0
Heating Minimum Output

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output for the hot water
or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

10.0
Heating Maximum Output

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output for the hot
Allowable Entries
Default Value
240

40.0
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxC
Function Type 12
Cooling Minimum Output

Use this decision to specify the lowest allowable output for the chilled
water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

60.0
Cooling Maximum Output

Use this decision to specify the highest allowable output for the chilled
water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Center Value
This decision is not used. The value will be overridden by the value in
the Heat Center Value or Cool Center Value decision.

new output value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5 seconds
2
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
241
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the Single AI sensor (if chosen) or the
average of the sensor group (if chosen).
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Low SPT Setpoint

This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint value. The occupancy state is used to decide if the occupied or unoccupied setpoint is used.
Valid Display
242
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
High SPT Setpoint

This decision displays the high space temperature setpoint value. The occupancy state is used to decide if the occupied or unoccupied setpoint is used.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
Heat Cool Select

The Heat Cool Select function determines if the space requires heating, cooling, or neither.
Controlling Sensor
This decision displays the selected high or low setpoint based on the
input conditions. This value will be 0F (-17.8C) when No Heat No
Cool is True.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Cool
This decision displays whether or not cooling is required for the space.
If Cool is True, then the high space temperature, high setpoint, and the
Cool Starting Value, Cool Center Value, and Cool Proportional Gain
are used.
Valid Display
True/False
No Heat No Cool
This decision indicates if the space does not require heating or cooling.
Valid Display
True/False
243
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Setpoint
This decision displays the setpoint value that is currently selected based
on the input conditions.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
PID_Master_Loop
The PID Master Loop function calculates the submaster reference based on the
configured PID gains and the current deviation from setpoint. The calculated
output is re-adjusted periodically to move closer toward the desired setpoint.
Reference Output
Term + Heat or Cool Starting Value)
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9^F
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - Sensor) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Valid Display
Valid range based upon display units.
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Setpoint - Sensor)
Valid Display
244
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Shared Xducer Subm Ref

This decision displays the calculated value of the PID Master Loop. This
value is used with the Supply Air Temperature by the submaster loop. To
override the submaster reference, force this point.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

supply air temperature. This point must be configured to enable the submaster
loop to execute properly.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

The submaster loop for the shared transducer algorithm controls to the difference between the submaster reference and the supply air temperature. This
loop executes every two seconds.
Reference Output
Reference Output = (Proportional Term + Heat or Cool Center Value)
Valid Display
245
AOShared Transducer
SHXDRxxM
Function Type 12
Proportional Term
the shared transducer submaster loop.
Proportional Term = (Shared Xducer Subm Ref - Supply Air Temperature) * Heat or Cool Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Submaster Flags
Left Digit

Clamped)
Right Digit
0 = No PID clamp
1 = PID clamp is in effect.
Valid Display
00 to 11
Task Timer
Valid Display
246
0 to 300 seconds
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
AOStatic
Pressure
The AOStatic Pressure algorithm provides an output to an inlet

guide vane, fan discharge damper, or variable speed fan to maintain
constant static pressure in the duct.
The AOStatic Pressure algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) Master Loop to calculate the desired output value.
The PID Master Loop compares the duct static pressure to the
configured low setpoint to compute the output value. If the air
handler supply fan status is off or the duct static pressure sensor is
invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output to the configured
Minimum Output Value.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control the inlet guide vane to maintain a constant duct static pressure in a constant volume system.
You can also use this algorithm to control a variable speed fan to
maintain a constant duct static pressure in a variable air volume
system.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
Duct Static Pressure
Static Pressure Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Power on Delay
247
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
248
Analog Output Point

Fan Status Point
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Task Timer
Output
Force Status
Status
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Figure 5-13
AOStatic Pressure
NOT
AND
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Enable
Output
PID_Master_Loop
Input
Force Status
Status
Analog Output Point

OR
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
249
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

inlet guide vane or damper position or variable fan speed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Status Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point that provides the duct
static pressure for the air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00

You must configure this decision to specify the duct static pressure setpoint
that you desire the system to maintain.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
250
0.00 to 5.00 H20

2.50
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the desired output to maintain the configured static pressure setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
20.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
10.0
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

fan is off or the duct static pressure sensor is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0
251
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxC
Function Type 13

Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value

100.0
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
10
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
252
0 to 65535 seconds
0
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxM
Function Type 13
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

algorithm.
Valid Display
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the air handlers fan which determines whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured or the
value is off, then this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the duct static pressure in inches of water.
Valid Display
0.00 to 5.00 H20
(0 to 1244.2 Pa)

This decision displays the configured duct static pressure setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 5.00 H20
(0 to 1244.2 Pa)
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Valid Display
253
AOStatic Pressure
STPR_xxM
Function Type 13
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure) *
Proportional Gain
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure) *
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Error = (Static Pressure Setpoint - Duct Static Pressure)
Valid Display
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Task Timer
Valid Display
254
0 to 300 seconds
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
DOAnalog
Comparison
The DOAnalog Comparison algorithm compares the lowest and

highest temperature sensors to the configured low and high setpoints.
The algorithm can work with a single Temperature Sensor or a
Sensor Group with multiple sensors. If either sensor is outside of the
setpoint range, the output point is commanded on. When both
sensors are within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis
and high setpoint minus hysteresis, the output point is commanded
off. If the output point is forced or the input sensor is out of range,
the algorithm will be disabled.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller
is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to
be in the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low
setpoints for both occupied and unoccupied states.
Typical Applications
You can use this algorithm to start a hot water pump when the outside air temperature is below 50F and stop the pump when the
outside air temperature is above 51F.
You could also use this algorithm to start a supply fan if space
temperature drifts out of limits and stop the fan when the space
temperature is within limits.
255
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
256
Discrete Output Point

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Analog
Hysteresis
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Analog
Low Setpoint
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
High Setpoint
Reference Output
Task Timer
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Average
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Low Sensor
Low
Disable
High Sensor
OR
Analog
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Figure 5-14
DOAnalog Comparison
Output
Input
Force Status
Status
Output
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
257
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is being controlled by this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Blgd. Supvr. = up to 8 characters

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or single space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines
the occupancy state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule
in this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For
more information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
chapter in this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
258

OCCPC00
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxC
Function Type 14
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints for this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Analog
Analog provides a discrete output by comparing the highest and lowest space
sensor values to the configured setpoint values. If either sensor is outside the
setpoint range, the DO is commanded on and remains on until both sensors are
within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high setpoint
minus hysteresis.
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify the amount that is added to the low setpoint
and subtracted from the high setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 9999.9
1.0

Use this decision to specify how often the input conditions are checked to
determine if the output state must change.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 900 seconds
120
Power on Delay
wait to activate this algorithm after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
259
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxM
Function Type 14
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the actual state of the DO point being controlled by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the single AI sensor or the average of the
sensor group, depending on which is selected.
Valid Display
Occupied ?
in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the default
mode will be Yes.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Analog
Analog displays the current controlling setpoint data, with hysteresis, based on
the occupancy state.
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint value, excluding hysteresis. If the
space temperature falls below this value, the Discrete Output Point will be
commanded on.
Valid Display
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
This decision displays the Low Setpoint value, including hysteresis. If
the space temperature is within the range of this value and the Hi Setpoint
- Hyst value, the Discrete Output Point will be commanded off.
Valid Display
260
DOAnalog Comparison
ANCTLxxM
Function Type 14
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, including hysteresis. If
the space temperature is within the range of this value and the Lo
Setpoint + Hyst value, the Discrete Output Point will be commanded off.
Valid Display
High Setpoint
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, excluding hysteresis. If
the space temperature exceeds this value, the Discrete Output Point will
be commanded on.
Valid Display
Reference Output
This decision displays the value that the algorithm output will be driven
to, unless a force condition overrides this output.
Valid Display
True/False
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of seconds remaining before the algorithm
executes again. This algorithm will execute every 60 seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
261
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
DODX Staging
VAV
The DODX Staging VAV algorithm controls up to six stages of

DX (direct expansion) cooling in a variable air volume air handler.
The DODX Staging VAV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional
Integral Derivative) Master Loop to control the cooling stages. The
PID Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
maintain the Supply Air Setpoint. The DX Supply Air Setpoint is a
calculated value that can be reset linearly based on the space temperature.
The PID Master Loop computes the required number of cooling
stages by comparing the calculated Supply Air Setpoint to the
Supply Air Temperature. The stages are activated sequentially,
allowing for a configured delay time between each stage. Once a
stage is activated, it will not be de-activated until the calculated
number of stages has decreased by a full stage. This hysteresis
prevents short cycling of stages. When all available stages are
activated, the algorithm clamps the PID Master Loop integrator at
its current value. During dehumidification, the percentage of stages
activated will equal the configured Maximum Output Value. If the
space temperature is below the average value of the high and low
temperature setpoints or the supply air temperature sensor status is
invalid, the percentage of stages activated will equal the configured
Disabled Output Value. If the supply fan is off all the cooling stages
are turned off.
Typical Application
262
You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of DX cooling

in a VAV air handler unit.
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Output
Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
VAV Setpoint Sensor
Supply Air Setpoint
Reset Ratio
Start Reset
Maximum Reset
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
Total Number of Stages
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
263
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
264

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
VAV Setpoint Reset
Setpoint
Setpoint Offset
DX Supply Air Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
PID Integrator Clamp
Task Timer
-3
SELECT A
Occ Low Setpoint
Occ High Setpoint
Humidity Setpoint
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Figure 5-15
DODX Staging VAV
>
High - 0.5 (High - Low)
Output
Force Status
Status
Supply Air
Temperature
OR
Force Status
Output
SELECT A
A
AND
Supply Air
Setpoint
(Software
Point)
Input
Output
Sensor Input
Sensor Status
VAV Setpoint
Reset
<
NOT
Status
Force Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Enable
Sensor Input
Output
PID_Master_Loop
Input
PID
Integrator
Clamp
Stage 6
Stage 5
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Staging Control
Fan Status
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Input
Force Status
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
265
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Configuration
Decisions
Discrete Output
You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
first stage of DX (direct expansion) cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the second stage of
DX (direct expansion) cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the third stage of
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fourth stage of
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fifth stage of
Allowable Entries
Default Value
266

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Discrete Output
Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the sixth stage of
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handlers fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group or SPT sensor or space temperature sensor
for all algorithms that control a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
267
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can use
a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is needed. If reheat is being done, the same sensor that is used here should
be used in the associated heating VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoints for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual. If reheat is being done, the same setpoint that is
used here should be used in the associated heating VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTxx

LID = xx, where xx = 0 to 16
SETPT00

AI point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored.
the high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint schedule. If reheat is being done,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated heating VAV
algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
268

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint to the master loop. The
configured setpoint can be reset upward based on space temperature.
Supply Air Setpoint

Use this decision to specify the minimum supply air temperature that this
algorithm will maintain.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 120.0F
55.0
(-18.0 to 49.0C)
(13.0)
Reset Ratio
If the supply air setpoint is being reset, use this decision to specify the
amount of reset of every degree the space temperature is above Start Reset
configuration decision. The value in this decision is expressed in degrees
per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 5.0^F
3.0
(0.0 to 2.8^C)
(1.7)
Start Reset
space temperature that must be exceeded before the Supply Air Setpoint
is reset.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 99.9F
0.0
(-18.0 to 37.7C)
(-18.0)
Maximum Reset
maximum amount the Supply Air Setpoint can be reset above the configured value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 99.9^F
15.0
(0.0 to 55.0^C)
(8.3)
269
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the valve position required to achieve the desired setpoint.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-5.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
-0.4
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
270
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15

Use this decision to specify the percent of stages to be activated when
the fan is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percent of stages that will
always be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percent of stages that can be
activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the percent of stages that will be activated
when the PID Master Loop is enabled by the Fan Status Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

calculates the percent of stages required to maintain the Supply Air
Setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
30
271
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxC
Function Type 15
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of DX cooling based
on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You can
configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.

You must configure this decision to specify the number of discrete
stages of DX cooling the algorithm will control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 6
6
On Time Delay
Use this decision to specify the minimum time delay between the
starting of stages. This value should represent the time required by a
newly activated stage to have its effect on the supply temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
1
Off Time Delay

stopping of stages. This value should represent the time from when the
algorithm stops the stage to the time there is an effect on the controlled
supply temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
5
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this algorithm after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
272
0 to 65535 seconds
0
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of DX
(direct expansion) cooling.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of DX
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of DX
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of DX
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of DX
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of DX
Valid Display
On/Off
273
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.00F to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No

monitored. If this decision is not configured, this value will default to the Off
state.
Valid Display
On/Off

from the Humidity Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
274
0.00 to 100.00% RH
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
VAV Setpoint Reset

VAV Setpoint Reset provides the supply air setpoint value to the master loop.
Setpoint
This decision displays the calculated supply air setpoint which is used by
the master loop. This value represents the sum of calculated offset added
to the configured Supply Air Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.0 to 120.0F
(-18.0 to 49.0C)
Setpoint Offset
This calculated value represents the amount of reset that is added to the
configured Supply Air Setpoint to generate the setpoint value.
Setpoint Offset = (VAV Start Reset - Sensor Group/SPT Sensor)
* Reset Ratio
Valid Display
-99.9 to 99.9^F
(-54.9 to 54.9^C)
DX Supply Air Setpoint

This decision displays the calculated Supply Air Setpoint for the PID Master
Loop. To override the DX Supply Air Setpoint, force the point.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.0 to 118.3C)

Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.0 to 118.3C)
PID_Master_Loop
275
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Reference Output
Discrete Output Points.
Term + Center Value)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (DX Supply Air Setpoint - Supply Air
Temperature) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = (Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature) * Integral
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Derivative Term
PID equation. Note: Error = (Setpoint - Supply Air Temperature)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integrator Flags
276
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
DODX Staging VAV

DXVAVxxM
Function Type 15
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of DX cooling. The control is
based on the reference output from the PID Master Loop.
Number of Stages
This decision displays the number of stages that are currently on.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Requested Stages
This decision displays the number of stages that the algorithm requests
on. The number is determined by percent of stages requested from the
PID Master Loop in relation to the configured Total Number of Stages.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delta Stages
This decision displays the difference determined by the Number of
Stages subtracted from the Requested Stages.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delay Timer
This decision displays the number of minutes that must elapse before
another stage can be started or stopped.
Valid Display
0 to 30 minutes

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in
effect for the staging control function.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
277
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
DOElectric
Heat CV
The DOElectric Heat CV algorithm controls up to six stages of

electric heat in a constant volume air handler.
The Electric Heat CV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID
Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the required number of output stages by obtaining
the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the low temperature setpoint configured in the
Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint is increased by the heating setpoint
offset when dehumidification is being performed. The stages are
activated sequentially, allowing for a configured delay time between
each stage. Once a stage is activated, it will not be de-activated
until the calculated number of stages has decreased by a full stage.
This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages. When all available
stages of electric heat are activated, the algorithm clamps the PID
Master Loop integrator at its current value.
If the fan status is off, all stages of electric heat are turned off. If the
sensor group status in invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output
to the Disabled Output Value. If the Duct Temperature input exceeds the configured Duct High Limit, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Minimum Output Value.
Typical Application
278
You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of electric heat
in a constant volume air handler.
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
279
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
280

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Space Setpoint
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
Duct High Limit
Force Status
Output
Status
Duct Temperature
Occ Low Setpoint
Occ High Setpoint
Humidity Setpoint
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Status
TS Override
Low
High
Average
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
-3
>
SELECT A
Heating Setpoint
Offset
SELECT A
OR
NOT
SELECT A
Select
Status
Force Status
Output
Fan Status Point
-5
>
Figure 5-16
DOElectric Heat CV
SELECT A
AND
Output
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Minimum Output
Maximum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master_Loop
Input
Fan
Status
PID
Integrator
Clamp
Stage 6
Stage 5
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Staging Control
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Input
Force
Status
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
281
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Configuration
Decisions
Discrete Output
first stage of electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Discrete Output
electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
282

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Discrete Output
electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Status Point

off status of the air handlers fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters,

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

that is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group or SPT Sensor or space temperature sensor
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this
manual.
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that control
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
283
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoints for this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can use a
High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification
is needed. If dehumidification is being performed, the same sensor that is used
here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoint for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
setpoint that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

If the air handler is performing dehumidification, use this decision to specify the AI
point that provides the space or return air humidity sensor being monitored. Dehumidification is required if the High Humidity Sensor value is greater than the high
setpoint from Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is being performed,
the same sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling CV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
284

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Duct Temperature
Use this decision to specify the AI point that is used as a safety to prevent the
duct temperature from exceeding the high temperature limit.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Duct High Limit

Use this decision to specify a maximum duct temperature before the PID
Master Loop output is clamped to the Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
80.00 to 245.00F
150.00
(26.7 to 188.3C)
(66)
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
5.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.4
285
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the percent of stage to be activated when
the fan is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the minium percent of stages that will
always be activated. The output will equal this value if the Duct
Temperature exceeds the High Duct Limit.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximin percent of stages that can be
activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
100.0
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value
286
0 to 100%
0.0
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxC
Function Type 16

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
30

how much the space temperature setpoint is offset during dehumidification.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 10.00^F
3.00
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(1.6)
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of electric heating
based on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You
can configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.

stages of electric heating the algorithm will control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 6
6
On Time Delay
newly activated stage to have its effect on the space temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
1
287
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Off Time Delay

space temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
288
On/Off
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
289
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16

state.
Valid Display
On/Off

from the High Humidity schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
Duct Temperature
This decision displays the duct temperature sensor value used as a safety value
to prevent excessive duct temperatures.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.00 to 118.33C)
Duct High Limit

This decision displays the maximum duct temperature, that, if exceeded, will
cause the PID Master Loop output to clamp to the minimum output value.
Valid Display
290
-80.00 to 245.00F
(26.6 to 118.3C)
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated output that is used to determine
the percentage of Discrete Output Points required.
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Proportional Term = (Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Proportional Gain
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term = ((Setpoint - SPT Sensor) * Integral Term + Previous
Integral Term)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Valid Display
0 to 100%
291
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint from the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is
determined.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of electric heating. The control is
Number of Stages
Valid Display
0 to 6
Requested Stages
PID Master Loop in relation to the configured Total Number of Stages.
Valid Display
292
0 to 6
DOElectric Heat CV
EHCV_xxM
Function Type 16
Delta Stages
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delay Timer
Valid Display
0 to 30 minutes

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in effect
for the staging control function.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
293
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
DOElectric
Heat VAV
The DOElectric Heat VAV algorithm controls up to six stages of

electric heat in a variable air volume air handler.
The Electric Heat CV algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral
Derivative) Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID
Master Loop calculates the number of output stages required to
achieve the desired space temperature setpoint. The PID Master
Loop calculates the required number of output stages by obtaining
the lowest sensor input from the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor and
comparing it to the low temperature setpoint configured in the
Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint is increased by the Heating Setpoint Offset when dehumidification is being performed. The stages
are activated sequentially, allowing for a configured delay time
between each stage. Once a stage is activated, it will not be deactivated until the calculated number of stages has decreased by a
full stage. This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages. When
all available stages of electric heat are activated, the algorithm
clamps the PID Master Loop integrator at its current value.
If the fan status is off all stages of electric heat are turned off. If the
sensor group status in invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the output
to the Disabled Output Value. If the Duct Temperature input exceeds the configured Duct High Limit, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Minimum Output Value.
configure a Time Schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will
For applications that have alternate heat sources, you can use Morning Warmup to preheat the space.
Typical Application
294
You can use this algorithm to control up to six stages of electric heat
in a variable air volume air handler.
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*

Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
Occupied Heating
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
295
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
296

Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Duct Temperature
Duct High Limit
Morning Warm Up
Reference Output
Morning Warmup ?
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Space Setpoint
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Humidity
Setpoint
Status
Force Status
Output
High Humidity
Sensor
Force Status
Status
Output
High Humidity
Switch
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Maintenance
Occupancy
Time Schedule
Low
High
Average
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Output
Status
Force Status
Fan Status Point
>
Figure 5-17
DOElectric Heat VAV
Select
SELECT A
A
-3
Heating
Setpoint
Offset
OR
A
B
1
O
Setpoint
A
B
O
SELECT A
-5
Duct High Limit
Force
Status
Output
Duct Temp.
SELECT A
NOT
Status
Occupancy
State?
Space
Temp.
Disable
Fan
Status
Morning
Warm Up
>
AND
SELECT A
Reset Integrator
Clamp Integrator
Minimum Output
Maximum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
Output
PID_Master_Loop
NOT
Input
PID
Integrator
Clamp
Stage 6
stage 5
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Staging Control
Fan
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Force
Status
Input
Force
Status
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
297
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Configuration
Decisions

first stage of electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
298

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17

electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Status Point

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point that provides the
on/off status of the air handlers fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the
fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

is providing the space temperature inputs. For more information on sensor
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group or SPT sensor or space temperature sensor
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
299
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = SETPTyy,

SETPT00

the DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm
can use a High Humidity Switch or High Humidity Sensor to determine if
dehumidification is needed. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule that provides the humidity setpoints for this algorithm. For
more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter in this manual. If dehumidification is being performed, the same
sensor that is used here should be used in the associated Cooling VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

greater than the high setpoint from Humidity Setpoint schedule. If dehumidification is being performed, the same sensor that is used here should be used in
the associated Cooling VAV algorithm.
Allowable Entries
300
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Duct Temperature
Use this decision to specify the AI point that is used as a safety value to prevent
the duct temperature from exceeding the high temperature limit.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Duct High Limit

Use this decision to specify the maximum duct temperatures reached before the
PID Master Loop output is clamped to the Minimum Output Value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
80.00 to 245.00F
150.00
(27.0 to 118.3C)
(66.0)
Occupied Heating
Use this decision to disable heating during Occupied periods. If this decision
is set to No, the algorithm will be enabled only to preheat the space.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = No or Yes

LID = 0(No) or 1(Yes)
No
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
5.0
301
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.4
Derivative Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-100.0 to 100.0
0.0

Use this decision to specify the percent of stages to be activated when
the fan is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percent of stages that will
always be activated. The output also will be set to this value when the
Duct Temperature exceeds the Duct High Limit.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percent of stages that can be
activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
302
0 to 100%
100.0
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxC
Function Type 17
Starting Value
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 100%
0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 300 seconds
30

how much space temperature setpoint is offset during dehumidification.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 10.00^F
3.00
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(1.66)
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages of electric heating
based on the requesting input, whose value can range from 0 to 100%. You
can configure the minimum time between starting and stopping stages.

stages of electric heating the algorithm will control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 6
6
303
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
On Time Delay
newly activated stage to have its effect on the space temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
1
Off Time Delay

space temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
304
On/Off
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the third stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fourth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the fifth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the point controlling the sixth stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Fan Status Point

Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
305
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No

state.
Valid Display
On/Off

from the High Humidity schedule.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
Duct Temperature
This decision displays the duct temperature sensor value used as a safety to
prevent excessive duct temperatures.
Valid Display
306
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.33C)
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Duct High Limit

This decision displays the maximum duct temperature that, if exceeded, will
cause the PID Master Loop output to clamp to the minimum output value.
Valid Display
80.00 to 245.00F
(26.6 to 118.3C)
Morning Warm Up
Morning Warmup is used to bring the space temperature up to occupied heating setpoint after an unoccupied period. Once the setpoint is reached, heating
will be disabled for the remainder of that occupied period, unless Occupied
Heating is enabled.
Reference Output
This decision determines whether the PID loop will be enabled. If
Occupied Heating is Yes, the output is On whenever Fan Status is On.
Otherwise, the output is On only when Fan Status is On and Morning
Warmup is True.
Valid Display
On/Off
Morning Warmup ?
This decision displays whether the algorithm is executing morning
warm-up.
Valid Display
True/False
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
This decision displays the calculated percentage of stages that will be
activated.
Valid Display
0 to 100%
307
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term)
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Note:
Valid Display
0 to 100%
Integrator Flags
308
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit

Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the low space temperature setpoint from the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The occupancy state is taken into effect when this value is
determined.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of electric heating. The control is
Number of Stages
Valid Display
0 to 6
Requested Stages
PID Master Loop value in relation to the configured Total Number of
Stages.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delta Stages
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delay Timer
Valid Display
0 to 30 minutes
309
DOElectric Heat VAV

EHVAVxxM
Function Type 17

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in
effect for the staging control function.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
310
0 to 300 seconds
DOEnthalpy Comparison
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
DOEnthalpy
Comparison
The DOEnthalpy Comparison algorithm compares values from

two air streams and indicates if the outside air is suitable for conditioning the space.
Typical Application
This algorithm normally controls a discrete output point based on an

analog (heat content) comparison of two airstreams: i.e., outside
and return air. The discrete output point may be used to drive a
relay or solenoid air valve as required to accomplish enthalpy
switch-over of dampers.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Outside Air Temperature
Return Air Temperature
Outside Air Humidity
Return Air Humidity
Outside Air Dewpoint
Enthalpy Comparison
Default OA Enthalpy
Default RA Enthalpy
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Power on Delay
*
*
*
*
*
*

Return Air Humidity
Enthalpy Comparison
Reference Output
OA Enthalpy
RA Enthalpy
OAT > RAT ?
Task Timer
311
312
Force Status
Status
Output
Return Air Humidity
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Figure 5-18
DOEnthalpy
Comparison
RARH
RARH Status
Dewpoint Status
Dewpoint
OARH Status
OARH
RAT
RAT Status
OAT Status
OAT
OAT > RAT
Enthalpy Check
Enthalpy Comparison
Input
Force Status
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is being controlled based on an enthalpy (heat content) comparison of two airstreams:
outside air and return air.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

This decision defines the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to
the algorithm. If the AI point and the Outside Air Dewpoint are not available,
the algorithm uses the value in the Default OA Enthalpy decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00

return air temperature to this algorithm. If the AI point is not available, the
algorithm uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00

This decision defines the AI point that provides the outside air humidity to the
algorithm. If this AI point and the Outside Air Dewpoint sensor are not
available, the algorithm uses the value in the Default OA Enthalpy decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
313
ENTH_xxC
Function Type 18
Return Air Humidity

relative humidity of the return air to this algorithm. If the AI point is not
available, the algorithm uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00

If an outside air humidity sensor is not used, this decision defines the AI point
that provides the outside air dewpoint to the algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison calculates the heat content of outside air and return air.
It determines if the outside air is suitable for conditioning the space.
Default OA Enthalpy
If an Outside Air Humidity or Dewcell sensor is not available, use this
decision to specify the outside air enthalpy that Return Air Humidity
must exceed for the output to be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 51 BTU/lb
10
Default RA Enthalpy
If a Return Air Humidity sensor is not available, use this decision to
specify the return air enthalpy that the Outside Air Humidity cannot
exceed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
314
0 to 51 BTU/lb
50
ENTH_xxM
Function Type 18
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Use this decision to specify the maximum outside air enthalpy that the
algorithm can use to condition the space.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 51 BTU/lb
30
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature sensor being
used by this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the return air temperature sensor being used
by this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the outside air humidity sensor being used
by this algorithm.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
315
ENTH_xxM
Function Type 18
Return Air Humidity

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity sensor being used by
this algorithm.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

This decision displays the value of the outside air dewpoint sensor being used
by this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison determines if outside air can be used for conditioning the
space, based on a drybulb or enthalpy comparison of the outside and return air.
Reference Output
This decision displays the result of the enthalpy comparison, which
indicates when true that the outside air is suitable for cooling.
Valid Display
True/False
OA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the outside air
expressed in units of BTU/lb.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9 Btu/lb
RA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the return air expressed in units of BTU/lb.
Valid Display
-9999.9 to 9999.9 Btu/lb
OAT > RAT ?

This decision indicates if the outside air temperature is greater than the
return air temperature. If the outside air temperature is greater, than the
OAT will be deemed not suitable for cooling.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Task Timer
Valid Display
316
0 to 300 seconds
DOInterlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
DOInterlock
The DOInterlock algorithm provides a DO point that is controlled

by the state of either a single or a pair of discrete points. The algorithm commands the output on whenever the state of the single or
pair of inputs equals its respective comparison states for the On
Persistence Time. The output remains on until the state of the single
or pair of inputs does not equal the respective comparison state for
the Off Persistence Time.
Typical Application
You could use this algorithm to control the state of a return fan
based on the state of its associated supply fan. Therefore, if the
supply fan status was off, the return fan would also be off.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Discrete Input Point 1
Discrete Interlock
Input 1 Comparison
Input 2 Comparison
Off Persistence Time
On Persistence Time
Output Logic Type
Power on Delay
*
*
*

Reference Output
Task Timer
317
318
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Figure 5-19
DOInterlock
Sensor Input (2)
Sensor Input (1)
Disable
Disc Interlock
Output
Input
Force Status
DOInterlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
DOInterlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that the algorithm
controls.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the DO or DI point that is compared to Input 1 Comparison state. If a DO or DI is not configured, the algorithm assumes that the input is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

Use this decision to specify the DO or DI point that is compared to Input 2
Comparison state. If a DO or DI is not configured, the algorithm assumes that
the input is off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Discrete Interlock
Discrete Interlock determines the output state by comparing the inputs to their
configured comparison states. These states must exist for the duration of the
persistence time to activate or deactivate the output.
Input 1 Comparison
Use this decision to specify the active comparison state for Discrete
Input 1.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = On or Off, LID = 0 or 1

Off
319
DOInterlock
INTLKxxC
Function Type 19
Input 2 Comparison
Use this decision to specify the active comparison state for Discrete
Input 2.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = On or Off

LID = 0 or 1
Off
Off Persistence Time

Use this decision to specify the amount of time the input conditions
must remain not equal to their comparison states before the algorithm
turns off the output point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30
On Persistence Time
Use this decision to specify the amount of time the input conditions
must remain equal to their comparison states before the algorithm turns
on the output point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30
Output Logic Type

Use this decision to specify if normal or inverted logic is desired.
Normal logic will drive the output on when the conditions are met.
Invert logic will do the opposite.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Normal/Invert
Normal
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
320
0 to 65535 seconds
0
DOInterlock
INTLKxxM
Function Type 19
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the actual state of the Discrete Output Point being
controlled by this algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the state of Discrete Input 1. This value is compared
with the configured Input 1 Comparison state to help determine the output
state.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the state of Discrete Input 2. This value is compared
with the configured Input 2 Comparison state to help determine the output
state.
Valid Display
On/Off
Reference Output
This decision displays the output state of the Discrete Interlock function,
without regard to the Output Logic Type. The Discrete Output Point is driven
to this value during Normal logic, and driven to the opposite value when
Output Logic Type is Invert.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
321
DOLighting Control
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20
DOLighting
Control
The DOLighting Control algorithm controls the state of two

discrete points. These points are pulsed on based upon the current
state of the Discrete Input Point. One point is the Pulsed On Output
and the other is the Pulsed Off Output.
If the input transitions from off to on, the algorithm turns the Pulsed
On Output on for one second. If the input transitions from on to off,
the algorithm turns the Pulsed Off Output on for one second. Additionally, the Pulsed Off Output can be continually re-pulsed on at
configured intervals.
Typical Application
This algorithm can be used to control lighting.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
322

Discrete Input Point
OFF Re-Pulse Interval
Power on Delay

Task Timer
Force
Status
Output
Off Repulse Interval
Figure 5-20
DOLighting Control
Input
Off Interval
Pulsed Off Control
Pulsed On Control
Lighting Control
Force
Status
Output
Input
Force
Status
Output
Input
DOLighting Control
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20
323
DOLighting Control
LIGHTxxC
Function Type 20
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that acts as the Pulsed
On Output whenever the input transitions to the ON state.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that acts as the Pulsed
Off Output whenever the input transitions to the OFF state.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that will be monitored
to determine which output point to pulse on and when to do so.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
OFF Re-Pulse Interval

Use this decision to configure the interval, in minutes, that the OFF interval will
re-pulse automatically when the Discrete Input Point remains in the off state.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 240 minutes
60
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
324
0 to 65535 seconds
0
DOLighting Control
LIGHTxxM
Function Type 20
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the status of the Pulsed On Output point.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the status of the Pulsed Off Output point.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the DI point that controls the pulsing of the
DO points.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
325
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
DOPermissive
Intrlock
The DOPermissive Interlock algorithm overrides the state of a

discrete point. The algorithm bases its decision on the current state
of the Discrete Control Point or the current value of the Analog
Control Point compared to a setpoint.
If you configure the Control Point Type decision to be discrete and
the Discrete Control Point is equal to the configured occupied or
unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence Time, the algorithm
forces the Discrete Output Point to the Override Value. An Override Value of 0 will force the point off. A value greater than zero
will force the point on. If the control point is not equal to the configured occupied or unoccupied discrete state for the Persistence
Time, the algorithm sets the Discrete Output Point to automatic
control.
the Analog Control Point is higher or lower (based on the occupied
or unoccupied analog test decision) than the configured setpoint for
the Persistence Time, the algorithm forces the Discrete Output Point
to the Override Value. If this is not true for the Persistence Time,
the algorithm sets the Discrete Output Point to automatic control.
do not configure a Setpoint Schedule, the algorithm sets the Discrete
Output Point to automatic control.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints and indicates the
test conditions used to override the point. If you do not configure a
Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure the low setpoints for
Typical Application
326
If a DO Time Clock normally controls a reheat coil hot water pump,

you can use this algorithm to prevent the pump from starting when
the supply fan is off.
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Decisions

optional.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Control Point Type
Occ Discrete State
Occ Analog Test
Unocc Analog Test
Override Value
Hysteresis
Persistence Time
Power on Delay
*
*
*

Occupied ?
Reference Output
Perm Interlock Flag
Conditional
Modified Setpoint
Persistence Timer
Setpoint Limit
Task Timer
327
328
Status
Output
Time Schedule
Status
Force
Output
Controlling Point
Figure 5-21
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Occupancy State
Setpoint
Disable
Output
Sensor Input
Input
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that will be overridden
when the test conditions have been met for the configured Persistence Time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
If the Control Point Type decision is set to Analog, you must configure this
decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoints to which the controlling point will be compared.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Permissive Interlock determines if the Discrete Output Point should be forced to
the configured override value when the input conditions are met.
Control Point Type
You must configure this decision to define whether the Control Point is
analog or discrete.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Analog/Discr
Analog
329
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Occ Discrete State

If the Control Point Type is Discr, use this decision to define the input
state when the Time Schedule is occupied that will cause the Discrete
Output Point to be overridden.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
On/Off
On

If the Control Point Type is Discr, use this decision to define the input
state when the Time Schedule is unoccupied that will cause the Discrete
Output Point to be overridden.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
On/Off
On
Occ Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the occupied low
setpoint in order to override the Discrete Output Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
High/Low
Low
Unocc Analog Test

If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to indicate if the
Analog Control Point must be higher or lower than the unoccupied
low setpoint in order to override the Discrete Output Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
330
High/Low
Low
DOPI_xxC
Function Type 21
Override Value
Use this decision to specify the state to which the Discrete Output Point
is forced when the proper input condition for the configured Persistence
Time exists.
Note:
You should only enter either 0.0 (off) or 1.0 (on). Any non-zero
value indicates an on state.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0
Hysteresis
If the Control Point Type is Analog, use this decision to specify how far
above or below the setpoint (based upon the analog test) the Analog
Control Point must be before the override is released.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0
Persistence Time
Use this decision to indicate how long the input condition must exist
before the Discrete Output Point is overridden or released to automatic
control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
0

Use this decision to configure the analog point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Discrete Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Analog.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PNT_NAME
331
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21

Use this decision to configure the discrete point that the algorithm tests to
determine if the Discrete Output Point should be overridden. If this decision is
configured, the Control Point Type should be set to Discr.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PNT_NAME
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
This function determines if a configured condition has occurred, and if so, the
Output point is overridden and set equal to the Reference Output, until the
causal condition no longer exists.
Reference Output
This decision displays the configured Override Value that the output
will be driven to.
Valid Display -9999.9 to 9999.9
332
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21
Perm Interlock Flag

This decision indicates whether the Permissive Interlock condition is in
effect.
Valid Display
True/False
Conditional
This decision displays the current conditional value (High or Low)
based on the Occupancy state.
Valid Display
High/Low
Modified Setpoint
This decision displays the modified Setpoint Value that is currently
being used to compare with the Analog Control point. It includes a
configured hysteresis, and allows for the conditional check being
performed (High or Low). This value will be 0 if a Discrete Control
point is being used.
Valid Display
Persistence Timer
This decision displays how much time is left before the Permissive
Interlock condition will take effect.
Valid Display
0 to 3600 seconds
Setpoint Limit
This decision displays the Setpoint Limit that is being compared to determine if
the Permissive Interlock condition will take effect.
Valid Display

This decision displays the value of the configured Analog Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur.
Valid Display

333
DOPI_xxM
Function Type 21

This decision displays the value of the configured Discrete Point which is being
used to determine when the Permissive Interlock will occur.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
executes again. This algorithm will execute every five seconds.
Valid Display
334
0 to 300 seconds
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
DOProp Thermo
Elec
Fan Control Modes
The DOProportional Thermostat algorithm provides two discrete

stages of electric heat and modulating control for a chilled water
valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the air terminal fan
in two different operating modes. You can configure this algorithm
to lock out heating or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds
a user configurable limit.
The two types of control modes for the fan are:
automatic
manual
In the automatic mode, the algorithm starts the fan when the space
being controlled requires heating or cooling. When the space
temperature is outside the configured high and low setpoints, the
algorithm starts the fan; otherwise, the fan is off.
In the manual mode, the algorithm only starts the fan during occupied times, thereby disabling the fan, heating, and cooling during
unoccupied times.
Thermostat Operating
Modes
The three types of operating modes for the thermostat are:
automatic heating and cooling

manual heating
manual cooling
In the automatic operating mode, the algorithm decides whether to

activate either one or two stages of heating or to modulate the
chilled water valve, depending on the space temperature error from
the high or low setpoint. If the fan is on and the space temperature
is less than the low setpoint, the algorithm activates stages of heating. If the fan is on and the space temperature is higher than the
high setpoint, the algorithm modulates the chilled water valve.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to activate
only stages of heating when the fan is on and the space temperature
is less than the low setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
manual heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to modulate the chilled water valve when the fan is on and the space temperature is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm
closes the chilled water valve. No heating is done in this mode.
335
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Whenever Fan Status Point indicates that the supply fan is off, the
algorithm turns off heating stages and closes the chilled water valve.
Schedules
the occupied or unoccupied setpoints.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a rooftop with two stages of
heating and a cooling coil valve.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
336
Cooling Coil Valve

Stage 1 Heat
Stage 2 Heat
Fan Control Point
Space Temperature
Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Lockout Temp
Heating Lockout Temp
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Cooling Coil Valve

Stage 1 Heat
Stage 2 Heat
Fan Control Point
Space Temperature
Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
337
338
Offset High Value
Offset Low Value
Status
Force
Output
Setpoint Bias
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Status
Force
Output
Outside Air
Temperature
Status
Force
Output
Fan Status Point
Force
Status
70
NOT
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Output
Space Temperature
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State?
Figure 5-23
DOProp Thermo Elec
SELECT A
A
AND
Thermostat
Fan Status
Sensor Input
Sensor Input (OAT)
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Stage 1 (Cool)
Output (Cool)
Output (Heat)
Fan
Stage 2 (Heat)
Stage 1 (Heat)
Stage 2 (Cool)
Stage 1 Heat
Input
Cooling Coil Valve
Input
Fan Control Point
Input
Stage 2 Heat
Input
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Configuration
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

chilled water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Stage 1 Heat
You must configure this decision to configure the DO point that is controlling
the first stage of electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Stage 2 Heat
Use this decision to configure the DO point that is controlling the second stage
of electric heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Control Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Space Temperature
temperature input of the space being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
339
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Fan Status Point

status of the fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the temperature input for
the outside air.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value
340

SETPT00
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Setpoint Bias
If you are adjusting the configured space temperature setpoints with the T-56
Space Temperature Sensor, use this decision to specify the input point that
provides the bias input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = up to 8 characters, LID = 1 to 96 (6400),

1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00
Offset Low Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use
this decision to specify minimum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.55 to 0.00^C)
(0.00)
Offset High Value

this decision to specify maximum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.00 to 5.55^C)
(0.00)
Thermostat
Thermostat provides two discrete stages of electric heat and modulates a chilled
water valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the fan in two different
operating modesautomatic and manual.
Fan Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the fan will be started automatically or manually. If you select auto, the fan will start automatically
when the space temperature is outside the high and low setpoints. If
you select manual, the fan will only start when the Time Schedule is
occupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Auto/Manual

LID = 0(Auto) / 1(Manual)
Auto
341
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23
Fan Off Delay

Use this decision to configure how long the fan should remain on after the
heating stages have been turned off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 120 seconds
1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can activate stages of
heating or modulate the chilled water valve automatically or manually. If
you select auto, stages of heating will start or the chilled water valve will
be modulated automatically when the space temperature is outside the high
and low setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Auto
For Manual Mode

If Operating Mode is set to manual, use this decision to indicate whether
the controller will perform only heating or cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Heat/Cool

LID = 0(Heat) / 1(Cool)
Cool
Stage On Delay
Use this decision to configure how long the system should wait after one
stage of heating has begun before the next stage can be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30

Use this decision to indicate the outside air temperature below which
cooling will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
342
0.0 to 240.0F
60.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(16.0)
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxC
Function Type 23

Use this decision to indicate the outside air temperature above which
heating will be disabled.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
80.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(27.0)
Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the chilled water valve position for every
degree the space temperature is above the high setpoint. The value in this
decision is expressed in percent per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of heating stages for every degree
the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this decision
is expressed in stages per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify how many degrees the error must be reduced to
turn off an activated stage. This method prevents the short cycling of
heating stages.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10 to 10^F
0.2^F
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(0.1^C)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
343
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23
Maintenance
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

algorithm for cooling. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Valid Display
State 1 Heat
This decision displays the status of the point controlling the first stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Stage 2 Heat
This decision displays the status of the point controlling the second stage of
electric heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the
fan.
Valid Display
On/Off
Space Temperature
This decision displays the value of the space being monitored.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.0 to 118.3C)
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the fan, which determines whether this
algorithm is enabled. If the Fan Status Point is not configured, this algorithm
will not be enabled.
Valid Display
344
On/Off
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
mode will be Yes.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the
Setpoint Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by linear
conversion 50% - 0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset
High value. For example, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both
the Low and High Setpoints.
Valid Display
0.0 to 100.0%
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the low setpoint value, including any adjustments for
Occupancy and Setpoint Bias.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
High Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint value, including any adjustments for
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Thermostat
This function calculates the output heating and cooling values for this algorithm.
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to determine the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
345
DOProp Thermo Elec

PT2E_xxM
Function Type 23
Output Cool
This decision displays the cooling proportional term, if any, currently
being calculated by this algorithm.
Output cool = (controlling space temperature setpoint)* cooling prop. gain.
Valid Display
Output Heat
This decision displays the heating proportional term, if any, currently
being calculated by this algorithm.
Output heat = (controlling space temperature setpoint)* heating prop. gain.
Valid Display
Task Timer
Valid Display
346
0 to 300 seconds
DOProp Thermo 2 Pipe

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
DOProp Thermo
2 Pipe
Fan Control Modes
The DOProportional Thermostat 2 Pipe algorithm provides a

single modulated output to control the air terminals fan coil valve.
The algorithm uses the Control Point to determine if the system is
performing heating or cooling, then modulates the output accordingly. The algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two different operating modes. You can configure this algorithm to lock out
heating or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds a user
configurable limit.
automatic
manual
unoccupied times.
Modes

manual heating
manual cooling

modulate a heating output or a cooling output, depending on the
state of the control point. If in the heat mode and the space temperature is less than the low setpoint, the algorithm modulates a heating
output. If in the cool mode, the fan is on, and the space temperature
is higher than the high setpoint, the algorithm modulates a cooling
output.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to modulate the heating output when the fan is on and the space temperature
heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to modulate the cooling output when the fan is on and the space temperature
is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling. No heating is done in this mode.
347

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
algorithm does not modulate any outputs.
The Control Point decides if the Analog Output Point is heating or
cooling. When the control point is active, the system is cooling.
Schedules
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a two-pipe fan coil (with a
single output) that performs both heating and cooling.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
348
Analog Output Point

Fan Control Point
Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Control Pt Heat = 0 Cool = 1
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage on Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
Analog Output Point

Fan Control Point
Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Control Pt Heat = 0 Cool = 1
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
349
350
Offset High Value
Offset Low Value
Status
Force
Output
Setpoint Bias
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Low Setpoint
Status
Force
Output
Outside Air
Temperature
Status
Force Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Average
Low
High
70
NOT
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
TS Override
Status
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
Occupancy State?
Setpoint Schedule
Status
Force
Output
Control PT Heat=0 Cool=1
Figure 5-24
SELECT A
A
AND
>
Fan Status
Sensor Input
Sensor Input (OAT)
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
NOT
Stage 2 (Heat)
Stage 1 (Heat)
Stage 2 (Cool)
Stage 1 (Cool)
Fan
Output (Heat)
Select A
AND
Input
Fan Control
Point
Input
Analog Output
Point
Select A
OR
A
B
0
A
Output (Cool)
Thermostat
Occupancy State?
>
AND

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Output Point

fan coil valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Control Point

fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the sensor group or space temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Fan Status Point

status of the fan. The DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
351

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

the outside air temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Setpoint Bias
Allowable Entries
Default Value
352

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
Offset Low Value

this decision to specify the minimum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.55 to 0.00^C)
(0.00)
Offset High Value

this decision to specify the maximum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.00 to 5.55^C)
(0.00)
Control Pt Heat=0 Cool=1

You must configure this decision to specify the DI point that decides if the
Analog Output Point is performing heating or cooling. When the control point
is active, the Analog Output Point will be equal to the cooling output.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Thermostat
Thermostat provides control of the air terminals fan coil valve. Additionally,
this algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two different operating
modesautomatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Auto
353

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24
Fan Off Delay

This decision is not currently used.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 120 seconds
1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can modulate the fan
coil valve automatically or manually. If you select auto, the fan coil
valve will be modulated automatically when the space temperature is
outside the high and low setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Auto
For Manual Mode

Allowable Entries
Default Value

Cool
Stage On Delay
The algorithm does not use this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30

Allowable Entries
Default Value
354
0.0 to 240.0F
60.0
(-18.0 to 115.6C)
(16.0)

PT2P_xxC
Function Type 24

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
80.0
(-18.0 to 115.6C)
(27.0)
Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to determine the output cool valve for every degree the
space temperature is above the high setpoint. The value in this decision
is expressed in percent per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to determine the output heat valve for every degree the
space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this decision is
expressed in stages per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Hysteresis
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10 to 10^F
0.2^F
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(0.1^C)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
355

PT2P_xxM
Function Type 24
Maintenance
Decisions
Analog Output Point

Valid Display
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the air
terminal fan.
Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.00 to 118.30C)
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the on/off status of the air terminals fan.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by
this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the
Setpoint Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by converting
50% - 0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset High value.
For example, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both the Low and
High Setpoints.
Valid Display
356
0.0 to 100.0%

PT2P_xxM
Function Type 24
Low Setpoint
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
High Setpoint
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Control Pt Heat=0 Cool=1

This decision indicates whether the Analog Output Point is being driven by the
heating or cooling output.
Valid Display
0/1
Thermostat
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to determine
the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (space temperature controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Valid Display
Output Heat
This decision displays the heating proportional term, if any, currently being
calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint - space
temperature)*heat prop. gain.
Valid Display
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
357

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
DOProp Thermo
4 Pipe
Fan Control Modes
The DOProportional Thermostat 4 Pipe algorithm provides

modulated outputs to control a chilled water valve and hot water or
steam valve in a fan coil. This algorithm can also control the fan
coils fan in two different operating modes. You can configure this
algorithm to lock out heating or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds a user configurable limit.
automatic
manual
unoccupied times.
Modes

manual heating
manual cooling

modulate a heating output or a cooling output, depending on the
space temperature error from the high or low setpoint. If the fan is
on and the space temperature is less than the low setpoint, the
algorithm modulates a heating output. If the fan is on and the space
temperature is higher than the high setpoint, the algorithm modulates a cooling output.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to modulate the heating output when the fan is on and the space temperature
heating. No cooling is done in this mode.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to modulate the cooling output when the fan is on and the space temperature
is greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling. No heating is done in this mode.
algorithm does not modulate any outputs.
358

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Schedules
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a four-pipe fan coil with
outputs for both heating and cooling.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
Cooling Coil Value

Heating Coil Value
Fan Control Point
Space Temperature
Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
359

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
360
Cooling Coil Valve

Heating Coil Valve
Fan Control Point
Space Temperature
Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Setpoint Bias
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
Offset High Value
Offset Low Value
Status
Force
Output
Setpoint Bias
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Status
Force
Output
Outside Air
Temperature
Status
Force
Output
Fan Status Point
Force
Status
Output
Space Temperature
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State?
Figure 5-25
70
NOT
SELECT A
A
AND
Fan Status
Sensor Input
Sensor Input (OAT)
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Thermostat
Stage 1 (Cool)
Output (Heat)
Output (Cool)
Fan
Stage 2 (Heat)
Stage 1 (Heat)
Stage 2 (Cool)
Input
Heating Coil Valve
Input
Cooling Coil Valve
Input
Fan Control Point

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
361

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Configuration
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

fan coils chilled water valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Heating Coil Valve

fan coils hot water or steam valve.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_O00
Fan Control Point

fan coils fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Space Temperature
temperature input of the space being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
362

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Fan Status Point

status of the fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

the outside air.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
363

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Setpoint Bias
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00
Offset Low Value

Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.55 to 0.00^C)
(0.00)
Offset High Value

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.00 to 5.55^C)
(0.00)
Thermostat
Thermostat provides control to modulate a chilled water valve, hot water valve
or steam valve. Additionally, this algorithm can control the fan coils fan in
two different operating modesautomatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
364

Auto

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25
Fan Off Delay

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 120 seconds
1
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can modulate the
chilled water, hot water or steam valve automatically or manually. If you
select auto, the chilled water valve, hot water or steam valve will be
modulated automatically when the space temperature is outside the high
and low setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Auto
For Manual Mode

Allowable Entries
Default Value

Cool
Stage On Delay
The algorithm does not use this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
60.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(16.0)
365

PT4P_xxC
Function Type 25

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
80.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(27.0)
Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the chilled water valve position for every
decision is expressed in percent per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the hot water valve position for every degree
the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in this decision is expressed in stages per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 100.0
0.5
Hysteresis
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10 to 10^F
0.2^F
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(0.1^C)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
366
0 to 65535 seconds
0

PT4P_xxM
Function Type 25
Maintenance
Decisions
Cooling Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of AO point being controlled by this
algorithm for cooling. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Valid Display
Heating Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of AO point being controlled by this
algorithm for heating. The value is normally expressed as a percentage of full
capacity.
Valid Display
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the fan
coils fan.
Valid Display
On/Off
Space Temperature
This decision displays the temperature of the space being monitored.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the actual state of the fan coils fan, which determines
whether this algorithm is enabled. If the Fan Status Point is not configured,
this algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
On/Off

this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
367

PT4P_xxM
Function Type 25
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0-100) used in determining the Setpoint Bias value. The determination of the bias value is done by converting 50% 0% to 0 - Offset Low Value and 50% - 100% to 0 - Offset High value. For example, 90% would add 4/5 of the Offset High Value to both the Low and High
Setpoints.
Valid Display
0.0 to 100.0%
Low Setpoint
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
High Setpoint
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Thermostat
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to determine the desired heating or cooling output for this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (space temperature controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Valid Display
Output Heat
being calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint space temperature)*heat prop. gain.
Valid Display
Task Timer
Valid Display
368
0 to 300 seconds
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
DOPump
Control
The DOPump Control algorithm controls two pumps in either a

fixed or a rotating sequence. The first pump is known as the primary or the lead pump. The second pump is known as the secondary or the lag pump.
When using a fixed sequence, you can manually cause a rotation of
the pumps by changing the value in the Rotate Now configuration
decision.
For a rotating sequence, configure the algorithm to switch the
primary and secondary pumps according to the day of week, day of
month, or accumulated runtime.
The algorithm can activate the primary pump according to one of
three things:
a Time Schedule
a discrete input
the analog comparison of a temperature to a Setpoint Schedule
If you use a Time Schedule as a basis for activating the primary

pump, the algorithm will activate the pump when the Time Schedule
is in the occupied state. Otherwise, the pump remains deactivated.
If you use a discrete input as a basis for activating the primary
pump, the algorithm will activate the pump when the input is on.
Otherwise, the pump remains off.
If you use an analog comparison as a basis for activating the primary
pump, the algorithm activates the pump when the Control Point
sensor is outside the high and low setpoints. When the sensor is
within the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high
setpoint minus hysteresis, the algorithm deactivates the primary
pump.
Whenever the algorithm activates the primary pump, the pump
status is confirmed. The controller waits the configured time delay
and, if the status remains off, deactivates the primary pump and
activates the secondary pump. Whenever the algorithm activates the
369
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
secondary pump, the pump status is confirmed. The controller waits

the configured time delay and, if the status remains off, the algorithm deactivates the secondary pump. If the algorithm successfully
activates the primary pump, and the primary pump status later
indicates off, the algorithm activates the secondary pump. If the
algorithm cannot confirm the status of either pump, it disables both
pumps until you manually cause a rotation of the pumps.
Note:
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to automatically start a secondary pump

whenever the primary pump fails.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
370
You must configure a separate status point for each pump

in order for the algorithm to operate correctly.

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Status Point
Pump Control
Sequence Type
Rotate Now
Day of Week
Day of Month
Hours of Runtime
Pump Start Delay
Control Point
Analog
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
*
*
*

Occupied ?
Status Point
Pump Control
Lead Pump
Pump 1 Runtime
Pump 2 Runtime
Failed Flag
Lead Status
Control Point
Analog
Low Setpoint
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
High Setpoint
Reference Output
Task Timer
371
372
Low Sensor Input
Disable
Status
High Setpoint
High Sensor Input
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Output
Force
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Analog
SELECT A
A
SELECT A
A
Occupancy State?
Output
Control Point
Maintenance
Status
Output
Time Schedule
Status
Force
Output
Status Point
Figure 5-22
DOPump Control
Status
Force
Output
Discrete
Input
Point
Status
Force
Output
Discrete
Input
Point
OR
Pump 2
Status
Pump 1
Status
Input
Pump 2
Pump 1
Pump Control
Force
Status
Input
Force
Status
Discrete
Output
Point
Input
Discrete
Output
Point
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that controls the first
of two pumps.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that controls the
second of two pumps.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

off status for the first pump. This point provides the actual state of the pump.
Note:
You must configure a separate status point for each pump in order for
the algorithm to operate correctly.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

off status for the second pump. This point provides the actual state of the
pump.
Note:
You must configure a separate status point for each pump in order for
the algorithm to operate correctly.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
373
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm. If you want the Time Schedule to control pump activation, do not configure a Control Point or Status Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
If using an analog comparison as to a basis for activating a pump, use this
decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Status Point
Use this decision to configure a discrete point to control pump activation. If
this point is configured, a pump will start when this point is on. If this point is
not configured, it will have no effect on the pump activation.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Pump Control
Pump Control controls two pumps in either a fixed or a rotating sequence.
374
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Sequence Type
Use this decision to indicate whether the pumps have a fixed or rotating
sequence. A fixed sequence consists of a lead pump with a backup
pump. You can configure the lead pump as the first or second pump. A
rotating sequence consists of pumps that alternate at a configured time
between being a lead pump and a lag pump.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 = Rotating
1 = Fixed Rotation with Pump1 as Lead
2 = Fixed Rotation with Pump2 as Lead
0
Rotate Now
Use this decision to indicate whether to switch the designation of the
lead and lag pumps.
Note:
When both pumps fail, use this decision to restart the algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = No/Yes, LID = 0(No) / 1(Yes)

No
Day of Week
This decision only applies to pumps with a rotating sequence. If you
want to rotate the pumps on a weekly basis, use this decision to indicate
the day of the week on which you want to rotate the pumps.
0 = Disabled
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
Allowable Entries
Default Value
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Sunday
0 to 7
0
375
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Day of Month
want to rotate the pumps on a monthly basis, use this decision to indicate the day of the month on which you want to rotate the pumps.
0 = Disabled
1 = first day of month, etc.,
31 = 31st day of month
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 31
0
Hours of Runtime
want to rotate the pumps according to accumulated runtime, use this
decision to indicate the amount of time the pump must run before the
rotation occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 8760 hours
0
Pump Start Delay

Use this decision to indicate the amount of time to wait after starting a
pump before verifying that the pump is running.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 900 seconds
15
Control Point
Use this decision to specify the temperature type input that will be compared to
the Setpoint Schedule to determine if a pump should be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
376

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxC
Function Type 22
Analog
Analog provides a discrete output by comparing a sensor value to the configured setpoint values. If the Control Point sensor is outside the setpoints, the
pump is commanded on and remains on until the Control Point sensor is within
the region bordered by low setpoint plus hysteresis and high setpoint minus
hysteresis. This prevents short cycling of the controlled device.
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify the amount that is added to the low setpoint
and subtracted from the high setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0.0

Use this decision to specify how often the input conditions are checked
to determine if the output state must change.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 900 seconds
600
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
377
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the commanded state of the first pump.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the commanded state of the second pump.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the status of the first pump.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the status of the second pump.
Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Status Point
This decision displays the actual state of the discrete control point. On will
cause a pump to start.
Valid Display
378
On/Off
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22
Pump Control
Pump Control function displays the current pump sequence, runtime, and
status for this algorithm.
Lead Pump
This decision displays the value of the current lead pump.
Valid Display
1 (First Discrete Output Point)

2 (Second Discrete Output Point)
Pump 1 Runtime
This decision displays how long, in hours, that Pump1 has been on.
Valid Display
0 to 65535 hours
Pump 2 Runtime
This decision displays how long, in hours, that Pump2 has been on.
Valid Display
0 to 65535 hours
Failed Flag
This decision indicates when both pumps fail. If neither the lead nor
lag pump can be started, the Failed Flag will be activated.
Valid Display
Normal (Status OK)

Alarm (Pump Failure)
Lead Status
This decision displays the current state of the lead pump
Valid Display
On/Off
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the analog Control Point. This
value is used by the Analog function to compare against the configured
Setpoint Schedule. The result determines whether a pump should be started.
Valid Display
379
DOPump Control
PUMP_xxM
Function Type 22
Analog
Analog function is one of three methods that can be used to control pump
operation. The setpoint values are compared with the Control Point to determine whether a pump should be started.
Low Setpoint
This decision displays the configured Low Setpoint value based on the
occupancy state. If the Control Point falls below this value, the pump
will be commanded on.
Valid Display
Lo Setpoint + Hyst
This decision displays the Low Setpoint value, adjusted upward by the
configured hysteresis.
Valid Display
Hi Setpoint - Hyst
This decision displays the High Setpoint value, adjusted downward by
the configured hysteresis value.
Valid Display
High Setpoint
This decision displays the configured High Setpoint value, based on the
current occupancy state. If the Control Point exceeds this value, the
pump will be commanded on.
Valid Display
Reference Output
This decision displays the output value from the analog function. If the
Control Point is outside the setpoint limits, the reference output will be
True and a pump will be commanded on. If the Control Point is within
the setpoints and hysteresis, the reference output will be False.
Valid Display
True/False
Task Timer
Valid Display
380
0 to 300 seconds
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
DOStaged
Thermostat
Fan Control Modes
The DOStaged Thermostat algorithm mimics the operation of a

programmable wall thermostat in two waysby providing three
types of operating modes for the thermostat and two types of control
modes for the fan. You can configure this algorithm to lock out heat
or cooling if the outside air temperature exceeds a user configured
limit.
automatic
manual
unoccupied times.
Modes

manual heating
manual cooling

activate either one or two stages of heating, or one or two stages of
cooling , depending on the space temperature error from the high or
low setpoint. If the fan is on and the space temperature is less than
the low setpoint, the algorithm activates stages of heating. If the fan
is on and the space temperature is higher than the high setpoint, the
algorithm activates stages of cooling.
In the manual heating mode, you configure the algorithm to activate
only stages of heating when the fan is on and the space temperature
manual heating.
In the manual cooling mode, you configure the algorithm to activate
stages of cooling when the fan is on and the space temperature is
greater than the high setpoint. Otherwise, the algorithm disables
cooling.
algorithm turns off all stages.
381
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Schedules
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a rooftop with two stages of
heating and two stages of cooling.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
382
Stage 1 Cool
Stage 2 Cool
Stage 1 Heat
Stage 2 Heat
Fan Control Point
Fan Status Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Setpoint Bias
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Thermostat
Fan Mode
Fan Off Delay
Operating Mode
For Manual Mode
Stage On Delay
Cooling Prop Gain
Heating Prop Gain
Hysteresis
Power on Delay
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
List of Maintenance
Decisions

this algorithm. They provide useful information regarding the status
and configuration of this algorithm.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Stage 1 Cool
Stage 2 Cool
Stage 1 Heat
Stage 2 Heat
Fan Control Point
Fan Status Point
Occupied ?
Setpoint Bias
Thermostat
Output Cool
Output Heat
Task Timer
383
384
Offset High Value
Offset Low Value
Status
Force
Output
Setpoint Bias
Maintenance
Occupancy
Time Schedule
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Status
Force
Output
Status
Force
Output
Fan Status Point
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy State?
Figure 5-26
DOStaged Thermostat
70
NOT
SELECT A
A
AND
Fan Status
Sensor Input
Sensor Input (OAT)
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Output (Cool)
Output (Heat)
Fan
Stage 2 (Heat)
Stage 1 (Heat)
Stage 2 (Cool)
Stage 1 (Cool)
Thermostat
Stage 1 Cool
Input
Fan Control Point
Input
Stage 2 Heat
Input
Stage 1 Heat
Input
Stage 2 Cool
Input
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Configuration
Decisions
Stage 1 Cool
first stage of cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Stage 2 Cool
second stage of cooling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Stage 1 Heat
first stage of heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Stage 2 Heat
second stage of heating.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Control Point

air terminals fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
385
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26

You must configure this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor that
Group, refer to the How to Configure Algorithms chapter of this manual.
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Fan Status Point

status of the air handlers fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

If you want to lock out cooling or heating based on the Outside Air Temperature,
you must configure this decision. This decision specifies the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to the algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value
386

OCCPC00
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Setpoint Bias
If you are providing a setpoint bias with the T-56 Space Temperature Sensor
with Setpoint Adjustment, use this decision to specify the input point that
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00
Offset Low Value

this decision to specify the change at minimum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.55 to 0.00^C)
(0.00)
Offset High Value

this decision to specify the change at maximum setpoint bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.00 to 5.55^C)
(0.00)
387
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Thermostat
Thermostat provides thermostat heating and cooling control. Additionally, this
algorithm can control the air terminal fan in two different operating modes
automatic and manual.
Fan Mode
occupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Manual
Fan Off Delay

Use this decision to configure how long the fan should remain on after
the heating stages have been turned off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 120 seconds
30
Operating Mode
Use this decision to indicate whether the algorithm can activate stages
of heating or stages of cooling automatically or manually. If you select
auto, stages of heating or cooling will start automatically when the
space temperature is outside the high and low setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
388

Manual
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
For Manual Mode

Allowable Entries
Default Value

Cool
Stage On Delay
Use this decision to configure how long the system should wait after one
stage of heating or cooling has been activated before the next stage can
be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 300 seconds
30

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
60.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(16.0)

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 240.0F
80.0
(-18.0 to 116.0C)
(27.0)
Cooling Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of cooling stages for every
decision is expressed in stages per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-99.9 to 100.0
0.5
389
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxC
Function Type 26
Heating Prop Gain

Use this decision to indicate the number of heating stages for every
degree the space temperature is below the low setpoint. The value in
this decision is expressed in stages per degrees error.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-99.9 to 100.0
0.5
Hysteresis
Use this decision to specify how many degrees the error must be reduced to turn off an activated stage. This method prevents the short
cycling of heating and cooling stages.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.0 to 10.0^F
0.2
(-5.5 to 5.5^C)
(0.1)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
390
0 to 65535 seconds
0
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxM
Function Type 26
Maintenance
Decisions
Stage 1 Cool
This decision displays the actual state of the first stage of cooling.
Valid Display
On/Off
Stage 2 Cool
This decision displays the actual state of the second stage of cooling.
Valid Display
On/Off
Stage 1 Heat
This decision displays the actual state of the first stage of heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Stage 2 Heat
This decision displays the actual state of the second stage of heating.
Valid Display
On/Off
Fan Control Point

This decision displays the commanded state of the DO point controlling the fan.
Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Fan Status Point

This decision displays the on/off status of the fan.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the value of the outside air temperature being used by this
algorithm to decide if heating or cooling should be locked out.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
391
DOStaged Thermostat
STHRMxxM
Function Type 26
Occupied ?
mode will be Occupied.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage value (0.0 - 100.0%) used to determine the
setpoint bias value. Bias is determined by converting 50-0% to 0-offset low and
50-100% to 0-offset high value.
Valid Display
0.0 to 100.0%
Thermostat
This decision displays the setpoint that is currently being used to determine the heating or cooling required for this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
Output Cool
being calculated by this algorithm. Output cool = (sensor group/SPT
sensor - controlling setpoint)*cool prop. gain.
Valid Display
Valid range based upon display unts.
Output Heat
being calculated by this algorithm. Output heat = (controlling setpoint sensor group/SPT sensor)*heat prop. gain.
Valid Display
Valid range based upon display unts.
Task Timer
Valid Display
392
0 to 300 seconds
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
DOStaging
The DOStaging algorithm controls up to six stages of DX (Direct

Expansion) cooling in a constant volume air handler or up to six stages of
fans in a cooling tower.
The DOStaging algorithm uses a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative)
Master Loop to control the output stages. The PID Master Loop calculates the percentage of output stages required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The PID Master Loop calculates the required
percentage of output stages by obtaining the highest sensor input from the
sensor group and comparing it to the space temperature setpoint.
The Comfort Controller activates each stage sequentially, allowing the
configured delay time between each stage. Once a stage is activated, it
will not be de-activated until the calculated number of stages has decreased by a full stage. This hysteresis prevents short cycling of stages.
When all available stages are activated, the algorithm clamps the PID
Master Loop integrator at its current value. If the fan status is off or if the
Sensor Group/SPT Sensor status is invalid, the PID Master Loop sets the
output to the Disabled Output Value.
The Time Schedule indicates the current occupancy state for this algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller is using
the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure a Time
schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints for
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control up to six DX cooling stages in a

constant volume air handler.
Decisions

configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions are optional.
* Discrete Output Point
* Fan Status Point
* Sensor Group/SPT Sensor
Time Schedule
* Setpoint Schedule
Humidity Setpoint
393
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
PID_Master_Loop
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Derivative Gain
Starting Value
Staging Control
On Time Delay
Off Time Delay
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
394

Fan Status Point
Space Setpoint
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
Proportional Term
Integral Term
Derivative Term
Integrator Flags
Staging Control
Number of Stages
Requested Stages
Delta Stages
Delay Timer
Task Timer
Occ Low Setpoint
Occ High Setpoint
Humidity Setpoint
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
High Setpoint
Space Setpoint
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Force
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Figure 5-27
DOStaging
SELECT A
OR
SELECT A
A
>
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
NOT
Output
Clamp Integrator
Reset Integrator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Setpoint
Sensor Input
Enable
PID_Master_Loop
Stage 6
stage 5
Stage 4
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Input
Fan Status
Staging Control
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Force Status
Input
Force Status
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
Input
Discrete
Output Point
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
395
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the DO point that is
controlling the first stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
second stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the third
stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the
fourth stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the fifth
stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
396

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

Use this decision to specify the DO point that is controlling the sixth stage.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Fan Status Point

status of the air handlers fan. A DI point provides the actual state of the fan.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

that is providing the space temperature inputs.
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control a
common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that contain a common
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
397
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
Setpoint Schedule
For more information on Setpoint Schedule, refer to the How to Configure
Note:
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

the DI point that indicates when dehumidification is needed. The algorithm can
use a Humidity Switch or Humidity Sensor to determine if dehumidification is
needed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Humidity Setpoint
the humidity Setpoint Schedule that provides the high humidity setpoint for this
algorithm. For more information on Setpoint Schedules, refer to the How to
Configure Schedules chapter in this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
398

SETPT00
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

greater than the occupied high setpoint from the Humidity Setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
PID_Master_Loop
calculates the percentage of output stages required to achieve the desired space
temperature setpoint. The percent of output stages will be activated in whole
stage increments.
Proportional Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-99.9 to 100.0
-5.0
Integral Gain
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-99.9 to 100.0
-0.4
Derivative Gain
Use this decision to enter the value that is multiplied by the current error
minus the previous error to produce the derivative term. The value in
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-99.9 to 100.0
0.0
399
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27

Use this decision to specify the percentage of available outputs that will
be activated if the sensor group status is invalid.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0

Use this decision to specify the minimum percentage of available output
stages that will always be activated. For example, if five stages are
available, each stage is worth 20%. Therefore, if this decision is set to
20%, one output will always be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0

Use this decision to specify the maximum percentage of available
output stages that can be activated. For example, if five stages are
available, each stage is worth 20%. Therefore, if this decision is set to
80%, one output can not be activated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
100.0
Starting Value
Use this decision to specify the percentage of the available output stages
that are activated when the algorithm is started.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0

Allowable Entries
Default Value
400
10 to 300 seconds
30
DOStaging
STAG_xxC
Function Type 27
Staging Control
Staging Control starts and stops up to six discrete stages based on the output
(percentage) from the PID Master Loop. You can configure the minimum time
between starting and stopping stages.
Use this decision to specify the number of discrete stages the algorithm
will control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 6
6
On Time Delay
starting of stages. This value should represent the time from starting
the stage to its effect on the controlled temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
1
Off Time Delay

stopping of stages. This value should represent the time from stopping
the stage to its effect on the controlled temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 30 minutes
5
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
401
DOStaging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling first
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling second
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling third
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling fourth
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling fifth
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision displays the actual state of the discrete point controlling sixth
stage.
Valid Display
On/Off
Fan Status Point

whether this algorithm is enabled. If this point is not configured, then this
algorithm will not be enabled.
Valid Display
402
On/Off
DOStaging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27

Valid Display
-40.0F to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
default mode will be occupied and Yes will be displayed.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Space Setpoint
This decision displays the high setpoint of the configured Setpoint Schedule.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F (-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the state of the high humidity switch sensor being
monitored. If the decision was not configured, this value will default to Off.
Valid Display
On/Off

This decision specifies the current high humidity setpoint for this algorithm. If
the decision was not configured, this value will default to 99% RH, which will
prevent any dehumidification.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH

Humidity Setpoint.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% RH
403
DOStaging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27
PID_Master_Loop
Reference Output
number of Discrete Output Points required.
Valid Display
Proportional Term
the PID equation.
Valid Display
Integral Term
PID equation.
Integral Term)
Valid Display
Derivative Term
PID equation.
Valid Display
Note:
Integrator Flags
Left Digit
0 = PID Active
Center Digit
Right Digit
Valid Display
000 to 111
404
DOStaging
STAG_xxM
Function Type 27
Staging Control
This function starts and stops up to six stages of cooling or cooling tower fans.
The control is based on the reference output from the PID Master Loop.
Number of Stages
Valid Display
0 to 6
Requested Stages
on. The number is determined by Reference Output value in relation to
the configured Total Number of Stages.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delta Stages
This decision displays the difference determined by the Number of Stages
subtracted from the Requested Stages.
Valid Display
0 to 6
Delay Timer
This decision displays the number of minutes remaining in the configured
On Time Delay or Off Time Delay decision (whichever is applicable) that
must elapse before another stage can be added or taken away. When
Delta Stages equals 0, the value in this decision will equal 0.
Valid Display
0 to 30 minutes

This decision displays whether or not the PID Clamp is currently in effect
for the staging control function.
Valid Display
On/Off
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
405
DOTime Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
DOTime Clock
The DOTime Clock algorithm controls a discrete output point

based on the occupancy state of a Time Schedule with an optional
capability to duty cycle the output. The Time Schedule indicates the
current occupancy state for this algorithm. When Duty Cycle is
disabled, the algorithm turns on the output whenever the Time
Schedule is occupied and turns it off whenever the Time Schedule is
unoccupied. When Duty Cycle is enabled, the algorithm turns the
output on and off according to the configured off times. The off
times can be different during occupied and unoccupied periods.
You can configure two cycle off periods for the output during each
hour.
If a Redline alert exists during occupied periods, the algorithm
increases the cycle off time by the configured Redline Bias Time.
algorithm. If you do not configure a Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state.
Typical Application
406
You can use this algorithm to control a fan motor to start during
occupied hours or stop during unoccupied hours.
DOTime Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
Decisions

optional.
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Time Schedule
Loadshed
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Enable
First Minute of Hour
Second Minute of Hour
Occupied Off Duration
Unoccupied Off Duration
Minimum Off Time
Redline Bias Time
Power on Delay
*

Occupied ?
Redline ?
Duty Cycle
Reference Output
Off Time Duration
Region of Hour
Task Timer
407
408
Output
Loadshed Equipment
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Figure 5-28
DOTime Clock
Loadshed
Sensor Input (BIAS)
Occupancy State?
Duty Cycle
Output
Input
DOTime Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
DOTime Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to define the DO point that this algorithm is
controlling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00
Time Schedule
the occupancy state for this algorithm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in
this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules chapter
in this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Loadshed
Use this decision to specify the Loadshed equipment part that will indicate the
Redline Alert data from the Loadshed POC.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
LDSHD00
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle gives you the capability to cycle off the output once or twice every
hour. You can configure the starting time and the duration of the cycle off time.
Duty Cycle Enable
Use this decision to enable the output to duty cycle. If you do not enable
duty cycling, the output will be on during occupied periods and off during
unoccupied periods.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Disable/Enable

LID = 0(Disable) / 1(Enable)
Disable
409
DOTime Clock
TCxxC
Function Type 28

If you want to cycle off the output at least once an hour, use this decision to enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will first cycle
off the device. If you enter 0 or 60, the device will cycle off on the
hour.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

If you want to cycle off the output twice an hour, use this decision to
enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will cycle off the device
for the second time in the same hour.
Caution:
If you do not want to cycle off the output for a second time,
enter the same value here that you entered in First Minute of
Hour, or enter a zero
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off
the output during each occupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will
not cycle off the output.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off
the output during each unoccupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm
will not cycle off the output. If you enter 60, the algorithm will cycle
off the output continuously during unoccupied hours.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
410
0 to 60 minutes
60
DOTime Clock
TCxxM
Function Type 28
Minimum Off Time

To prevent short cycling, use this decision to enter the minimum
amount of time the output must be off during any cycle off period.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 3
0 to 60 minutes
Redline Bias Time

Use this decision to enter the additional amount of desired cycle off
time by which the Occupied Off Duration is increased when the Time
Schedule is occupied and a Redline alert exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
411
DOTime Clock
TCxxM
Function Type 28
Redline ?
This decision displays whether a Redline Alert is in effect. This data is derived
from the Loadshed POC on the CCN.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle determines how frequently and for how long to cycle off the
Discrete Output Point controlled by this algorithm.
Reference Output
This decision displays the value to which this algorithm is driving the
output.
Valid Display
On/Off
Off Time Duration

This decision displays the time remaining before this point will be
cycled back on.
Valid Display
0 to 60 minutes
Region of Hour
This decision displays the algorithms current region of cycling.
Valid Display
Algorithm not enabled
Before cycling has begun
First duty cycling period
After first duty cycle period
Second duty cycling period
After second duty cycle period
Redline Bias time in effect
Extended cycle off time
Task Timer
Valid Display
412
0 to 300 seconds
DOTime Clock w Check

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
DOTime Clock
w Check
The DOTime Clock with Check algorithm controls a discrete output

point based on the occupancy state of a Time Schedule, with an optional capability to duty cycle the output. When Duty Cycle is disabled, the algorithm turns on the output whenever the Time Schedule
is occupied or when Night Time Free Cooling is enabled. The algorithm turns off the output whenever the Time Schedule is unoccupied.
When Duty Cycle is enabled, the algorithm turns the output on and off
according to the configured off times. However, when both duty cycle
and Night Time Free Cooling are enabled, the algorithm does not cycle
off the output.
The off times can be different during occupied and unoccupied periods. The off times are reduced based on the space temperature error
from the high and low setpoints. You can configure two cycle off
periods for the output during each hour.
If a Time schedule is not configured for this algorithm, the algorithm
uses the occupied off time. If a Redline alert exists during occupied
periods, the algorithm increases the cycle off time by the configured
Redline Bias Time.
algorithm. The occupancy state defines when the Comfort Controller
is using the occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure
a Time schedule for this algorithm, the algorithm will assume to be in
the occupied state.
The Setpoint Schedule allows you to configure high and low setpoints
for both occupied and unoccupied states.
NTFC Algorithm enables the output to allow the system to cool the
space during night time unoccupied hours if the outside air is suitable.
Typical Application
You can use this algorithm to control a fan motor to start during
occupied hours or stop during unoccupied hours. If the outside air is
suitable for cooling during night time hours you could start the fan to
cool the building. You can also use this algorithm to duty cycle the
fan during occupied hours based on the space temperature.
413

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
414

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Loadshed
NTFC Algorithm
Hysteresis
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle Enable
Minimum Off Time
Redline Bias Time
Power on Delay

Occupied ?
Redline ?
NTFC Active ?
Space Temperature
Reference Output
Error
Cycle Flag
Duty Cycle
Reference Output
Off Time Duration
Region of Hour
Task Timer
Maintenance
Output
Time Schedule
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Loadshed Equipment
Output
Loadshed?
Disable
Occupancy State
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Low Sensor
Low
Average
High Sensor
Output
Space Temperature
High
Status
TS Override
Figure 5-29
Loadshed
Output
Sensor Input (BIAS)
Occupancy State?
Duty Cycle
NTFC
Enthalpy Test
NTFC Setpoint
NTFC ALGORITHM
OR
Force Status
Input
Discrete
Output Point

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
415

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to define the DO point that this algorithm is
controlling.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
DISCRO00

Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
chapter in this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
416

SETPT00

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Loadshed
Use this decision to specify the Loadshed equipment part that will indicate the
Redline Alert data from the Loadshed POC.
Allowable Entries

LID = 0 to 16
Default Value
LDSHD00
NTFC Algorithm
If Night Time Free Cooling with Enthalpy Check will be performed, use this
decision to specify the algorithm that will determine if the outside air is suitable
for cooling the space. If the outside air is suitable for cooling during unoccupied hours, the output will be activated. It will not cycle off during this time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

NTFC_00
Hysteresis
This value is added to the high setpoint or subtracted from the low setpoint and
compared with the space temperature to determine what action should be taken.
Allowable Entries
0.0 to 10.0^F
(0.0 to 5.6^C)
Default Value
2.0
(1.1)
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle gives you the capability to cycle off the output twice every hour.
You configure the starting time and the duration of the cycle off time.
Duty Cycle Enable
Use this decision to enable the output to duty cycle. If you do not
enable duty cycling, the output will be on during occupied periods and
off during unoccupied periods.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

0
(Disable)
417

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29

If you want to cycle off the output at least once an hour, use this decision
to enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will first cycle off the
device. If you enter 0 or 60, the device will cycle off on the hour.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

If you want to cycle off the output twice an hour, use this decision to
enter the minute of the hour that the algorithm will cycle off the device
for the second time in the same hour.
Caution:
If you do not want to cycle off the output for a second time,
enter the same value here that you entered in First Minute of
Hour, or enter 0.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off the
output during each occupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will not
cycle off the output.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0

Use this decision to enter the amount of time the algorithm cycles off the
output during each unoccupied hour. If you enter 0, the algorithm will
not cycle off the output. If you enter 60, the algorithm will cycle off the
output continuously during unoccupied hours.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
418
0 to 60 minutes
60

TCWSCxxC
Function Type 29
Minimum Off Time

To prevent short cycling, use this decision to enter the minimum
amount of time the output must be off during any cycle off period.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
3
Redline Bias Time

Use this decision to enter the additional amount of desired cycle off
time by which the occupied off duration is increased when the Time
Schedule is occupied and a Redline alert exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
0
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
419

TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29
Maintenance
Decisions

algorithm.
Valid Display
On/Off

Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Redline ?
This decision displays whether a Redline Alert is in effect. This data is derived from the Loadshed POC on the CCN.
Valid Display
Yes/No
NTFC Active ?
This decision indicates whether Night Time Free Cooling is in effect.
Valid Display
420
Yes/No

TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29
Space Temperature
Space Temperature calculates the percentage by which to reduce the cycle off
time based on the space temperature error from the high and low setpoints. If the
space temperature is above the high setpoint plus hysteresis or below the low
setpoint minus hysteresis, the cycle off time is set equal to the configured Minimum Off Time. Cycle off time remains at the computed value until the space
temperature falls within the high setpoint plus half the hysteresis and the low
setpoint minus half the hysteresis. When the space temperature is within this
region, the cycle off time is increased linearly from the configured Minimum Off
Time to the configured Occupied or Unoccupied Off Duration, until the space
temperature is within the high and low setpoints.
Reference Output
This decision displays the reference value that adjusts the duty cycle off
time. This value is expressed as a percentage that is converted and subtracted from (Minimum Off Time + Off Time Duration). The result is the
actual cycle off time for this output device.
Valid Display
0.0 to 100.0%
Error
This decision displays the calculated setpoint error.
Error is the greater of:
High Sensor - (High Setpoint + 1/2 Hysteresis) or
(Low Setpoint - 1/2 Hysteresis) - Low Sensor
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
Cycle Flag
This decision displays whether the Cycle Flag has been activated.
Cycle Flag is True if:
High Sensor > (High Setpoint + Hysteresis) or
Low Sensor < (Low Setpoint - Hysteresis)
Cycle Flag is False otherwise.
Valid Display
True/False
421

TCWSCxxM
Function Type 29
Duty Cycle
Duty Cycle determines how frequently and for how long to cycle of the Discrete Output Point controlled by this algorithm.
Reference Output
This decision displays the value to which this algorithm is driving the
output.
Valid Display
On/Off
Off Time Duration

This decision displays the time remaining before this point will be
cycled back on.
Valid Display
0 to 60 minutes
Region of Hour
This decision displays the algorithms current region of cycling.
Valid Display
Algorithm not enabled
Before cycling has begun
First duty cycling period
After first duty cycle period
Second duty cycling period
After second duty cycle period
Redline Bias time in effect
Extended cycle off time
Task Timer
Valid Display
422
0 to 300 seconds
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
AOSS Schedule
Many algorithms require AOSS Schedule (a global algorithm) to

dictate both their occupied or unoccupied status and their setpoints.
AOSS (Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop) gives you the capability to
expand setpoints and pre-condition the space.
Algorithms serving a common air handler or building space will
usually be under the control of the same Time Schedule and Setpoint Schedule. AOSS provides both of these schedules and serves
two basic purposes:
Configuring an
Algorithm to Use AOSS
1.
Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled

space prior to it becoming occupied. This algorithm allows
the space temperature to gradually approach and then achieve
the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
2.
Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occupied space to drift to the expanded occupied setpoints during
the last portion of the occupied time.
To configure an algorithm to use Adaptive Optimal Start, you must

enter AOSS_xx/algorithm name (where xx is the occurrence of the
AOSS algorithm) in the algorithms Time Schedule configuration
decision.
To configure an algorithm to use Adaptive Optimal Stop, you must
enter AOSS_xx/algorithm name (where xx is the occurance of the
AOSS algorithm) in the algorithms Setpoint Schedule configuration
decision.
Calculating Expanded
Occupied Setpoints
The value entered in Adaptive Optimal Stops Setpoint Bias determines the expanded occupied setpoints. If the value entered is 2F
and the occupied setpoints are 68F and 78F, the expanded occupied setpoints would be 66F and 80F.
The value entered in Maximum Stop Time determines the maximum
amount of time that expanded occupied setpoints can be in effect
prior to the space becoming unoccupied. For example, if the occupied time is 0800 through 1700, and the Maximum Stop Time is 15
minutes, the expanded occupied setpoints could not come into effect
until 1645.
423
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
If Adaptive Optimal Stop is not desired (i.e., no relaxation of the

setpoints is desired), then Adaptive Optimal Stops Setpoint Bias
and Maximum Stop Time should be set to 0.
Calculating Start and
Stop Time Offsets
AOSS calculates start and stop time offsets for each period in the
Time Schedule. The factors that affect offset calculations are:
present space temperature

occupied and unoccupied setpoints
how well the building is insulated
outside air temperature
the K Factor that accounts for the previous days performance
The K Factor represents the time difference between when a setpoint

was achieved and when it was supposed to be achieved. The routine
learns from each days performance and, in turn, fine-tunes the K
Factor on a daily basis. The K Factor is affected by the following
factors:
actual time the setpoint was achieved

configured occupied and unoccupied times
response time gain
previous K Factor
previous start or stop time offset
AOSS has to accumulate data for a full 24-hour day (0000 to 2400)
before it will function. For example, if the Time Schedule is configured on Monday at 0800, the controller will not compute the Adaptive Optimal Start until 0000 on Wednesday. Thereafter, each day
at 0000 the controller will calculate the 24 Hour Unocc Factor for
the first period of any Time Schedule that is configured for Adaptive
Optimal Start/Stop.
Start and Stop Modes
424
Throughout the day, AOSS is in either Start mode or Stop mode.

During Start mode, AOSS computes the start bias every minute,
based on current conditions. Once the time of day passes the biased
start time, AOSS checks the temperature of the controlled space
every minute. As soon as the controlled space temperature comes to
within 1 degree of the occupied setpoint, the algorithm computes the
K Factor for the next day and goes into Stop mode.
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
During Stop mode, AOSS computes the stop bias every minute,
based on current conditions. Once the time of day passes the biased
stop time (next unoccupied time minus stop bias), AOSS checks the
temperature of the controlled space every minute. As soon as the
controlled space temperature comes to within 1 degree of the expanded occupied setpoint, the algorithm computes the K Factor for
the next day and goes into Start mode.
ART MO
ST0000 / 2400 hrs DE
Figure 5-30
AOSS Start and Stop
Modes
SEE
NOTE
S CHEDU
L
ME
I
T
CCUP
UN
SEE
NOTE
IE
TRACKS
EVERY
MINUTE
TRACKS
EVERY 15
MINUTES
1800
hrs
0600
hrs
UNOCCUPIED
TIME
CUPIED
BIASED
START
TIME
ST
A
B I A RT
S
P
S TO S
BIA
OC
BIASED
STOP
TIME
1200 hrs
SEE
NOTE
STOP
C
TRACKS
EVERY 15
MINUTES
MODE
OCCUPIED
TIME
SEE
NOTE
TRACKS
EVERY
MINUTE
A D A P T I V E O P T I M A L S TA R T / S TO P A L G O R I T H M ( AO S S )
Provides efficient transition between occupied and unoccupied setpoints
NOTE
Typical Application
SEE PAGES 78 AND 79 FOR A FLOWCHART REPRESENTING THE AOSS ROUNTINE
You can use this algorithm to pre-condition the space prior to

occupancy and relaxing the setpoint at the end of occupancy.
425
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Decisions

optional.
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
426

Outside Air Temp
Time Schedule
Setpoint Reference
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
Adaptive Optimal Start
AO Start Enable
Building Insulation
Unoccupied 24hr Factor
Adaptive Optimal Stop
AO Stop Enable
Maximum Stop Time
Setpoint Bias
T56 Slider Bias
Power on Delay

Outside Air Temp
Occupied ?
AOSS Time Schedule
Mode
Biased Occupied
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Next Unoccupied Time
Last Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Time
Status
Override is set
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
AOSS Setpoint Schedule

Occupied Lo Setpoint
Occupied Hi Setpoint
Unoccupied Lo Setpoint
Unoccupied Hi Setpoint
Start Bias
Start Cool K Factor
Start Heat K Factor
Biased Start Day
Biased Start Time
Biased Occupied
Cool Flag
Stop Bias
Stop Cool K Factor
Stop Heat K Factor
Biased Low Setpoint
Biased High Setpoint
Biased Stop
Cool Flag
Biased Stop Day
Biased Stop Time
T56 Slider Bias
Task Timer
427
428
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Status
Next UnOcc Time
Last UnOcc Time
Next Occ Time
Output
AOSS Time
Schedule
Occupancy State?
Bias High Offset
Offset High Value
Bias Input
Bias Low Offset
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Offset Low Value
Force
Status
Output
T56 Slider Bias
Figure 5-31
AOSS
OR
Status
Force
Output
Outdoor Air Temp.
Biased Occupancy
Occupancy
AVG Sensor Input
Next UnOcc T i me
Next Occ T i me
Biased Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Disable
Disable
High Sensor
Low Sensor
Next Occ Time
Occ High Setpoint
Occ Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
OAT
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Configuration
Decisions

Use this decision to specify the Sensor Group or single sensor that is providing
the space temperature inputs.
Note:
Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Outside Air Temp

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to the algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Schedule
in this decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
section in this manual.
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Reference
You must configure this decision to specify the Setpoint Schedule that is providing the space temperature setpoints for this algorithm. Adaptive Optimal
Start and Adaptive Optimal Stop are based on the configured setpoint values.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
429
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301
Offset Low Value

Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.5 to 0.0^C)
(0.0)
Offset High Value

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.0 to 5.5^C)
(0.0)

Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled space prior to it
becoming occupied. It allows the space temperature to gradually approach and
then achieve the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
AO Start Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Start will be performed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Enable / Disable

Disable
Building Insulation
Use this decision to indicate how well the building is insulated. Although
you can enter any number between 1 and 100 in this decision, you should
enter a value that corresponds to the characteristics of the building.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
430
1 to 100
30
AOSS
AOSS_xxC
Function Type 301

Use this decision to enter the value used by Adaptive Optimal Start to
compensate for the interior mass of the building. The value entered here
represents minutes per degree of error from the desired temperature.
When the building has been unoccupied for 24 or more hours, Adaptive
Optimal Start uses this value in calculating when to begin correcting to
occupied setpoints. The greater the buildings mass, the larger the value
that should be entered in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 99
15

Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occupied space to drift to
the expanded occupied setpoints during the last portion of the occupied time.
AO Stop Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Stop will be performed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Disable
Maximum Stop Time

Use this decision to specify the maximum number of minutes that the
expanded occupied setpoints can be used prior to the controlled space
becoming unoccupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 120 minutes
60
Setpoint Bias
Use this decision to enter the number of degrees that are applied to expand the occupied setpoints during Adaptive Optimal Stop.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 20.0^F
2.0
(0.0 to 11.1^C)
(1.1)
431
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
T56 Slider Bias

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Maintenance Sensor Group/SPT Sensor

Decisions
This decision displays the space temperature value of the single AI sensor or
the average of the sensor group, depending on which is selected.

Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the
Valid Display
432
Yes/No
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
AOSS Time Schedule

AOSS Time Schedule displays the Time Schedule information as configured
and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode from Adaptive
Optimal Start.
Valid Display
0 = Unoccupied
1 = Occupied
Biased Occupied
This decision identifies when a biased occupancy condition exists.
Valid Display
0 = Not in effect
1 = Biased Occupied in effect
Next Occupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next occupied
period will occur.
Valid Display
Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Next Occupied Time

This decision displays the time of day when the next occupied period
will occur.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next unoccupied period will occur.
Valid Display
433
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301

This decision displays the time of day when the next unoccupied period
will occur.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the last unoccupied
period occurred.
Valid Display

This decision displays the time of day when the last unoccupied period
occurred.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Status
This decision displays the current status of the Time Schedule
configured within AOSS.
Valid Display
0 = Time Schedule found

1 = Time Schedule not found
Override is set
This decision identifies when the Time Schedule has been overridden
from an unoccupied state to an occupied state.
Valid Display
434
0 = Override not in effect

1 = Override in effect
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
AOSS Setpoint Schedule

AOSS Setpoint Schedule displays the Setpoint Schedule information as configured and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
This decision displays the Occupied Lo Setpoint value, including any
adjustment for T-56 Slider Bias.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
This decision displays the Occupied Hi Setpoint value, including any
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
This decision displays the Unoccupied Lo Setpoint value, including any
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
This decision displays the Unoccupied Hi Setpoint value, including any
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
435
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301

Adaptive Optimal Start is used to bring comfort conditions to prescribed levels
by the beginning of the next occupied period.
Start Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive
Optimal Start routine.
Valid Display
0 to 255 minutes
Start Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Start Cool K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the
space temperature error to create the start time bias for cooling. This
value represents minutes of optimal start per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Start Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Start Heat K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the
space temperature error to create the start time bias for heating. This
value represents minutes of optimal start per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Biased Start Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next biased start time
will occur.
Valid Display
436
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Biased Start Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next biased start will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated start time
bias from the next configured occupied time.
For example, if a Time Schedule has a normal occupied time of 0800
and Adaptive Optimal Start has calculated a start time offset of 15
minutes, Biased Occupied will be noted at 0745.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Biased Occupied
This decision is used to indicate when the Time Schedule is currently in
an occupied state due to Adaptive Optimal Start.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Start routine to indicate
whether the equipment being controlled is currently in a heating or
cooling mode.
Valid Display
False = Heating mode

True = Cooling mode

Adaptive Optimal Stop is used to save energy by relaxing the setpoint restrictions toward the end of an occupied period.
Stop Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive Optimal Stop routine.
Valid Display
0 to 180 minutes
437
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Stop Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Cool K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times
the space temperature error to create the stop time bias for cooling.
This value represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Stop Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Heat K Factor
currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times
the space temperature error to create the stop time bias for heating. This
value represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Biased Low Setpoint

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Lo Setpoint that will be
used when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This
value will be used until unoccupied time is reached.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Hi Setpoint that will be
used when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This
value will be used until unoccupied time is reached.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Biased Stop
This decision is used to indicate when the algorithms are controlling to
the Biased Low and Biased High Setpoints during Adaptive Optimal
Stop.
Valid Display
438
Yes/No
AOSS
AOSS_xxM
Function Type 301
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Stop routine to indicate
cooling mode.
Valid Display

True = Cooling mode
Biased Stop Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next Biased Stop
will occur.
Valid Display
Biased Stop Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next Biased Stop will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated stop time
bias from the next configured unoccupied time.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
T56 Slider Bias

This decision displays the percentage adjustment value of the T56 Slider Bias.
If the percentage adjustment value is 0 to 50%, the Offset Low Value will be
used as a setpoint adjustment. If the percentage adjustment value exceeds
50%, the Offset High Value will be used as a setpoint adjustment.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00%
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
439
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
Network
Broadcast
This global algorithm sends data from the Source Point in the
Comfort Controller to all CCN system elements containing the point
name specified in the Point Name configuration decision. You can
configure the broadcast to occur on the hour, at a specific time of
day, or at a timed interval.
Typical Application
You can use a network broadcast to transmit the outside air temperature every five minutes to all CCN system elements containing the
specified point name.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
440
Source Point
Broadcast Point
Enable
Broadcast Address
Broadcast Bus
Point Name
Reschedule Type
Reschedule Time
Power on Delay
Source Point
Network Status
Task Timer
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
Configuration
Decisions
Source Point
You must configure this decision to indicate the name of the point in
the Comfort Controller that will provide the data to broadcast.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Broadcast Point
Broadcast Point determines the configuration data for the network
broadcast point(s) and also specifies the broadcast parameters.
Enable
You must configure this decision to give the Comfort Controller the capability to broadcast the value of Source Point
to all CCN system elements containing the point name
specified in the Point Name decision.
Allowable Entries

Default Value
No
Broadcast Address
You must configure this decision to indicate the element
number of the devices(s) receiving the data.
Note:
Address 241 represents a global broadcast element

number.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 251
241
441
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxC
Function Type 302
Broadcast Bus
Use the decision to indicate the bus number of the device(s) receiving
the data.
Note:
Address 241 represents a global broadcast bus.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 251
241
Point Name
You must configure this decision to indicate the actual point name that
will receive the broadcasted data.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
(blank)
Reschedule Type
Use this decision to indicate when the broadcast will occur.
0 (timed) = indicates that the broadcast will occur on a timed basis, as
determined by Reschedule Time
1 (hourly) = indicates that the broadcast will occur at the beginning of
every hour
2 (daily) = indicates that the broadcast will occur daily, based on
Reschedule Time of Day
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 2
0
Rescheduled Time
If you entered a 2 in Reschedule Type, use this decision to indicate the
hour and minute of each day that the broadcast will occur. If you
entered a 0 in Reschedule Type, use this decision to indicate exactly
how many hour(s) and minute(s) must elapse between broadcasts.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
442
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
00:05
Network Broadcast
BRCSTxxM
Function Type 302
Power On Delay
Use this decision to indicate the number of seconds that must elapse after a
power restart before this algorithm executes again.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 255 seconds
0
Source Point
This decision displays the current value to be broadcasted.
Valid Display
Network Status
This decision displays communication status of the network broadcast.
Valid Display
0 = Successful Broadcast
1 = No Broadcast acknowledge received
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
443
Linkage/AOSS Schedule
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Linkage/AOSS
Schedule
As part of an integrated systems approach, the Comfort Controller

supports linkage to Carrier electronically-controlled air terminals
creating a Digital Air Volume (DAV) system. Each Comfort Controller can support one DAV linkage controlled system. The Carrier DAV
system uses linkage to provide optimum comfort without sacrificing
energy efficiency. This is done by providing the air handler as configured in the Comfort Controller with the dynamic information necessary to condition the spaces without over or under conditioning.
Unlike traditional VAV systems, which have a fixed discharge temperature, the DAV system with linkage utilizes varying numbers of
zone temperatures to create weighted average temperatures (by nominal box size). Those weighted average temperatures are then used by
the air handler to provide optimum performance. Specifically, two
weighted average temperatures are calculated. The first is the Average Zone Temperature (AZT), which is a weighted average of all the
zones connected to a single air handler. This temperature value is the
equivalent of a return air temperature sensor. The second weighted
average temperature is the Average Occupied Zone Temperature
(AOZT). This value contributes to the dynamic flexibility of the DAV
system allowing the system to automatically adapt its operation to
changing zone schedules.
Additionally, as part of the linkage strategy, the Comfort Controller is
provided information such as occupancy status, average setpoints, and
earliest occupied time of any zone. The information is used by the
Comfort Controller algorithms to determine the mode of control, to
reset supply air, to increase indoor air quality, and to minimize energy
consumption. The information is also used by the Adaptive Optimal
Start and Stop routines.
The Comfort Controller sends information such as operating mode,
optimal start bias time, and supply air temperature to the Terminal
System Manager so it can properly control the zones temperatures.
In the event that linkage fails, the Linkage/AOSS Schedule algorithm
will use the configured Time Schedule to determine occupancy and use
the configured Setpoint Schedule to determine the occupied and
unoccupied setpoints. If a Time Schedule was not configured and
linkage fails, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. If a
Setpoint Schedule was not configured, the algorithm will use default
occupied setpoints.
444
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
For additional information on Linkage, refer to the Terminal System

Manager II Overview and Configuration Manual.
Configuring an
Algorithm to Use
Linkage
To configure an algorithm to use Linkage, you must enter LINK_xx/

algorithm name (where xx is the occurance of the Linkage algorithm) in one or more of the algorithms configuration decisions.
Refer to the topic below to determine which algorithms can use
Linkage and the configuration decisions in which you must enter
LINK_xx.
Applicable Algorithms
You can configure the algorithms in the following table to use

Linkage by entering LINK_xx in their specified decisions.
Table 5-4
Algorithms Capable of
Using Linkage
Configuration Decisions
Algorithms
Time
Schedule
AOCooling VAV
AOHeating VAV
AOMixed Air Damper VAV
DODX Cooling VAV
DOElectric Heat VAV
DOTime Clock
Decisions
x
x
x
x
x
x
Setpoint
Schedule
Sensor
Group
/SPT
Sensor
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

optional.
*
Setpoint Bias
Setpoint Schedule
AO Start Enable
Building Insulation
Offset Low Value
Offset High Value
445
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
*
*
446

Time Schedule
Outside Air Temp
NTFC Algorithm
Heating Algorithm
Supply Air Temp
Fan Status
AO Stop Enable
Maximum Stop Time
Setpoint Bias
Power on Delay
Evacuation
Pressurization
Setpoint Bias
Start Bias
Start Cool K Factor
Start Heat K Factor
Biased Start Day
Biased Start Time
Biased Occupied
Cool Flag
Occupied ?
Outside Air Temp
Linkage Time Schedule
Mode
Biased Occupied
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Day
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
*
*
*
*
Status
Override is set
Linkage Setpoint Schedule
Linkage Space Temp
Supply Air Temp
Fan Status
Air Side Linkage
Linkage Status
Supervisory Element
Supervisory Bus
Supervisory Block No.
Avg Occ Heat Setpoint
Avg Occ Cool Setpoint
Avg Unocc Heat Setpoint
Avg Unocc Cool Setpoint
Avg Zone Temperature
Avg Occ Zone Temperature
Stop Bias
Stop Cool K Factor
Stop Heat K Factor
Biased Low Setpoint
Biased Stop
Cool Flag
Biased Stop Day
Biased Stop Time
Task Timer
Evacuation
Pressurization
447
448
NTFC Active?
NTFC ALGORITHM
Average
Low
High
Status
TS Override
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Status
Last UnOcc Time
Next UnOcc Time
Next Occ Time
Output
Time Schedule
Bias High Offset
Offset High Value
Occupancy State?
Bias Low Offset
Bias Input
Supply Air Temp
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
Start Bias
NTFC Active?
AVG Sensor
Low Sensor
High Sensor
SG Status
Last UnOcc Time
Next UnOcc Time
Next Occ Time
Occupancy
Occ High Setpoint
Occ Low Setpoint
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Low Setpoint
Fan Status
Occupancy
AVG Sensor
Next Occ Time
Start Bias
AVG Sensor Input
Next Occ Time
Next Unocc Time
Biased Low Setpoint
Occupancy?
Low Setpoint
High Setpoint
Disable
Disable
High Setpoint
Linkage Status
Low Setpoint
High Sensor
Low Sensor
Occ High Setpoint
Occ Low Setpoint
Next Unocc Time
Next Occ Time
Previous Occ Time
Occupancy?
Biased Occupancy
Occupancy

OAT
High Setpoint
Status
Force
Output
Outdoor Air Temp.
Low Setpoint
High Sensor
Low Sensor
Occ High Setpoint
Occ Low Setpoint
Next Unocc Time
Next Occ Time
Previous Occ Time
Air Side Linkage

Morning Warm Up?
High Setpoint
Setpoint Schedule
Status
Force Status
Output
Supply Air
Temperature
Morning Warm Up?
Offset Low Value
Force
Status
Output
Setpoint Bias
Force Status
Status
Output
Fan Status Point
Heating Algorithm
Figure 5-32
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Configuration
Decisions
Setpoint Bias
Space Temperature Sensor, use this decision to specify the input point that provides the bias input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
VOLT_I00
Setpoint Schedule
type) that provides the occupied and unoccupied low setpoints for this algorithm
as a backup in the event that linkage fails.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00

Adaptive Optimal Start heats up or cools down the controlled space prior to it
becoming occupied. It allows the space temperature to gradually approach and
then achieve the occupied setpoint at the time of occupancy.
AO Start Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Start will be performed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Disable
Building Insulation
Use this decision to indicate how well the building is insulated. Although
you can enter any number between 1 and 100 in this decision, you should
enter a value that corresponds to the characteristics of the building.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 100
30
449
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303

Use this decision to enter the value used by Adaptive Optimal Start to
compensate for the interior mass of the building. The value entered
here represents minutes per additional degree of error from the desired
temperature after a 24-hour unoccupied period. When the building has
been unoccupied for 24 or more hours, Adaptive Optimal Start uses this
value in calculating when to begin correcting to occupied setpoints.
The greater the buildings mass, the larger the value that should be
entered in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 99
15
Offset Low Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use this
decision to specify the range of adjustment for the lower half of the Slider Bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-10.00 to 0.00^F
0.00
(-5.50 to 0.00^C)
(0.00)
Offset High Value

If you are adjusting the configured setpoints with the setpoint bias, use this
decision to specify the range of adjustment for the upper half of the Slider Bias.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.00 to 10.00^F
0.00
(0.00 to 5.50^C)
(0.00)

You must configure this decision to specify the backup sensor group or space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs in the event
Linkage fails.
Use the same sensor group/SPT sensor or space temperature sensor for
all algorithms that control a common air handler.
Note:
Allowable Entries
Default Value
450
Bldg. Supvr. = SNSGRxx

SNSGR00
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Time Schedule
state for this algorithm in the event that linkage fails. This Time Schedule will
only be used when linkage fails. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this
decision, the algorithm will assume to be in the occupied state. For more
information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to Configure Schedules
Note:
Use the same Time Schedule for all algorithms that contain a common air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Outside Air Temp

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to the algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
NTFC Algorithm
Use this decision to identify the NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm name that
linkage uses to determine if the air handler unit is in the Night Time Free
Cooling (NTFC) operating mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

NTFC_00
Heating Algorithm
Use this decision to identify the AOHeating VAV algorithm name that
Linkage uses to determine if the air handler is in the morning warm-up or
occupied heating mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = HCVAVxx

HCVAV00
451
LINK_xxC
Function Type 303
Supply Air Temp

Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)

Default Value
TEMP_I00
Fan Status
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

Adaptive Optimal Stop allows the temperature of the occupied space to drift to
the expanded occupied setpoints during the last portion of the occupied time.
AO Stop Enable
Use this decision to specify if Adaptive Optimal Stop will be performed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Disable
Maximum Stop Time

Use this decision to specify the maximum number of minutes that the
expanded occupied setpoints can be used prior to the controlled space
becoming unoccupied.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
452
0 to 120 minutes
60
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Setpoint Bias
Use this decision to enter the number of degrees that are applied to
expand the occupied setpoints during Adaptive Optimal Stop.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0.0 to 20.0^F
2.0
(0.0 to 11.1^C)
(1.1)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Evacuation
Use this decision to specify the discrete point that indicates when the air handler is in evacuation mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Pressurization
Use this decision to specify the discrete point that indicates when the air handler is in pressurization mode.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Setpoint Bias
This decision displays the percentage adjustment value of the T56 Slider Bias.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00%
453
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303

Adaptive Optimal Start is used to bring comfort conditions to prescribed levels
by the beginning of the next occupied period.
Start Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive Optimal Start routine.
Valid Display 0 to 255 minutes
Start Cool K Factor

This decision displays the time difference, in minutes per degree of
error, between the time the cooling setpoint was achieved and when it
should have been achieved.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Start Heat K Factor

This decision displays the time difference, in minutes per degree of
error, between the time the heating setpoint was achieved and when it
should have been achieved.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Biased Start Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next biased start
time will occur.
Valid Display
Biased Start Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next biased start will
occur. This value is determined by subtracting the calculated start time
bias from the next configured occupied time.
Valid Display
454
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Biased Occupied
This decision is used to indicate when the Time Schedule is currently in
an occupied state due to Adaptive Optimal Start/Stop.
For example, if a Time Schedule has a normal occupied time of 0800
and Adaptive Optimal Start has calculated a start time offset of 15
minutes, Biased Occupied will be noted at 0745.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Start routine to indicate
cooling mode.
Valid Display

True = Cooling mode

Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
data in the backup Time Schedule that will be used in the event that linkage
fails. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the default mode will be
occupied.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Outside Air Temp

this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
455
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Linkage Time Schedule

Linkage Time Schedule displays the Time Schedule information as configured
and used by the Adaptive Optimal Start and Stop routines.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode from Adaptive
Optimal Start.
Valid Display 0 = Unoccupied
1 = Occupied
Biased Occupied
This decision identifies when a biased occupancy condition exists.
Valid Display 0 = Not in effect
1 = Biased Occupied in effect
Next Occupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next occupied
period will occur.
Valid Display
Next Occupied Time

This decision displays the time of day when the next occupied period
will occur.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the next unoccupied period will occur.
Valid Display
456
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303

This decision displays the time of day when the next unoccupied period
will occur.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision displays the day of the week on which the last unoccupied
period occurred.
Valid Display

This decision displays the time of day when the last unoccupied period
occurred.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Status
This decision displays the current status of the AOSS Time Schedule.
Valid Display
0 = Time Schedule found

1 = Time Schedule not found
Override is set
This decision identifies when the Time Schedule has been overridden
from an unoccupied state to an occupied state.
Valid Display
0 = Override not in effect

1 = Override in effect
Linkage Setpoint Schedule

Linkage Setpt Schedule displays information about the Setpoint Schedule
provided by Linkage for use by the air handler.
457
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
This decision displays the occupied low setpoint value used by any
algorithm configured to use this Linkage Setpoint Schedule. The
setpoint value is dependent on the state of the communications between
the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the communications
is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). If communications has been disrupted, the value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and, if configured, the AOSS Schedule algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
This decision displays the occupied high setpoint value used by any
setpoint value is dependent on the state of the communications between
the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the communications
is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). If communications has been disrupted, the value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and, if configured, the AOSS Schedule algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
This decision displays the unoccupied low setpoint value used by any
setpoint value is not dependent on the state of the communications
between the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment Part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). The value will be determined from the
locally defined Setpoint Schedule and if configured, the AOSS Schedule
algorithm.
Valid Display
458
-40.0 to 240.0F
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
This decision displays the unoccupied high setpoint value used by any
algorithm configured to use this Linkage Setpoint Schedule. The setpoint
value is not dependent on the state of the communications between the
Linkage Supervisory and Equipment Part from the Terminal System Manager (TSM). The value will be determined from the locally defined Setpoint
Schedule and if configured, the AOSS Schedule algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240.0F
Linkage Space Temp

This decision displays the space temperature value used by any algorithm configured to use this Linkage Space Temp. The value is dependent on the state of the
communications between the Linkage Supervisory and Equipment parts. If the
communications is normal, this value will be the value transmitted by the Linkage
Supervisory part, specifically AZT or AOZT from the Terminal System Manager
(TSM). If communications have been disrupted, the value will be determined from
the locally defined Sensor Group.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Supply Air Temp

This decision displays the value of the air handlers supply air temperature.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Fan Status
This decision displays the status of the air handlers supply fan.
Valid Display
On / Off
Air Side Linkage

Air Side Linkage provides current linkage information such as linkage status,
supervisory bus, element, and block numbers, average setpoints, and average zone
temperatures.
459
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Linkage Status
This decision displays the current status of the Linkage routine.
Valid Display
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
normal communication
communication failure
Linkage routine not configured
change in communication status between
Supervisory and Equipment parts of Linkage
Supervisory Element
This decision displays the element number of the system element TSM
(Terminal System Manager) containing the Linkage Supervisory Part
that supplies data to this air source
Valid Display
0 = no Linkage Supervisory Part

1 to 239
Supervisory Bus
This decision displays the bus number of the system element TSM
(Terminal System Manager) containing the Linkage Supervisory Part
that supplies data to this air source
Valid Display
0 to 239
Supervisory Block No.

This decision indicates the Linkage air source number of this unit for
diagnostic purposes only.
Valid Display
460
3 to 6 (where 3 = Air Source 1,

and 6 = Air Source 4)
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Avg Occ Heat Setpoint

This decision displays the average occupied heating setpoint of all the
temperature zones served by this air source. This value is computed by
the Linkage Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM)
and communicated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use this value as the setpoint for its algorithms instead of its own
configured setpoint when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not
active, the unit will use its configured setpoint.
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7C)
Avg Occ Cool Setpoint

This decision displays the average occupied cooling setpoint of all the
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7C)
Avg Unocc Heat Setpoint

This decision displays the average unoccupied heating setpoint of all the
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7F)
461
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Avg Unocc Cool Setpoint

This decision displays the average unoccupied cooling setpoint of all the
temperature zones served by this air source. This value is computed by the
Linkage Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM) and
communicated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use
this value as the setpoint for its algorithms instead of its own configured
setpoint when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit will
use its configured setpoint.
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7F)
Avg Zone Temperature

This decision displays the current average zone temperature of all temperature zones served by this air source. This value is computed by the Linkage
Supervisory Part in the Terminal System Manager (TSM) and communicated to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use this value as
the space temperature for its algorithms instead of its own configured space
temperature when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit
will use its configured setpoint.
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7F)
Avg Occ Zone Temp

This decision displays the current average zone temperature of all temperature zones served by this air source that are currently in the occupied mode.
This value is computed by the Linkage Supervisory Part and communicated
to the air source. The Comfort Controller algorithms use this value as the
space temperature for its algorithms instead of its own configured space
temperature when Linkage is active. When Linkage is not active, the unit
will use its local sensor.
Valid Display
0.0 to 99.9F
(18.0 to 37.7F)

Adaptive Optimal Stop is used to save energy by relaxing the setpoint restrictions toward the end of an occupied period.
462
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Stop Bias
This decision displays the adjustment value, in minutes, for the Adaptive
Optimal Stop routine.
Valid Display
0 to 180 minutes
Stop Cool K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Cool K Factor currently being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the space
temperature error to create the stop time bias for cooling. This value
represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Stop Heat K Factor

This decision displays the value of the optimal Stop Heat K Factor currently
being used by the algorithm. This value is multiplied times the space
temperature error to create the stop time bias for heating. This value represents minutes of optimal stop per degree of error.
Valid Display
1 to 99
Biased Low Setpoint

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Lo Setpoint that will be used
when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This value will
be used until unoccupied time is reached.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the adjusted Occupied Hi Setpoint that will be used
when Biased Stop Day and Biased Stop Time are reached. This value will
be used until unoccupied time is reached.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
463
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Biased Stop
This decision is used to indicate when the algorithms are
controlling to the Biased Low and Biased High Setpoints
during Adaptive Optimal Stop.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Cool Flag
This decision is used by the Adaptive Optimal Stop to
indicate whether the equipment being controlled is currently
in a heating or cooling mode.
Valid Display

True = Cooling mode
Biased Stop Day

This decision displays the day of the week that the next
Biased Stop will occur.
Valid Display
Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Sat, Sun
Biased Stop Time

This decision displays the time of day that the next Biased
Stop will occur. This value is determined by subtracting the
calculated stop time bias from the next configured unoccupied time.
Valid Display
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the
next execution of this algorithm. This algorithm executes every 30
seconds.
Valid Display
464
0 to 300 seconds
LINK_xxM
Function Type 303
Evacuation
This decision displays the status of the air handlers evacuation
mode indicator. When True the mode returned to the Terminal
System Manager is evacuation.
Valid Display
True = In evacuation mode

False = Not in evacuation mode
Pressurization
This decision displays the status of the air handlers pressurization
mode indicator. When True the mode returned to the Terminal
System Manager is pressurization.
Valid Display
True = In pressurization mode

False = Not in pressurization mode
465
NTFC w Enthalpy Check

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
NTFC w Enthalpy
Check
The NTFC (Night Time Free Cooling) w Enthalpy Check algorithm

enables an air handler to cool the space during unoccupied hours
(from 12 a.m. to 7 a.m.) if the outside air is suitable. This global
algorithm starts the fans on cool summer nights to pre-cool the
structure by using only outside air, thus minimizing the need for
mechanical cooling during occupied hours. Once the space is
sufficiently cooled, the algorithm stops the fans.
Note:
NTFC can only be performed by air handlers equipped

with mixed air dampers, at least one space temperature
sensor, and an outside air temperature sensor.
NTFC w Enthalpy Check must be used in conjunction with either

the AOMixed Air Damper CV or AOMixed Air Damper VAV
algorithm, and DOTimeclock with Check algorithm to ensure that
both the fan is activated and the dampers are open.
Typical Application
To delay the need for mechanical cooling, you can use this algorithm to cool a building prior to it being occupied.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
466

Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Night Time Free Cooling
NTFC Enable
NTFC Start Time AM
Minimum OAT
Maximum OAT
NTFC Delta Temperature
Return Air Humidity
Enthalpy Switch
Enthalpy Comparison
Default OA Enthalpy
Default RA Enthalpy
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Power on Delay

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Occupied ?
Return Air Humidity
Enthalpy Switch
Enthalpy Comparison
Reference Output
OA Enthalpy
RA Enthalpy
OAT > RAT ?
NTFC Active ?
Outside Enthalpy Good ?
NTFC Setpoint
Task Timer
467
468
Force Status
Status
Output
Return Air Humidity
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Status
Output
Force Status
Output
Status
Figure 5-33
Low Setpoint
Occupied
Low Setpoint
Occupied
High Setpoint
High Setpoint
RARH
RARH Status
OAT > RAT
Enthalpy Check
Dewpoint Status
Dewpoint
OARH Status
OARH
RAT
RAT Status
OAT
OAT Status
Enthalpy Comparison
Bias High Offset
Bias Low Offset
Occupancy State?
Bias Input
Setpoint Schedule
Occupancy
Next Occ Time
Time Schedule
Low
Average
High
TS Override
Status
Sensor Group/
SPT Sensor
Output
Setpoint
OR
Input
Input
Output
Status
Force
Output
Status
Force
NTFC Setpoint
Output
Status
Force
NTFC Active
Input
Output
Force Status
Enthalpy Switch
Enthalpy Check
Sensor Input (OAT)
Occ High Setpoint
Occ Low Setpoint
Occupancy State?
Next Occ Time
Disable
Sensor Input (Space)
Night Time Free Cool

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304

Note:
Use the same Sensor Group/SPT Sensor for all algorithms that control
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SNSGR00
Time Schedule
Note:
air handler.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
469

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
Night Time Free Cool

Night Time Free Cool calculates the space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours to see if the outside air is suitable for cooling the space.
NTFC Enable
Use this decision to enable Night Time Free Cooling. The space temperature setpoint is still calculated, whether or not this decision is
enabled. The space temperature setpoint is a linear interpolation between the low and high space temperature setpoints from the Minimum
OAT to the Maximum OAT.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Dsable/Enable

Dsable
NTFC Start Time AM

Use this decision to specify the hour after midnight at which NTFC
goes into effect.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 0 to 7
3
Minimum OAT
Use this decision to specify the lowest Outside Air Temperature that
can be used to condition the space. The calculated setpoint is equal to
the occupied low setpoint when the Outside Air Temperature is less
than or equal to the value entered in this decision, and is reset up to the
occupied high setpoint as the Outside Air Temperature approaches
Maximum OAT.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
470
-40.0 to 200.0F
40.0 (4.4)
(-40.0 to 93.3C)

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304
Maximum OAT
Use this decision to specify the highest Outside Air Temperature that
can be used to condition the space. The calculated setpoint is equal to
the occupied high setpoint when the Outside Air Temperature is greater
than or equal to the value entered in this decision. The calculated
setpoint is reset to the occupied low setpoint as the Outside Air Temperature approaches Minimum OAT.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 72.0
-40.0 to 200.0F
(22.2)
(-40.0 to 93.3C)
NTFC Delta Temperature

Use this decision to specify how many degrees lower than the space
temperature the Outside Air Temperature must be before outside air is
used to cool the space.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 3.0
0.0 to 10.0^F (0.0 to 5.5^C)

(1.7)

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the outside air temperature to the algorithm. If you want to reset the space temperature based on the
Outside Air Temperature, you must configure this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the return air temperature to this algorithm.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
471

NTFC_xxC
Function Type 304

If you enable Night Time Free Cooling, use this decision to specify the AI point
that provides the outside air humidity to the algorithm. The algorithm can use a
humidity or dewpoint sensor. If neither are available, the system will use the
configured default outside air enthalpy.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
Return Air Humidity

Use this decision to specify the AI point that provides the relative humidity of
the return air to this algorithm. If the AI point is not configured, the algorithm
uses the value in the Default RA Enthalpy decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00

If you enable Night Time Free Cooling, use this decision to specify the AI point
that provides the outside air dewpoint to the algorithm. The algorithm can use a
humidity or dewpoint sensor. If neither are available, the algorithm will use the
configured outside air enthalpy.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CMAMPI00
Enthalpy Switch
Instead of computing the outside air enthalpy and return air enthalpy, use this
decision to specify a discrete point that indicates if the outside air is suitable for
cooling. If enthalpy switch is used, Default OA Enthalpy should be configured
as 50, and Default RA Enthalpy as 10.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
472

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00

NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison calculates the heat content of outside air and return air.
It determines if the outside air is suitable for conditioning the space.
Default OA Enthalpy
If Outside Air Humidity and Outside Air Dewpoint sensors are not
available, use this decision to specify the outside air enthalpy that
Return Air Humidity must exceed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 10
0 to 51 BTU/lb
Default RA Enthalpy
If a Return Air Humidity sensor is not available, use this decision to
specify the return air enthalpy that the Outside Air cannot exceed.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 50
0 to 51 BTU/lb
Maximum OA Enthalpy
Use this decision to specify the maximum outside air enthalpy that the
algorithm can use to condition the space.
Allowable Entries
Default Value 30
0 to 51 BTU/lb
Power on Delay
wait to activate this system function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
473

NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
Maintenance
Decisions

Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Occupied ?
data in the Time Schedule. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, the
default mode will be occupied.
Valid Display
Yes/No

this algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the return air temperature being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)

This decision displays the value of the outside air humidity being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00% Rh
Return Air Humidity

This decision displays the value of the return air humidity being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
474
0.00 to 100.00% Rh

NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304

This decision displays the value of the outside air dewpoint being used by this
algorithm.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Enthalpy Switch
This decision indicates if the outside air is currently suitable for cooling. When
this value is On, the outside air is suitable for cooling.
Valid Display On/Off
Enthalpy Comparison
Enthalpy Comparison determines if outside air can be used for conditioning the
space, based on enthalpy content of the outside and return air.
Reference Output
This decision displays the result of the enthalpy comparison, which
indicates if using outside air is suitable at this time.
Valid Display
True/False
OA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the outside air
expressed in units of BTU/lb.
Valid Display
-999.99 to 9999.99 Btu/lb
RA Enthalpy
This decision displays the value of the enthalpy of the return air expressed in units of BTU/lb.
Valid Display
-999.99 to 9999.99 Btu/lb
OAT > RAT ?

This decision indicates if the outside air temperature is greater than the
return air temperature. If the outside air temperature is greater, the
OAT will be deemed not suitable for cooling.
Valid Display Yes/No
475

NTFC_xxM
Function Type 304
NTFC Active?
This decision indicates whether the NTFC w Enthalpy Check
algorithm is active.

This decision indicates whether or not outside air can be used, if
desired. If this value is No, the damper is maintained at its configured minimum position.
NTFC Setpoint
This decision displays the configured high setpoint value from the
NTFC w Enthalpy Check algorithm.
Valid Display -40.0 to 245.0F
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this
algorithm executes again. This algorithm will execute every 30
seconds.
Valid Display
476
0 to 300 seconds
Occupancy
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Occupancy
This global algorithm provides the occupied and unoccupied periods

for the devices controlled by the Comfort Controller.
For more information on Occupancy, refer to Time Schedules in the
How to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
477
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
Sensor Group
This global algorithm provides the input of up to six sensors to

many AO and DO algorithms. Examples of sensor input are temperature, humidity, and milliamps. For a complete list of possible
sensor input, refer to Appendix C.
The Sensor Group can provide an algorithm with the highest sensor
input, lowest sensor input, or the computed average sensor value.
For example, the AOCooling CV algorithm controls to the highest space temperature reading in the Sensor Group/SPT Sensor.
The sensors in a Sensor Group must be of the same type. If an
application requires input from more than one type of sensor, you
must configure separate Sensor Groups.
Sensors with invalid status will be ignored. If the status of all input
sensors are invalid, the Sensor Group status will be invalid.
A Sensor Group contains three software variables used to provide
the high, low, and average sensor values from a group of sensors.
You can enter these software variable names in any analog sensor
input configuration decision. To obtain the highest sensor reading,
you must enter SGHIxx (where xx is the function number of the
Sensor Group) in the desired algorithms analog sensor input decision, i.e., Sensor Group/SPT Sensor. To obtain the lowest sensor
reading, you must enter SGLOxx . To obtain the average sensor
reading, you must enter SGAVGxx. This needs to be done only if
the default value from the sensor group used by the selected algorithm is not desired.
Typical Application
478
A Sensor Group can be used to provide the low sensor value from a
group of up to six sensors.
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
Decisions

optional.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
1st Sensor
2nd Sensor
3rd Sensor
4th Sensor
5th Sensor
6th Sensor
Power on Delay

*
*
*
*
*
*
1st Sensor
2nd Sensor
3rd Sensor
4th Sensor
5th Sensor
6th Sensor
Sensor Group Low
Sensor Group High
Sensor Group Average
Task Timer
479
480
Force
Status
Output
6th Sensor
Force
Status
Output
5th Sensor
Force
Status
Output
4th Sensor
Force
Status
Output
3rd Sensor
Force
Status
Output
2nd Sensor
Force
Status
Output
1st Sensor
Figure 5-34
Sensor Group
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (6)
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (5)
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (4)
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (3)
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (2)
Sensor Status
Sensor Input (1)
Input Select
TS Override
Status
High
Low
Average
Input
Status
Sensor Group
High
Input
Status
Sensor Group
Low
Input
Status
Sensor Group
Average
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxM
Function Type 306
1st Sensor
Use this decision to specify the first analog point that is providing sensor input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
2nd Sensor
Use this decision to specify the second analog point that is providing sensor input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
3rd Sensor
Use this decision to specify the third analog point that is providing sensor input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
4th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the fourth analog point that is providing sensor input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
5th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the fifth analog point that is providing sensor input.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
481
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxM
Function Type 306
6th Sensor
Use this decision to specify the sixth analog point that is providing sensor
input.
Allowable Entries
LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
Default Value
TEMP_I00
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
1st Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the first sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
Valid Display
2nd Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the second sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
Valid Display
3rd Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the third sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
Valid Display
4th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the fourth sensor in the configured
Sensor Group.
Valid Display
482
Sensor Group
SNSGRxxC
Function Type 306
5th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the fifth sensor in the
configured Sensor Group.
Valid Display
6th Sensor
This decision displays the current value of the sixth sensor in the
configured Sensor Group.
Valid Display
Sensor Group Low

This decision displays the lowest value of the configured sensors,
excluding any sensors with an invalid status.
Valid Display
Sensor Group High

This decision displays the highest value of the configured sensors,
Valid Display
Sensor Group Average

This decision displays the average value of the configured sensors,
Valid Display
Task Timer
seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
483
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxC
Function Type 307
WSM Air Source
This global algorithm gives the Comfort Controller the capability to

gather data such as occupancy status and cooling and heating coil
valve positions, and then process the data for reception by Carriers
Water System Manager (WSM).
For more information on WSM, refer to the Water System Manager
Configuration Manual.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
484
Time Schedule
Cooling Coil Valve
Heating Coil Valve
Power on Delay
Occupied ?
Cooling Coil Valve
Heating Coil Valve
WSM Load Equipment
Cooling Link Active ?
Heating Link Active ?
Cool_Source Number
Heat_Source Number
Occupancy Status
Chilled Water Temp
Cool Source Status
Hot Water Temp
Heat Source Status
Task Timer
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Configuration
Decisions
Time Schedule
the occupancy state for the air handler. For more information on Time Schedules, refer to How to Configure Schedules section in this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Cooling Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point name that is controlling the air handlers chilled water valve. The unit type of the valve must be 0
- 100%.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CCV
Heating Coil Valve

You must configure this decision to specify the AO point name that is controlling the air handlers hot water valve. The unit type of the valve must be 0 100%.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
HCV
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this system function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
485
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Maintenance
Decisions
Occupied ?
This decision displays the current occupancy status based upon the configured
Valid Display
Yes/No
Cooling Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of the AO point being used to control
the cooling coil. This value is expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00%
Heating Coil Valve

This decision displays the output value of the AO point being used to control
the heating coil. This value is expressed as a percentage of full capacity.
Valid Display
0.00 to 100.00%
WSM Load Equipment

WSM Load Equipment provides current WSM linkage information.
Cooling Link Active ?
This decision displays the status of communications between this load and
the cool source with which it is linked.
Yes indicates that the WSM Supervisory Part is successfully transmitting
information to this load from a linked, configured cool source.
No indicates one of the following conditions: the WSMs algorithms are
disabled, the WSM Supervisory Part Load Configuration Table is
misconfigured, or communications have failed (Comfort Controller data
has not been received from the WSM within the past five minutes). When
No is displayed here, the remaining decisions in this table continue to
display the last valid data.
Valid Display
486
Yes/No
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Heating Link Active ?

This decision displays the status of communications between this load and
the heat source with which it is linked.
Yes indicates that the WSM Supervisory Part is successfully transmitting
information to this load from a linked, configured heat source.
No indicates one of the following conditions: the WSMs algorithms are
disabled, the WSM Supervisory Part Load Configuration Table is
misconfigured, or communications have failed (heat source data has not
been received from the WSM within the past five minutes). When No is
displayed here, the remaining decisions in this table continue to display the
last valid data.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Cool_Source Number
This decision displays the element number of the cool source that is linked
to this load by a WSM. Cool source numbers are determined by the number of the associated Cool Source Configuration Table at the WSM.
0 indicates that a cool source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display
0 = no cool source configured

1 to 4 = cool source numbers
Heat_Source Number
This decision displays the element number of the heat source that is linked
to this load by a WSM. Heat source numbers are determined by the number of the associated Heat Source Configuration Table at the WSM.
0 indicates that a heat source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display
0 = no heat source configured

1 to 4 = heat source numbers
487
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Occupancy Status
This decision displays the current occupancy status of this load.
0 indicates that this loads Time Schedule is in the unoccupied mode.
1 indicates that this loads Time Schedule is in the occupied mode (or
biased occupied).
Valid Display
0 = unoccupied
1 = occupied (or biased occupied)
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the current leaving chilled water temperature. The
value 0.0F (-17.8C) indicates that a cool source is not configured for this
load at the WSM.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Cool Source Status

This decision displays the current status of the cool source that is linked to
this load by a WSM.
Dsable indicates that either the cool source is off or that no cool source is
configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display
Enable/Dsable
Hot Water Temp

This decision displays the current leaving hot water temperature at the heat
source that is linked to this load by a WSM. The value 0.0F (-17.8C)
indicates that a heat source is not configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display
488
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
WSM Air Source

WSMAIxxM
Function Type 307
Heat Source Status

This decision displays the current status of the heat source that is
linked to this load by a WSM.
Dsable indicates that either the cool source is off or that no heat
source is configured for this load at the WSM.
Valid Display
Enable/Dsable
Task Timer
seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
489
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxC
Function Type 308
WSM Cool Source
This global algorithm gives the Comfort Controller the capability to

receive commands from Carriers Water System Manager (WSM)
in order to regulate the flow of chilled water. The Comfort Controller is the cool source for the WSM. The WSM provides linking
functions so that Comfort Controller cool source operation can be
enabled and disabled in response to cooling demand, occupancy
status, or both. The WSM can also supply reset values to adjust
setpoints in the water cooling equipment.
For more information on WSM, refer to the Water System Manager
Configuration Manual.
Decisions

optional.
*
*
*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

this algorithm. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this algorithm.
*
*
*
*
490
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule
Chilled Water Temp
Chiller Status
Chilled Water Setpoint
Chiller Start/Stop
Power on Delay
Occupied ?
Chilled Water Temp
Chiller Status
Chiller Start/Stop
WSM Chiller Equipment
WSM Active ?
Chilled Water Temp
Equipment Status
Commanded State
CHW Setpt Reset Value
Current CHW Setpoint
Task Timer
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Configuration
Decisions
Time Schedule
You must configure this decision to specify the Time Schedule that determines the
occupancy state. For more information on Time Schedules, refer to the How to
Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
Allowable Entries
Default Value

SETPT00
Chilled Water Temp

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point name that provides the
chilled water temperature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CHW
Chiller Status
You must configure this decision to specify the DI point name that provides the
chiller status.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CHLRSTAT
491
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308

You must configure this decision to specify the AI point name that will be used
to provide a chilled water setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CHWSET
Chiller Start/Stop
You must configure this decision to specify the DO point name that will be
used to provide a start/stop control.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
CHLRSTST
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Occupied ?
This decision displays whether the current mode is occupied. If a Time Schedule has not been selected, then the default mode will be Occupied and Yes will
be displayed.
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the value of the chilled water temperature being monitored.
Valid Display
492
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Chiller Status
This decision displays the actual state of the cooling source being
monitored.
Valid Display
Off/On

This decision indicates the value of the chilled water setpoint returned from the Water System Manager.
Valid Display
-40.00 to 245.00F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Chiller Start/Stop
This decision indicates the commanded state being returned from
the Water System Manager.
Valid Display On/Off
WSM Chiller Equipment

WSM Chiller Equipment provides current WSM linkage information.
WSM Active?
This decision displays the status of WSM algorithms and of
communications between this cool source and a Water
System Manager (WSM).
No indicates that one of the following is true:
WSM is not present or WSM Program Status is disabled.
Communications with WSM failed (an alarm is generated).
493
WSM Cool
WSMCOxxM
Function Type 308
Chilled Water Temp

This decision displays the current chilled water temperature. The
value 0.0F (-17.8C) indicates that the chilled water temperature
cannot be read, (for example, in the event of a sensor failure).
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Equipment Status
This decision displays the current status of this cool source.
Valid Display
On/Off
Commanded State
This decision displays the current commanded state sent by the
WSM. A blank indicates that the WSM is not determining a
commanded state.
Valid Display
Enable/Disable/(blank)
CHW Setpt Reset Value

This decision displays the current CHW Setpoint Reset Value,
the number of degrees that are added to the configured chilled
water setpoint to produce the current Chilled Water Setpoint.
Valid Display -40.0 to 245.0^F
(-40.0 to 245.0^C)
Current CHW Setpoint

This decision displays the current chilled water setpoint (the
configured chilled water setpoint plus the CHW Setpoint Reset
Value), as determined by the WSM.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Task Timer
seconds.
Valid Display
494
0 to 300 seconds
How To Configure
Schedules
How To
Configure
Schedules
Overview
This section provides the following information for each schedule:
Definition of a
Schedule
Purpose
Typical application
Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable entries and default values
A schedule provides algorithms and custom programs created in

BEST++ with occupancy status or setpoints. A schedule is a shared
resource, which means that you can assign the same schedule to
more than one algorithm or custom program. Typically, you should
assign all algorithms or custom programs serving a common air
handler system or building space to the same schedules. For example, three algorithms may use the same Time Schedule and
Setpoint Schedule.
For easy reference, the schedules are presented alphabetically in this
manual, as follows:
Holiday
Network Time
Setpoint
Time (Occupancy)
495
Holiday Schedule
HOLDYxxS
Holiday Schedule
A Holiday Schedule gives you the capability to specify days of the

year (holidays) on which the Comfort Controllers algorithms and
custom programs will operate according to time period(s) that differ
from other time periods, as configured in a Time Schedule(s). To
indicate to the Comfort Controller that you want it to recognize a
day of the week as a holiday, you enter a 1 in the holiday (H) column of a Time Schedule and configure occupied and unoccupied
times for the holiday. Then, you configure one Holiday Schedule
for every holiday you want the Comfort Controller to recognize. In
the Holiday Schedule, you configure the month and day on which
the schedule will go into effect, and how many days the schedule
will be in effect.
You can configure 16 Holiday Schedules (HOLDYxxS Table).
Therefore, the Comfort Controller can recognize 16 holidays.
Note:
You can define a holiday to last for more than one day.
For example, you can configure a five-day vacation period
as one holiday by entering the appropriate month, the day
on which the holiday will begin, and the duration of the
holiday as five consecutive days.
For more information on Time Schedules, refer to the topic Time

Schedules, which appears later in this chapter.
Note:
Typical Application
496
You must configure holidays in only one system element

on a CCN. That system element must be the time and date
broadcaster. If the Comfort Controller is the broadcaster,
it will send the holiday status to all the other system
elements on the CCN. If the Comfort Controller is not the
time and date broadcaster, do not configure any holidays.
The time and date broadcaster on your CCN is responsible
for sending the holiday status to the Comfort Controller.
You can use a Holiday Schedule to have the Comfort Controller

control to unoccupied times that differ from the other unoccupied
periods in a Time Schedule. For example, on Thanksgiving the
building could be unoccupied for the entire day.
Holiday Schedule
HOLDYxxS
Decisions
The following decisions are applicable to this schedule. You must

configure the asterisked decisions
*
*
*
Start Month
Start Day
Duration
Start Month
You must configure this decision to indicate the month in which the
holiday will begin.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 12
1
Start Day
You must configure this decision to indicate the day of the month on
which the holiday will begin.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 31
1
Duration
You must configure this decision to indicate how many consecutive
days the holiday will last. If you enter 0 in this decision, the Comfort Controller will disable this schedule.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 365
0
497
Network Time Schedule

OCCPCxxE
Network Time
Schedule
A Network Time Schedule allows the Occupancy Schedule in an

external device to control the Comfort Controller's occupancy state.
Each time the Occupancy Schedule changes from occupied to unoccupied, or visa-versa, the controlling Occupancy Schedule
(OCCPCxxS, where xx is a number greater than or equal to 65)
broadcasts an occupancy flag over the CCN to any Comfort Controller that has OCCPCxxE, where xx is the same number in both schedules, as its Network Time Schedule name. To receive a broadcast
occupancy flag, you must create a Network Time Schedule.
You can configure up to 16 Network Time Schedules. The Comfort
Controller will automatically and sequentially name them
OCCPC65E to OCCPC81E, however, you can use the Building
Supervisor or Network Service Tool to Modify the Names so that
they range from OCCPC65E to OCCPC99E.
For information on setting up the Comfort Controller to broadcast the
occupancy state to other CCN system elements, refer to Time Schedules in the How to Configure Schedules chapter of this manual.
498
Setpoint Schedule
SETPTxx
Setpoint Schedule
A Setpoint Schedule gives you the capability to configure the limits

(setpoints) to which analog signals are controlled. You configure two
sets of setpoints:
high and low setpoints for occupied times

high and low setpoints for unoccupied times
For space temperature control, the high setpoints are typically associated with the cooling cycle, which means that when the space temperature exceeds the high setpoint, the air handler will perform cooling. The low setpoints are typically associated with the heating cycle,
which means that when the space temperature falls below the low
setpoint, the air handler will perform heating.
When you create the schedule, you indicate which engineering units a
Setpoint Schedule will use. Refer to Appendix C for a list of the
engineering units and the conversion limits.
You can configure up to 16 Setpoint Schedules (SETPTxx Table) in a
Comfort Controller. There is no limit to the number of algorithms
that can use the same Setpoint Schedule. In general, you should
assign the same Setpoint Schedule to all algorithms that control a
common air handler or space. The allowable entries for the Setpoint
Schedule depend on the engineering units you assigned in the
SETPTDEF Table.
A Setpoint Schedule uses a Time Schedule to determine whether to
use occupied or unoccupied setpoints. If you do not configure an
associated Time Schedule, the Setpoint Schedule will use the occupied setpoints.
A Setpoint Schedule has the capability to adjust the setpoints currently being used based on the bias signal from a T56 Space Temperature Sensor. Based on the bias input, the Setpoint Schedule adjusts
(expands) the high and low setpoint upward or downward, but not
past the value you enter in the Setpoint Offset decisions.
Typical Application
You can use one Setpoint Schedule for all the algorithms that are
associated with the same air handler and that define the space temperature setpoints for the same space.
499
Setpoint Schedule
SETPTxx
Decisions
The following decisions are applicable to this schedule. You must

*
*
*
*
Configuration
Decisions

Unoccupied Low Setpoint
Unoccupied High Setpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the low setpoint for
occupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the heating
setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Valid range based on selected display units.

68.00

You must configure this decision to indicate the high setpoint for
occupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the cooling
setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

72.00
Unoccupied Low Setpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the low setpoint for
unoccupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the heating
setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

55.00
Unoccupied High Setpoint

You must configure this decision to indicate the high setpoint for
unoccupied times when offset is not in effect. When algorithms
control space temperatures, they use this setpoint as the cooling
setpoint.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
500

85.00
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Time Schedule
A Time Schedule gives you the capability to define the occupied and
unoccupied periods for devices controlled by the Comfort Controller.
Each Time Schedule is divided into eight separate daysMonday
through Sunday and holiday. Within each schedule, you can configure
eight separate occupied and unoccupied periods. You enter occupied
and unoccupied periods in military format, where 00:00 is the beginning of any 24-hour day and 24:00 is the end of any 24-hour day.
You can override (extend) a time period in three ways:
by commanding a manual override of 1 to 4 hours
by pressing and holding the override button on a T-55 or T-56

Space Temperature Sensor with Override for 1 to 5 seconds during
unoccupied hours
by closing a Latched Discrete Input point.
The Tenant Billing Option tracks the number and duration of the
overrides and then generates a bill. For more information on the Tenant Billing Option, refer to Tenant Billing Option Overview and Configuration Manual.
There is no limit to the number of algorithms that can use the same
Time Schedule. In general, you should assign the same Time Schedule
to all algorithms that control a single air handler or building space.
To set up the Comfort Controller 6400 to control the occupancy state of
other system elements on the CCN, name the Comfort Controller's
Time Schedule OCCPCxxS, where xx is a number greater than or equal
to 65. You can do this by adding an occupancy schedule as function 65
or above. A controlling Time Schedule with the name OCCPC65S or
greater will broadcast an occupancy flag over the CCN to any system
element with the same number in its Network Time Schedule
(OCCPCxxE). For example, a Comfort Controller with a Time Schedule named OCCPC68S will broadcast its occupancy state over the CCN
to system elements with a Network Time Schedule named OCCPC68S.
To set up the Comfort Controller 1600 to control the occupancy state of
other system elements on the CCN, you must use ComfortWORKS and
perform the instructions in the previous paragraph.
To set up the Comfort Controller so that its occupancy state will be
controlled by another system element on the CCN, refer to Network
Time Schedule in this chapter of the manual.
501
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Typical Application
Refer to the Time Schedule on the following page for a description

and explanation of possible time period configurations, and rules to
follow when configuring Time Schedules.
Decisions

optional.
Time Schedule
Manual Override Hours
Period n: Day of Week
Period n: Occupied from
Period n: Occupied to
Push Button Override
Thermostat Override
Time Delay
Timed Override Duration
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance
Decisions

this schedule. They provide data regarding the status and configuration of the schedule.
Time Schedule
Mode
Current Occupied Period
Override in Progress
Override Duration
Occupied Start Time
Unoccupied Start Time
Next Occupied Day
Next Occupied Time
Next Unoccupied Day
Last Unoccupied Day
Thermostat Override
Task Timer
502
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Figure 6-1
Time Schedule
Time Schedule #1
Period
Occupied
Time
Unoccupied
Time
TH
SA
SU
08:00
13:00
11:55
15:00
09:00
14:00
00:00
24:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
Period 1 has an occupied time of 08:00 (8 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 13:00 (1:00 p.m.).
It will be in effect Monday through Thursday.
Period 2 has an occupied time of 11:55 (11:55 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 15:00
(3 p.m.). It will be in effect only on Saturday.
Period 3 provides an occupied time of 09:00 (9 a.m.) and an unoccupied time of 14:00 (2
p.m.) It will be in effect on Sunday and holidays.
Although Periods 4 through 8 have an occupied time of 00:00, only Period 4 will operate
because a day has been specified. Period 4 will be in effect on Friday.
Rule:
An occupied time of 00:00 and an unoccupied time of 24:00 will provide occupied
operation for a full 24-hour day.
Periods 5 through 8 will not operate because no days are configured for these periods.
Rule:
An occupied time of 00:00 and an unoccupied time of 00:00 will provide unoccupied operation for a full 24-hour day.
Rule:
Every day in a Time Schedule (Monday through Sunday) must be assigned to a

time period.
503
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305

Use this decision to command a timed override by entering the number of hours
the override will be in effect, then downloading the OCCPCxxC Table (Time
Schedule). If the mode is occupied when you command a timed override, the
OCCPCxxC Table extends the occupied period by the amount of the Manual
Override Hours. If the mode is unoccupied when you initiate a timed override,
the mode changes to an occupied status for the length of the timed override.
When a timed override extends into a scheduled occupied period, the scheduled
occupied period picks up directly from the timed override with no return to
unoccupied status.
A value downloaded in this decision does not become part of the tables permanent configuration. The decision is reset to 0 in the Comfort Controller at the end
of the timed override mode. You should not save a non-zero value in this decision.
By downloading a new timed override, zero hours in length, you can at any time
cancel a timed override that has already been commanded. A 0 in this decision
causes the Time Schedule to switch to unoccupied mode, if that is how it was
configured, or to cancel a pending timed override that would have extended a
current occupied mode.
You cannot change the length of a timed override mode after this decision is
downloaded. From that time until the end of the timed override, the Time Schedule will ignore any value, except 0, that you download to it in this decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
504
0 to 4 hours
0
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305
Period n: Day of Week

(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the day(s) of the week on which Period n: Occupied
from and Period n: Occupied to times are in effect. From left to right, the first
seven positions of the decisions data entry field represent Monday through
Sunday. The eighth position represents a holiday.
Each position of the data entry field can be set to 1 or 0. A 1 specifies that the
period is in effect on the day that corresponds to that position; a 0 specifies that
it is not in effect on that day. A period may be specified to be in effect on more
than one day of the week.
You can use the left and right arrow keys to move among the eight positions of
the data entry field. Only the values 1 or 0 should be typed in at each position.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 = period not in effect for that day

1 = period is in effect for that day
11111111 for Period 1
00000000 for Periods 2 to 8
Period n: Occupied from

(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the hour and minute, in military format, at which
time this occupied period begins. When entering input for this decision, use a
colon (or a decimal if using a LID) to separate hours and minutes.
To specify a 24-hour occupied period, enter 00:00 in this decision and 24:00 in
the Period n: Occupied to decision. To specify a 24-hour unoccupied period,
enter 00:00 in both this decision and in the Period n: Occupied to decision.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 24:00, LID = 00.00 to 24.00

00:00
Period n: Occupied to
(n = 1 through 8)
Use this decision to specify the hour and minute, in military format, at which
time this occupied period ends. When entering input for this decision, use a
colon (or a decimal if using a LID) to separate hours and minutes.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 24:00, LID = 00.00 to 24.00

24:00
505
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxC
Function Type 305

Use this decision to specify the Latched Discrete Input point (momentary input)
that will indicate when a timed override is requested.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
LATCHI00
Thermostat Override
Use this decision to indicate the analog input point or Sensor Group where the
T-55 or T-56 Space Temperature Sensor (with the timed override button) is
connected.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Time Delay
Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes a Time Schedule will
remain occupied after a timed override cancel occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 60 minutes
5
Timed Override Duration

Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes that will be added to the
Time Schedule if a push button or T-55 or T-56 override is initiated. The Time
Schedule override can be activated during occupied or unoccupied times. If a
second override occurs, the Time Schedule will cancel the time schedule
override.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 240 minutes
5
Power on Delay
wait to activate this schedule after a power failure occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
506
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Maintenance
Decisions
Time Schedule
Time Schedule provides information regarding the current occupancy mode for
this schedule.
Mode
This decision displays the current occupancy mode for this schedule.
Valid Display
0 = Unoccupied Mode
1 = Occupied Mode
Current Occupied Period

This decision displays the period number that is currently reflecting the
occupancy status for this schedule. When the current mode is 1 (occupied),
the value displayed in this decision represents the period number that
determines this mode. A value of 0 indicates that the mode is unoccupied.
Valid Display
0 = Unoccupied Mode
1 to 8 = Period number determining the Occupied Mode
Override in Progress
This decision indicates whether a manual override is currently in effect.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Override Duration
This decision displays the number of minutes remaining in the override
period. The override period can be as a result of a manual, push button, or
thermostat override condition.
Valid Display
0 = No Manual Override in effect

1 to 240 = Number of minutes remaining in override
period
507
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Occupied Start Time

This decision shows the time that the current occupied mode began. If the
current mode is unoccupied, the value in this decision is 00:00.
Valid Display
00:00 to 23:59 = Start time of this occupied period
Unoccupied Start Time

This decision shows the time that the current occupied mode will end. This
value also represents the beginning of the next unoccupied period. If the
current mode is unoccupied, the value in this decision is 00:00.
Valid Display
00:00 to 24:00 = Start time of next unoccupied period
Next Occupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the next occupied period
will begin.
Valid Display
Sun through Sat
Next Occupied Time

This decision indicates the time of the day when the next occupied period
will begin.
Valid Display
00:00 to 23:59
Next Unoccupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the next unoccupied
period will begin.
Valid Display
Sun through Sat

This decision indicates the time of the day when the next unoccupied period
will begin.
Valid Display
508
00:00 to 24:00
Time Schedule
OCCPCxxM
Function Type 305
Last Unoccupied Day

This decision indicates the day of the week when the most
recent unoccupied period began. If the current mode is unoccupied, the value in this decision indicates the day the mode went
into effect.
Valid Display
Sun through Sat

This decision indicates the time of the day when the most recent
unoccupied period began. If the current mode is unoccupied, the
value in this decision indicates when the mode went into effect.
Valid Display
00:00 to 24:00

This decision indicates whether or not a Push Button Override is in
effect.
Valid Display
On / Off
Thermostat Override
This decision displays the thermostat override value.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
(-40.0 to 118.3C)
Task Timer
next execution of the occupancy function. This function executes
every second.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
509
510
How To Configure
Alarms
How To
Configure
Alarms
Overview
This section provides the following information for each alarm:
Purpose
Typical application
Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable entries and default values.
Definition of an Alarm
An alarm monitors an analog or discrete point, or set of points, and

indicates when the configured limit is exceeded, thereby creating an
alarm condition. The alarm can be transmitted to other system
elements on the CCN.
Function Types
Refer to the table below when configuring the FNCxx-yy Table's

Function Unit decision. This same information is also presented in
Appendix H (Quickstart) on the Function Types, Default Names and
EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet.
Table 7-1
Alarm Function Types
Alarm Name
Function Type
Discrete State .......................................... 103

First Out .................................................. 104
Limit ....................................................... 101
Number of Starts ..................................... 106
Runtime .................................................. 105
Setpoint Limit ......................................... 102
For easy reference, the alarms are presented alphabetically in this

manual.
511
Discrete State Alarm

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Discr ete State

Alarm
Typical Application
The Discrete State alarm monitors a discrete point for alarm processing purposes. An alarm can be generated based on the state of
the input point, or based on a comparison between its state and the
state of a user-defined comparison point.
The alarm logic is user defined. The alarm can be generated when
the input point is on or off or when using a comparison point, when
the state of the points is equal or not equal, depending on the alarm
logic setting.
You can use the Discrete State Alarm to monitor the status of a fan,
such that a fan failure is detected and alarmed. The status can also
be compared to the status of a corresponding fan output point. When
the statuses are not equal, an alarm is generated.
Decisions
The following configuration decisions are applicable to this alarm.

You must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions are optional.
*
512
Monitored Input Point

Comparison Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
Discrete Check
Alarm Logic
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Description Index
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power On Delay

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
List of Maintenance
Decisions

this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status
and configuration of this alarm.
*
*
*

Comparision Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
Alarm Status
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Time of Last Message
Month of Last Message
Day of Last Message
Year of Last Message
Task Timer

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point that is
being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Comparison Point
Use this decision to specify the discrete point to which the Monitored Input Point is compared. The state of the Monitored Input
Point is compared to the state of the Comparison Point. Alarms can
be generated when they are equal, or not equal, depending on the
Alarm Logic specified.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
513

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Alarm Inhibit Point

Use this decision to indicate the discrete point that prevents the alarm logic
from being executed. If you do not configure this decision, the alarm will
always be active (on). This alarm will be inhibited whenever the point configured in this decision is active.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Discrete Check
Discrete Check gives you the capability to define the Alarm Logic, prevent
nuisance alarms, and specify the length of an alarm state.
Alarm Logic
Use this decision to indicate the alarming logic. When you set this
decision to normal, the alarm will occur when the Input Point is not
equal to the Comparison Point. When you set this decision to invert,
the alarm will occur when Monitored Input Point is equal to the Comparison Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Normal
Enable Delay Time

To prevent nuisance alarms, use this decision to enter the amount of
time that must elapse after a power fail restart before the alarm can be
generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
514
0 to 3600 seconds
300

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the Monitored Input Point
must remain in an alarm condition before an alarm is generated or the
amount of time the Monitored Input Point must remain in the operating
range before a return to normal message is generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
5 to 3600 seconds
60
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Discrete State Alarm message will be sent
on the CCN.
Alarm Processing
You must configure this decision to indicate whether the alarm will be
sent on the CCN.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = Enable/Dsable

Dsable
Re-Alarm Interval
Use this decision to indicate the number of minutes that will elapse
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Monitored Input Point
continues to exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to
occur at the specified interval until the Number of Starts Input does not
exceed the limits.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 1440 minutes
0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Use this decision to indicate whether alarms or alerts will be generated.
Alarms are displayed before alerts.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 0/1

1
515

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103
Alarm Level
Use this decision to indicate the priority level that will be assigned to this
alarm. The value entered in this decision is used when sorting alarms.
For a list of alarm levels and their meaning, refer to Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 6
6
Alarm Source
Use this decision to indicate the type of equipment that is generating the
alarm. The value entered in this decision is used when sorting alarms
from the same source by level. For a list of equipment types, refer to
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
5
Alarm Routing
Use this decision to indicate which CCN system elements will receive and
process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this decision
consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a
digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that
corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing.
At the time this manual is written, digits in this decision correspond to
CCN system elements in the following manner:
Alarm Printer Interface Module
Autodial Gateway
Local Building Supervisor(s)
1
0
unused
Allowable Entries
Default Value
516
00000000 to 11111111
11010000

DSALMxxC
Function Type 103

Use this decision to enter the index number that represents either the
default standard alarm message or one of the 15 standard alarm messages that will be generated when the alarm condition exists. If you
enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard alarm
message will be used instead of the default standard alarm message.
For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Note:
If you enter a custom alarm message in any of the four Alarm

Message configuration decisions, that custom message will
overwrite the value in this decision and be sent on the CCN.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 15
0
Alarm Message
Use this decision to enter the first 16 characters of the custom message
that you would like sent when the alarm condition exists. Refer to
Appendix E for a list of supported control characters.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 16 ASCII characters
(blank)
Alarm Message
If necessary, use this decision to continue entering the 64-character
custom message that you would like sent when the alarm condition
exists. Refer to Appendix E for a list of supported control characters.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
517

DSALMxxM
Function Type 103
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this alarm after a power failure occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

This decision displays the current state of the point being monitored.
Valid Display
Comparison Point
This decision displays the present value of the point to which the monitored
point is being compared.
Valid Display
Alarm Inhibit Point

This decision displays Off if the Alarm Inhibit Point configuration decision is
not configured. When this decision displays On, alarm processing is disabled.
Valid Display
On/Off
Alarm Status
This decision displays the current alarm state of the Monitored Input Point
Normal or Alarm Condition.
Valid Display
518
Alarm/Normal

DSALMxxM
Function Type 103
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor provides information regarding the last alarm message sent
on the network.
Alarm Type
This decision indicates the state that caused the current alarm message
to be sent.
Valid Display
0 = First Alarm Occurrence

1 = Re-Alarm
2 = Return-To-Normal

This decision displays the time when the last alarm message was sent.
Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

This decision displays the month when the last alarm message was sent.
Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

This decision displays the day when the last alarm message was sent.
Valid Display
1 to 31

This decision displays the year when the last alarm message was sent.
Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this alarm
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every five seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
519
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
First Out Alarm
The First Out alarm monitors a set of discrete points and compares
the set to the Comparison Point. When any of the points in the set
satisfy the configured Alarm Logic for the Persistence Time, an
alarm is generated. An alarm is only generated for the first point
that matches the Comparison Point with regard to the Alarm Logic
type. If another point matches the alarm condition later, there is no
re-alarm. The alarm condition remains until none of the set of
points meets the alarm logic state. The alarm message includes the
name of the point that met the alarm condition.
Typical Application
You can use the First Out Alarm to monitor a safety chain. To
ensure proper alarm indication, you must connect the points in the
same sequence as the chain.
Decisions

*
*
520
Input Point 1
Input Point 2
Input Point 3
Input Point 4
Comparison Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
First Out Check
Alarm Logic
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
List of Maintenance
Decisions

this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this alarm.
*
*
*
*
*
*
Configuration
Decisions
Input Point 1
Input Point 2
Input Point 3
Input Point 4
Comparison Point
Alarm Inhibit Point
First Out Check
Alarm Status
Alarming Input Point
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
Input Point 1
Use this decision to specify the first discrete point in the set of points
being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Input Point 2
Use this decision to specify the second discrete point in the set of
points being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
521
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Input Point 3
Use this decision to specify the third discrete point in the set of points being
monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Input Point 4
Use this decision to specify the fourth discrete point in the set of points being
monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Comparison Point
Use this decision to specify the discrete point to which the Input Points are
being compared. The Input Points are either equal to or not equal to the point
you specify in this decision, based on the Alarm Logic. If you do not configure a point in this decision, the comparison state is assumed to be off.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Alarm Inhibit Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value
522

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
First Out Check

First Out Check monitors a set of up to four input values and indicates an alarm
status when any of the inputs and the alarming state satisfy the configured
alarm condition. The reported alarm value is the channel that first met the
alarm condition.
Alarm Logic
Use this decision to indicate the alarming logic. When you set this
decision to normal, the alarm will occur when the Input Point is not
equal to the Comparison Point. When you set this decision to invert,
the alarm will occur when Monitored Input Point is equal to the Comparison Point.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Normal
Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before the alarm can be
generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
300
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the Input Point must
remain in an alarm condition before an alarm is generated or the amount
of time the Input Point must remain in the operating range before a
return to normal message is generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
300
523
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the First Out Alarm message will be sent on the
CCN.
Alarm Processing
You must configure this decision to activate the alarm processing logic.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Dsable
Re-Alarm Interval
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Input Point continues to
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the specified interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 1440 minutes
0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
1
Alarm Level
Allowable Entries
Default Value
524
0 to 6
6
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
5
Alarm Routing
Autodial Gateway
1
0
unused
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00000000 to 11111111
11010000

default standard alarm message or one of the 15 standard alarm messages
that will be generated when the alarm condition exists. If you enter a
value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard alarm message
will be used instead of the default standard alarm message. For a list of
the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Note:

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 15
0
525
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxC
Function Type 104
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
526
0 to 65535 seconds
0
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxM
Function Type 104
Maintenance
Decisions
Input Point 1
This decision displays the current state of the first point in the set of points
being monitored.
Valid Display
On/Off
Input Point 2
This decision displays the current state of the second point in the set of points
being monitored.
Valid Display
On/Off
Input Point 3
This decision displays the current state of the third point in the set of points
being monitored.
Valid Display
On/Off
Input Point 4
This decision displays the current state of the fourth point in the set of points
being monitored.
Valid Display
On/Off
Comparison Point
This decision displays the present value of the point to which the monitored
points are being compared.
Valid Display
Alarm Inhibit Point

Valid Display
On/Off
First Out Check

First Out Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
This decision displays the current alarm state of the Monitored Input
Point Normal or Alarm Condition.
Valid Display
Alarm/Normal
527
First Out Alarm

FOALMxxM
Function Type 104
Alarming Input Point

This decision displays the Input Point that initially caused the alarm.
Valid Display
0 = No point in alarm
1 to 4 = Input Point 1, 2, 3, or 4
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor provides information regarding the last alarm message sent on
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
Valid Display

1 = Re-Alarm

Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

Valid Display
1 to 31

Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this alarm routine
executes again. This alarm routine executes every second.
Valid Display
528
0 to 300 seconds
aa
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Limit Alarm
The Limit alarm monitors an analog point and compares it to configured alarm limits. When the value of the analog point exceeds the
configured High Limit or falls below the Low limit for the configured
Persistence Time, an alarm is generated.
Once an alarm status has been determined, the analog point must
return within the setpoint limits by the configured Hysteresis amount
for the configured Persistence Time before a return to normal status is
determined. Refer to Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1
Determining a Return to
Normal Status
Low Limit
High Limit
Normal
Operation
a
Alarm
Alarm
Low Limit
plus
Hysteresis
Return to
Normal
High Limit
minus
Hysteresis
Typical Application
You can use the Limit Alarm to monitor static pressure in an air duct.
Decisions

You must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions
are optional.
*

Alarm Inhibit Point
Limit Check
Low Limit
High Limit
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Hysteresis
529
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
*
530
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay

Alarm Inhibit Point
Limit Check
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the analog point that is being
monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
TEMP_I00
Alarm Inhibit Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Limit Check
Limit Check determines when the Input Point is in alarm or has returned to
normal.
Low Limit
Use this decision to indicate the value the Input Point must fall below
before an alarm is generated. The engineering units for this value
depend on the type of sensor you selected.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
0.0
High Limit
Use this decision to indicate the value the Input Point must exceed
before an alarm is generated. The engineering units for this value
depend on the type of sensor you selected.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
999.0
531
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before this alarm can be
generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
300
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the monitored Input Point
amount of time the monitored Input Point must remain in the operating
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 3600 seconds
60
Hysteresis
Use this decision to indicate the amount by which the monitored Input
Point must fall below the high alarming condition or rise above the low
alarming condition before a return to normal message can be generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

2.0
(1.1)
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Limit Alarm message will be sent on the
CCN.
Alarm Processing
Allowable Entries
Default Value
532

Dsable
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the specified interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 1440 minutes
0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
1
Alarm Level
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 6
6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
5
533
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Alarm Routing
Use this decision to indicate which CCN system elements will receive
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this
decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or
1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system
element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables
alarm processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this
decision correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:
Autodial Gateway
1
0
unused
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00000000 to 11111111
11010000

Note:

Allowable Entries
Default Value
534
0 to 15
7
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxC
Function Type 101
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
535
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxM
Function Type 101
Maintenance
Decisions

This decision displays the present value of the point being monitored.
Alarm Inhibit Point

Valid Display
On/Off
Limit Check
Limit Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Valid Display
Alarm/Normal
Alarm Value
This decision displays the value of the Monitored Input Point during the
alarm condition.
Note:
A value of 0 indicates that the point is not in alarm.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
Exceeded Limit
This decision displays the limit that was surpassed.
Note:
Valid Display
536
-40.0 to 245.0F
Limit Alarm
LMALMxxM
Function Type 101
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
Valid Display

1 = Re-Alarm

Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

Valid Display
1 to 31

Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
537
Number of Starts Alarm

NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Number of Starts
Alarm
The Number of Starts alarm monitors a discrete point and totals the
number of times the point transitions from off to on (starts). When
the total number of starts exceeds the configured hourly or daily
limit, an alarm is generated. The alarm will return to normal on an
hourly and daily basis.
Typical Application
You can use the Number of Starts Alarm to monitor the number of
times a fan turns on.
Decisions

*
*
*
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*
538

Number Starts Check
Hourly Limit
Daily Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay

Number Starts Check
Alarm Status
Starts This Hour
Starts This Day
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer

NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Number Starts Check

Number Starts Check compares the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on to the configured Hourly and Daily Limits.
Hourly Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum number of
times per hour the Monitored Input Point can transition from off to on.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600
0
Daily Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum number of
times per day the Monitored Input Point can transition from off to on.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535
0
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Number Starts Alarm message will be
sent on the CCN.
Alarm Processing
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Dsable
539

NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the
specified interval until the alarm condition no longer exists.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 1440 minutes
0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
1
Alarm Level
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 6
6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
540
0 to 7
5

NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Alarm Routing
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this
decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or
1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system
element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables
alarm processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this
decision correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:
Autodial Gateway
1
0
unused
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00000000 to 11111111
11010000

enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard
alarm message will be used instead of the default standard alarm
message. For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Note:

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 15
7
541

NSALMxxC
Function Type 106
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
542
0 to 65535 seconds
0

NSALMxxM
Function Type 106
Maintenance
Decisions

Valid Display
Number Starts Check

Number Starts Check provides information regarding the current alarm state
for this alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Valid Display
Alarm/Normal
Starts This Hour

This decision displays the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on during this hour. The value in this decision
resets to 0 at the beginning of each hour.
Valid Display
0 to 65535
Starts This Day

This decision displays the number of times the Monitored Input Point
transitions from off to on during this day. The value in this decision
resets to 0 at midnight.
Valid Display
0 to 65535
Exceeded Limit
Note:
Valid Display
0 to 9999
543

NSALMxxM
Function Type 106
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
Valid Display

1 = Re-Alarm

Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

Valid Display
1 to 31

Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every 30 seconds.
Valid Display
544
0 to 300 seconds
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
Runtime Alarm
The Runtime alarm monitors a discrete point and totals the amount
of time the point is on. When the total on-time amount exceeds the
configured limit, an alarm is generated. The alarm will return to
normal when a reset is done.
Typical Application
You can use the Runtime alarm to monitor the amount of time a
pump has been on.
Decisions

*
*

Runtime Check
Runtime Limit
Reset Alarm
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay
545
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
List of Maintenance
Decisions

*

Runtime Check
Alarm Status
Runtime Hours
Runtime Minutes
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer

You must configure this decision to specify the discrete point being
monitored for hours of runtime.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Runtime Check
Runtime Check compares the accumulated runtime for the Monitored Input Point to the Runtime Limit.
Runtime Limit
You must configure this decision to indicate the maximum
amount of time the Alarm Monitored Input Point can be
turned on before an alarm will be generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
546
0 to 65535 hours
0
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
Reset Alarm
Use this decision to clear the accummulated counter and the Runtime
Alarm. The value in this decision will be reset to No after the counter
and alarm are reset.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

No
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Runtime Alarm message will be sent on
the CCN.
Alarm Processing
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Dsable
Re-Alarm Interval
exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 1440 minutes
0
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
1
547
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105
Alarm Level
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 6
6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
5
Alarm Routing
and process alarms sent by the Comfort Controller. Input for this decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1.
Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm
processing. At the time this manual is written, digits in this decision
correspond to CCN system elements in the following manner:

Autodial Gateway
1
Allowable Entries
Default Value
548
00000000 to 11111111
11010000
0
unused
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxC
Function Type 105

enter a value other than 0 in this decision, the configured standard
alarm message will be used instead of the default standard alarm message. For a list of the 15 standard alarm messages, refer to Appendix E.
Note:

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 15
7
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
549
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxM
Function Type 105
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

Valid Display
Runtime Check
Runtime Check provides information regarding the current alarm state for this
alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Valid Display
Alarm/Normal
Runtime Hours
This decision displays the number of hours the Monitored Input Point
has been on since the last reset.
Valid Display
0 to 65535
Runtime Minutes
This decision displays the number of minutes the Monitored Input Point
has been on since the last reset.
Valid Display
550
0 to 65535
Runtime Alarm
RTALMxxM
Function Type 105
Exceeded Limit
Note:
Valid Display 0 to 65535

Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
Valid Display

1 = Re-Alarm

Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

Valid Display
1 to 31

Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
routine executes again. This alarm routine executes every 30 seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
551
Setpoint Limit Alarm

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Setpoint Limit
Alarm
aa
The Setpoint Limit alarm monitors an analog point and compares it
to the setpoint limits configured in the designated Setpoint Schedule. When the value of the analog point is below the low setpoint
minus the configured Low Setpoint Offset or is greater than the
High Setpoint Offset plus the high setpoint, an alarm is generated.
Once an alarm status has been determined, the analog point must
return within the setpoint limits for the configured Persistence Time
before a return to normal status is determined. The limits are determined as follows:
[high setpoint + High Setpoint Offset - Hysteresis] and [low setpoint

- Low Setpoint Offset + Hysteresis]
Low Limit Low Offset
High Limit +
High Offset
Normal
Operation
Figure 7-2
Determining a
Return to Normal
Status
Alarm
Alarm
Limit plus
Hysteresis
Return to
Normal
Limit minus
Hysteresis
Whenever you change the setpoints in the Setpoint Schedule, alarm

detection is inhibited for the amount configured in Setpoint Change
Delay. The conditions are not tested if an Alarm Inhibit input is
active.
Typical Application
You can use the Setpoint Alarm to monitor space temperature.
Decisions

*
*
552
Monitored Inhibit Point

Alarm Inhibit Point
Time Schedule
Setpoint Schedule

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
List of Maintenance
Decisions
Setpoint Limit Check

Low Setpoint Offset
High Setpoint Offset
Setpoint Change Delay
Enable Delay Time
Persistence Time
Hysteresis
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processing
Re-Alarm Interval
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Routing
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Alarm Message
Power on Delay

this alarm. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this alarm.
*
*

Alarm Inhibit Point
Occupied?
Hi Setpoint + Offset
Lo Setpoint - Offset
Alarm Status
Alarm Value
Exceeded Limit
Alarm Processor
Alarm Type
Day of Last Message
Task Timer
553

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to specify the analog point that is being
monitored. The engineering units for the point should match those of the
Setpoint Schedule to which it will be compared.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 0 to 64
TEMP_I00
Alarm Inhibit Point

Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 0 to 64
SENSDI00
Time Schedule
state for this alarm. If you do not specify a Time Schedule in this decision, the
alarm will default to a 24-hour occupied state.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

OCCPC00
Setpoint Schedule
the occupied and unoccupied setpoints.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
554

SETPT00

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102

Setpoint Limit Check determines when the monitored Input Point is in alarm or
has returned to normal.
Low Setpoint Offset
Point must fall below the low setpoint before an alarm is generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
5.0
High Setpoint Offset

Point must exceed the high setpoint before an alarm is generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
5.0
Setpoint Change Delay

time that must elapse after changing the setpoint in the Setpoint Schedule before an alarm can be generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
300
Enable Delay Time

time that must elapse after a power fail restart before this alarm can be
generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 3600 seconds
300
555

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Persistence Time
Use this decision to enter the amount of time the monitored Input Point
amount of time the monitored Input Point must remain in the operating
Allowable Entries
Default Value
10 to 3600 seconds
60
Hysteresis
Point must fall below the high alarming condition or rise above the low
alarming condition before a return to normal message can be generated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
-9999.9 to 9999.9
2.0
Alarm Processor
Alarm Processor determines how the Setpoint Limit Alarm message will be
sent on the CCN.
Alarm Processing
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Dsable
Re-Alarm Interval
between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the Input Point continues
to exceed the configured limit. Re-alarming continues to occur at the
Allowable Entries
Default Value
556
0 to 1440 minutes
0

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102
Alarm=1 or Alert=0
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
1
Alarm Level
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 6
6
Alarm Source
Appendix E.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
5
Alarm Routing
Autodial Gateway
1
0
unused
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00000000 to 11111111
11010000
557

SLALMxxC
Function Type 102

Note:

Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 15
7
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
558
(blank)

SLALMnnM
Function Type 102
Alarm Message
Allowable Entries
Default Value
(blank)
Power on Delay
wait to activate this alarm after a power failure occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0

This decision displays the current value of the point being monitored.
Valid Display
Alarm Inhibit Point

Valid Display
On/Off
Occupied ?
Valid Display
Yes/No
Hi Setpoint + Offset
This decision displays the high setpoint value plus offset, allowing for the
current occupancy state.
Valid Display
-40.0 to 240F
559

SLALMnnM
Function Type 102
Lo Setpoint - Offset
This decision displays the low setpoint value minus offset, allowing for the
current occupancy state.
Setpoint Limit Check provides information regarding the current alarm state
for this alarm routine.
Alarm Status
Valid Display
Alarm/Normal
Alarm Value
This decision displays the value of the Monitored Input Point during the
alarm condition.
Note:
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
Exceeded Limit
Note:
Valid Display
-40.0 to 245.0F
Alarm Processor
the network.
Alarm Type
to be sent.
Valid Display
560

1 = Re-Alarm

SLALMnnM
Function Type 102

Valid Display
00:00 to 2400

Valid Display
1 to 12
Day of Last Message

Valid Display
1 to 31

Valid Display
0 to 99
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
561
562
How To Configure
System Functions
How To
Configure
System
Functions
Overview
This section provides the following information for each system

function:
Definition of a System
Function
Purpose
Typical application
Description of each configuration decision that includes allowable
entries and default values.
A system function allows you to perform one of the following tasks:
Obtain data from system elements on the CCN

Access the Comfort Controllers consumable data
Configure Service-Config Tables
Configure user-specific functions of your Comfort Controller.
Change the time of the Comfort Controllers internal clock
View Comfort Controller database information, such as amount of
available memory
For easy reference, the System Functions are presented in this manual,
as follows:
Analog Point Trace
Ctlr-ID
Consumable
Loadshed
Database Status
Discrete Trace Point
Internal Consumable
LID Preferences
Real Time Clock
Runtime
Note:
In addition to the system functions listed above, the LID can

access the system functions listed in the table on the following page. To determine how to access these system functions with the LID, refer to Appendix F.
563
Table 8-1
Additional LID
System Functions
564
LID System Function
Description
Alarm History
Allows you to view the last 25 alarms.

The most current alarm is displayed
first.
CCN Control
Allows you to view and configure the

Comfort Controllers address and
baud rate. It also allows you to view
messages sent on the CCN.
Channel Definition
Allows you to view and modify

points.
Controller Password
Allows you to change your password.
Database Control
Allows you to update the Comfort

Controllers database and view
amount of available memory.
Function Definition

functions.
LID Preferences
Allows you to select customary US or

metric units and language translation.
Set Clock
Allows you to change the current time

in the Comfort Controllers internal
clock.
Setpoint Definition

setpoints.
System Definition
Allows you to view and modify the

global functions.
Function Types
Refer to the table below when configuring the FNCxx-yy Table''s

Function Unit decision. This same information is also presented in
Appendix H (Quickstart) on the Function Types, Default Names and
EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet.
Table 8-2
System Function Types
System Function Name
Function Type
Analog Point Trace ................................. 201

Discrete Point Trace ............................... 202
Internal Consumable ............................... 203
565
Analog Trace Point

ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
Analog Trace
Point
Decisions
This system function provides detailed trend information regarding

the performance of an analog point over a period of time. Up to 48
values can be collected for each trace.
The following decisions are applicable to this system function. You

must configure the asterisked decisions. Non-asterisked decisions
are optional.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions
The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system

function. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this system function. You can force the asterisked
decisions.
*
*
566
Analog Trace Point

Control Point
Trace Channel
Trace Interval
Start Time Config
Start Day
Event State
Trace Mode
Power on Delay
Analog Trace Point

Control Point
Trace Channel
Point Traced
Start Time
Status
Buffer Full
Data Value (1-48)
Task Timer
Analog Trace Point

ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
Configuration
Decisions
Analog Trace Point

You must configure this decision to indicate the point being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
MAMP_I00
Control Point
Use this decision to indicate the discrete point that determines when the trace is
started or stopped based on comparison to the Event State.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Trace Channel
Trace Channel defines the attributes of the trace parameters.
Trace Interval
You must configure this decision to indicate the time that must elapse
before the next Data Value is collected.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 120 minutes
1
Start Time Config

If you entered the value of 1 (which represents Timed Start of Trace) in
the Trace Mode configuration decision, you must configure this decision to indicate the time at which the first trace will occur.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
00:00
567
Analog Trace Point

ATRACxxC
Function Type 201
Start Day
the Trace Mode configuration decision, you may configure this decision to specify the day on which the trace will occur.
0 = Any Day
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Sunday
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 7
0
Event State
Use this decision to indicate the state used to compare with the control
point to determine when to start or stop this trace.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
0
Trace Mode
You must configure this decision to indicate the type of trace operation
to perform.
0
1
2
3
4
5
= Manual Start of Trace

(Trace starts and continues until another value is entered in this
decision.)
= Timed Start of Trace
(Trace stops when buffer is full.)
= Event Start of Trace
(Trace starts when Event State equals Control Point state.)
= Event Stop of Trace
(Trace stops when Event State equals Control Point state.)
= Manual Stop of Trace
(Trace stops immediately.)
= Manual Reset of Trace
(The trace resets to the value of 0, which is Manual Start of
Trace All data clears.)
Allowable Entries
Default Value
568
0 to 5
0
Analog Trace Point

ATRACxxM
Function Type 201
Power on Delay
wait to activate this history function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
30
Analog Trace Point

This decision displays the current value of the analog point being traced in user
selectable units.
Valid Display
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the Control Point. This value acts as
a trigger based on the selected Trace Mode. If unconfigured, the Control Point
will not affect trace operation.
Valid Display
On/Off
Trace Channel
Trace Channel displays the specific trace data for the displayed point.
Point Traced
This decision identifies the 8-character point name for the Analog Trace
Point.
Valid Display
Start Time
This decision indicates the time when the data gathering for this trace
began. It is dependent on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Valid Display
0:00 - 23:59
569
Analog Trace Point

ATRACxxM
Function Type 201
Status
This decision indicates the current status of this trace function. It is dependent
on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Trace
Status
Mode
CONT TRC
EVT STOP
STRT TIM
STRT EVT
STOP TRC
RES BUFF
WAIT TRG
0
3
1
2
1 or 4
5
1 or 2
Valid Display
Description
Trace is running
Trace will stop when configured event occurs
Timed start trace is active (stops when buffer full)
Event start trace is active
Trace has been stopped
All data resets, then reverts to CONT TRC
Waiting for time or event trigger
One of seven items above
Buffer Full
This decision indicates whether all 48 data slots have been used.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Data Value
These decisions display up to 48 consecutive values for the trace point. The
most current value is displayed last.
Valid Display
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the next execution
of this function. The trace function executes every 60 seconds.
Valid Display
570
0 to 300 seconds
Controller ID
Ctlr-ID
Ctlr-ID
This system function allows you to view the pre-configured Comfort Controller product identification information. You can modify
Device Name, Description and Location with a Building Supervisor
III, Network Service Tool, or ComfortWORKS.
Decisions
The following pre-configured decisions are applicable:

Device Name Location
Model Number*
Description
Software Part Number* Serial Number*
Reference Number*
*non-configurable field
List of Maintenance
Decisions
The following maintenance decision, which can be viewed only

with a LID or the BEST++ Programmer's Environment, provides
information regarding the amount of real time being used within the
Comfort Controller:
Real Time Usage
Configuration
Decisions
Device Name
Use this decision to modify the 8 character device name.
Allowable Entries

LID = N/A
Description
Use this decision to modify the up to 24-character controller description.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = N/A
Comfort Controller
Location
Use this decision to modify the up to 24-character controller location.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = N/A
(blank)
Software Part Number

CEPP-130124-xx, where xx is based on the version. This is a nonconfigurable field.
Maintenance
Decision
Real Time Usage

This decision is only accessible with the LID or BEST++. This
decision displays the Comfort Controller's percentage of real time
usage. When the value in this decision equals 100%, the algorithms
and any custom programs will no longer run at their configured rate.
Valid Display
0 to 100%
571
Consumable
CONSUME
Loadshed
LDSHED
Consumable
This system function calculates the amount of energy or unit flow

used over time. A combination of up to 16 sensed discrete, pulsed
discrete, or analog inputs can be configured in each Consumable
equipment table. Up to four tables can exist per Comfort Controller.
For more information, refer to the Data Collection III Option Overview and Configuration Manual.
Decisions
The following decisions are applicable to this system function where

n is a number 1 through 16.
Point n Name
Point n Type
Configuration
Decisions
Point n Name
Use this decision to specify the analog or discrete point being
monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
PULSDI00
Point n Type
Use this decision to indicate the type of point being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Loadshed
Bldg. Supvr. = Discrete/Analog

LID = 0(Discrete) / 1(Analog)
Discrete
This system function associates a Loadshed Module Supervisory

part with the Comfort Controller's DO Time Clock or DO Time
Clock with Check algorithm. A total of 16 Loadshed Equipment
parts can be added to the Comfort Controller. This is no configuration required.
Once a Loadshed Equipment part is added to the controller, the
names of the Loadshed Tables will appear when using Speedy Data
Entry (pressing F7 from the ComfortVIEW and/or ComfortWORKS
controller configuration tool) to assign a Loadshed Table to the
Comfort Controller's DO Time Clock or DO Time Clock with
Check algorithms.
For additional information, refer to the Loadshed Option Overview
and Configuration Manual (808-555.)
572
Database Status
UPDATEDB
Database Status
This system function displays information about the Comfort Controller database. By viewing the maintenance decisions in this
system function, you can determine:
List of Maintenance
Decisions
if there is an invalid entry in a Comfort Controller table.

if you have exceeded the Comfort Controller's available memory
if the database is corrupted.
the amount of EEPROM and RAM memory space that is available in the Comfort Controller.

this system function. They provide useful information regarding the
status and configuration of this system function.
Database Error
EEPROM Error
RAM Error
Available Program Bytes
Available Data Bytes
Maintenance
Decisions
Database Error
If a Yes is displayed in the Database Error maintenance decision,
there is an invalid entry in one of the Comfort Controller Service
Configuration Tables. A Yes in this decision can also indicate that
you have exceeded the Comfort Controller's available memory.
Note:
Database items are created from their respective Service

Configuration Table. Each table (FNCxx-yy, HWxx-yy,
NUMSYS, SETPTDEF, SWxx-yy) is created in sequential
order. Items defined in the FNC01-24 Table are created
first. If a configuration error is encountered, the Comfort
Controller will stop updating the database at the point in
the respective Service Configuration Table where the error
occurred.
Valid Display
Yes/No
573
Database Status
UPDATEDB
EEPROM Error
When this decision displays a Yes, the Comfort Controller's database
configuration may be corrupted. To resolve this problem, download
the configuration to the controller and cycle power.
Valid Display
Yes/No
RAM Error
When this decision displays a Yes, the Comfort Controller's dynamic
data may be corrupted. To resolve this problem, cycle power.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Available Program Bytes

The decision will indicate the EEPROM memory space that is
currently available for additional functions or custom programs.
Refer to Appendix H in this manual for memory requirements for
any additional functions that may be required.
Valid Display
0 to 32767
Available Data Bytes

The decision will indicate the RAM space that is available for
additional functions or custom programs. Refer to Appendix H in
this manual for memory requirements for any additional functions
that may be required.
Valid Display
574
Comfort Controller 1600: 0 to 32767

Comfort Controller 6400: 0 to 131068

DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
Discrete Trace
Point
Decisions
This system function provides detailed trend information regarding

the performance of a discrete point over a period of time. Up to 48
values can be collected for each trace.
are optional.
*
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Control Point
Trace Channel
Trace Interval
Start Time Config
Start Day
Event State
Trace Mode
Power on Delay
The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system

function. They provide useful information regarding the status and
configuration of this system function. You can force the asterisked
decisions.
*
*

Control Point
Trace Channel
Point Traced
Start Time
Status
Buffer Full
Data Value (1-48)
Task Timer
575

DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
Configuration
Decisions

You must configure this decision to indicate the point being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Control Point
You must configure this decision to indicate a discrete point that determines
when the trace is started or stopped based on comparison to the Event State.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Trace Channel
Trace Channel defines the attributes of the trace parameters.
Trace Interval
You must configure this decision to indicate the time that must elapse
before the next Data Value is collected.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 120 minutes
1
Start Time Config

the Trace Mode configuration decision, you must configure this decision to indicate the time at which the first trace will occur.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
576
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
00.00

DTRACxxC
Function Type 202
Start Day
the Trace Mode configuration decision, you must configure this decision to specify the day on which the first trace will occur.
0 = Any Day
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
Allowable Entries
Default Value
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Sunday
0 to 7
0
Event State
Use this decision to configure the state used to compare with the control point to determine when to start or stop this trace.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0/1
0
Trace Mode
You must configure this decision to indicate the type of trace operation
to perform.
0
1
2
3
4
5
= Manual Start of Trace

(Trace starts and continues until another value is entered in this
decision.)
= Timed Start of Trace
(Trace stops when buffer is full.)
= Event Start of Trace
(Trace starts when Event State equals Control Point state.)
= Event Stop of Trace
(Trace stops when Event State equals Control Point state.)
= Manual Stop of Trace
(Trace stops immediately.)
= Manual Reset of Trace
(The trace resets to the value of 0, which is Manual Start of
Trace. All data clears.)
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 5
0
577

DTRACxxM
Function Type 202
Power on Delay
wait to activate this history function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
30

This decision displays the current state of the discrete point being traced.
Valid Display
Control Point
This decision displays the current value of the Control Point. This value acts as
a trigger based on the selected Trace Mode. If unconfigured, the Control Point
will not affect trace operation.
Valid Display
On/Off
Trace Channel
These decisions show the specific trace data for the displayed point.
Point Traced
This decision identifies the 8-character point name for the Discrete Trace
Point.
Valid Display
8-character name
Start Time
This decision indicates the time when the data gathering for this trace
began. It is dependent on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Valid Display
578
0:00 - 23:59

DTRACxxM
Function Type 202
Status
This decision indicates the current status of this trace function. It is dependent
on the Trace Mode and Event State selected.
Trace
Status
Mode
CONT TRC
EVT STOP
STRT TIM
STRT EVT
STOP TRC
RES BUFF
WAIT TRG
0
3
1
2
1 or 4
5
1 or 2
Valid Display
Description
Trace is running
Trace will stop when configured event occurs
Timed start trace is active (stops when buffer full)
Event start trace is active
Trace has been stopped
All data resets, then reverts to CONT TRC
Waiting for time or event trigger
One of seven items above
Buffer Full
This decision indicates whether all 48 data slots have been used.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Data Value
These decisions display up to 48 consecutive values for the trace point. The
most current value is displayed last.
Valid Display
Whatever is valid for the Trace Point.
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before the next execution
of this function. The trace function executes every 60 seconds.
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
579
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxC
Function Type 203
Internal
Consumable
This system function accumulates the amount of energy or unit flow

used daily. It collects the data in 15-minute (fast) or 30-minute
(slow) intervals. Thirty days of accumulated values can be stored.
The data is displayed in a top/down manner, from oldest to most
recent. This system function also stores the peak interval value and
its time and date.
The table below lists the permissible display units for the input point
being monitored and the internal consumable algorithm.
Decisions
Point
Display
Unit
Point
Cust. US
Point
Metric
Int. Cons.
Algorithm
Display Unit
Algorithm Algorithm
Cust. US
Metric
8
9
20
31
37
52
gpm
gph
kW
tons/h
gps
GPM
1/min
1/h
kW
tons/h
1/sec
LPS
35
35
19
54
35
35
gal
gal
kWh
tons
gal
gal

are optional.
*
580
liters
liters
kWh
kW
liters
liters
Consumable Input
Consumable
Consumable Interval
Reset Total Usage
Power on Delay
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxC
Function Type 203
List of
Maintenance
Decisions
The following maintenance decisions are applicable to this system function.

They provide useful information regarding the status and configuration of this
system function. You can force the asterisked decision.
*
Configuration
Decisions
Consumable Input
Consumable
Data Value (1 - 30)
Peak Value
Time Peak Occurred
Month
Date
Total Usage
Task Timer
Consumable Input
You must configure this decision to indicate the Pulsed Discrete Input Point
being monitored.
Note:
This point must support one of the permissible display units (engineering units) listed on the previous page.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
blank
Consumable
Consumable defines the attributes of the collection intervals.
Consumable Interval
Use this decision to choose either a fast or slow collection interval. The
fast interval collects data every 15 minutes. The slow interval collects
every 30 minutes.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Fast/Slow
Fast
Reset Total Usage

Use this decision to reset any previously collected data to zero.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Yes/No
No
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
0
581
Internal Consumable
CONSUxxM
Function Type 203
Maintenance
Decisions
Consumable Input
This decision displays the current value of the Consumable Input Point.
Valid Display
Consumable
This decision displays the collected data for the configured point.
Data Value
These decisions display up to 30 accumulated values for the configured
point. The most current value is displayed last.
Note:
If the Consumable Input Point was configured with invalid units, no

consumable data will be accumulated.
Valid Display
Peak Value
This decision displays the largest collected consumable for any interval over the
30-day period.
Valid Display
Time Peak Occurred
This decision displays the time the Peak Value was collected over the configured
interval 15 minutes (fast) or 30 minutes (slow).
Valid Display
00:00 to 24:00
Month
This decision displays the Month in which the Peak Value was collected.
Valid Display
1 to 12
Date
This decision displays the day on which the Peak Value was collected.
Valid Display
1 to 31
Total Usage
This decision displays the accumulated consumables total for the 30-day period.
Valid Display
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
582
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
LID Processor
This system function gives you the capability to:
Decisions
specify whether customary U.S. or metric units will be displayed

on the LID.
specify if the LID text should display in English or in the userspecified language.
change the date and time in the Comfort Controller's real time
clock.
change the LID's password.

are optional.
Units Standard
Language Translation
Password
Time
Day of Week
Month
Year
Update Clock
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Log In to Controller
Log Out of Controller
Task Timer
Units Standard
Use this decision to define the engineering conversion requirements
when using the LID to display status or configuration data. The
data can be presented as either a metric or customary U.S. value.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Metric/U.S.
U.S.
583
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
Language Translation
Use this decision to specify if the LID text should display in English or in the
user-specified foreign language. Please note that the LID can support English
and one other language. In order for this decisions to operate, you must create
the foreign language function and convert the text to the desired user language.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Yes/No
No
Password
Use this decision to change the eight-character password. You must enter a
password before logging onto the Comfort Controller with a LID.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00000000 to 999999999
1111
Time
Use this decision to set the time in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Enter the value in military time and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to
update the real time clock. Use a decimal point (.) instead of a colon (:) when
you configure using the LID.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00:00 to 24:00
00:00
Day of Week
Use this decision to set the day of week in the Comfort Controller's real time
clock. Enter the desired value and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to
update the real time clock.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
1
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Sunday
Month
Use this decision to set the month in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Enter the desired value and set the Update Clock decision to Yes to update the
real time clock.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
584
1 to 12
1
LID Processor
LIDPRxxC
Day
Use this decision to set the date in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
real time clock.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00 to 31
1
Year
Use this decision to set the year in the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
real time clock.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
00 to 99
95
Update Clock
Use this decision to indicate when the Comfort Controller's real time clock
should be updated with the values entered in the preceding configuration
decisions.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Yes/No
No
Power on Delay
Use this decision to determine how long after a power failure the real time
clock will wait before allowing the clock to be updated.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 65535 seconds
1
585
LID Processor
LIDPRxxM
Maintenance
Decisions
Log In to Controller
This decision identifies when a user is logging on to the Comfort Controller with
the LID. When the decision transitions to a 1, a user is requesting to log on.
Please note that this decision is set to 0 when the password is validated. Because
this transition occurs quickly, you will not normally be able to witness it.
Valid Display
0/1
Log Out of Controller

This decision identifies when a user has requested to log off the Comfort Controller with the LID. When the decision displays Yes, a user is requesting to log
off. Please note that this decision is set to No when the logoff is complete.
Because this transition occurs quickly, you will not normally be able to witness
it.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Task Timer
This decision displays the number of remaining seconds before this system
function executes again. This system function will execute every second
Valid Display
586
0 to 300 seconds
Real Time Clock

RTCCN00C
Real Time Clock
Decisions
This system function gives you the capability to:
broadcast current time on CCN.

configure the start of daylight saving.
configure the end of daylight saving.

are optional.
Time Broadcast Enable
Daylight Savings
Start Month
Start Day of Week
Start Week
Start Time
Start Advance
Stop Month
Stop Day of Week
Stop Week
Stop Time
Stop Back
Power on Delay
List of Maintenance
Decisions

Real Time Clock
Hour
Minute
Second
Day of Week
Month
Day
Year
Is Today a Holiday
Is Tomorrow a Holiday
Daylight Savings
Communication Status
Task Timer
587
Real Time Clock

RTCCN00C
Configuration
Decisions
Time Broadcast Enable

Use this decision to indicate whether the Comfort Controller will broadcast the
time and date to other system elements on the CCN.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

Disable
Daylight Savings
Daylight Savings gives you the capability to configure the start and end of
daylight saving.
Start Month
Use this decision to enter the month in which the real time clock will adjust
the time for the start of daylight saving time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 12
4
Start Day of Week

Use this decision to enter the day of the week in which the real time clock
will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time, where 1 = Monday.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 7
7
Start Week
Use this decision to enter the week of the month when the real time clock
will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5
3
Start Time
Use this decision to enter the time of day at which the real time clock will
adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time. Use a decimal, or
colon, to separate hours from minutes.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
588
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
02:00
Real Time Clock

RTCCN00C
Start Advance
Use this decision to enter the number of minutes by which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the start of daylight saving time. An entry of
0 will disable this feature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 360 minutes
60
Stop Month
Use this decision to enter the month in which the real time clock will adjust
the time for the end of daylight saving time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 12
10
Stop Day of Week

Use this decision to enter the day of the week on which the real time clock
will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time, where 1 = Monday.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 7
7
Stop Week
Use this decision to enter the week of the month in which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
1 to 5
3
Stop Time
Use this decision to enter the time of day at which the real time clock will
adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time. Use a decimal, or
colon, to separate hours from minutes.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Bldg. Supvr. = 00:00 to 23:59

LID = 00.00 to 23.59
02:00
Stop Back
Use this decision to enter the number of minutes by which the real time
clock will adjust the time for the end of daylight saving time. An entry of 0
will disable this feature.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
0 to 360 minutes
60
589
Real Time Clock

RTCCN00M
Power on Delay
must wait to activate this function after a power restart occurs.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
Maintenance
Decisions
0 to 65535 seconds
0
Real Time Clock

Real Time Clock displays current information about the Comfort Controllers
internal clock.
Hour
This decision displays the current hour of the day as it exists in the
Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Valid Display
0 to 23
Minute
This decision displays the current minute of the hour as it exists in the
Valid Display
0 to 59
Second
This decision displays the current second of the minute as it exists in
the Comfort Controller's real time clock.
Valid Display
0 to 59
Day of Week
This decision displays the current day of the week as it exists in the
Valid Display
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
1 to 7
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
7 = Sunday
Month
This decision displays the current month of the year as it exists in the
Valid Display
590
1 to 12
Real Time Clock

RTCCN00M
Day
This decision displays the current day of the month as it exists in the
Valid Display
1 to 31
Year
This decision displays the current year of the century as it exists in the
Valid Display
00 to 99
Is Today a Holiday
This decision indicates if today is scheduled to be a holiday. You
specify holidays in the Comfort Controller's HOLDYxxS Table.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Is Tomorrow a Holiday
This decision indicates if tomorrow is scheduled to be a holiday. You
specify holidays in the Comfort Controller's HOLDxxS Table.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Daylight Savings
This decision indicates if daylight saving time is in effect.
Valid Display
Yes/No
Communication Status
This decisions indicates if the Comfort Controller successfully completed the last time and date broadcast. The Comfort Controller broadcasts time and date twice a day at 1:00 am and 1:00 pm, or on
request of a CCN element.
Valid Display
0 = Successful Broadcast
1 = No Broadcast acknowledge received
Task Timer
Valid Display
0 to 300 seconds
591
Runtime
RUNTIME
Runtime
Decisions
This system function determines how long the configured discrete

points have been on. Up to 16 points can be configured in each
Runtime Table. Up to 4 tables can be configured. Each point is
read every minute to record the amount of runtime. This data is
then used by a CCN Data Collection III option. Once an hour, the
Data Collection supervisory part transmits an inquiry to the Comfort
Controller, and the Comfort Controller transmits back the runtime
value for each configured point. For more information about
Runtime, refer to Data Collection III Option Overview and Configuration Manual.
The following decisions are applicable to this system function,
where n is a number 1 through 16. You must configure at least one
point.
Point n Name
Point n Type
Configuration
Decisions
Point n Name
Use this decision to specify the discrete point being monitored.
Allowable Entries
Default Value

LID = 1 to 96 (6400), 1 to 32 (1600)
SENSDI00
Point n Type
Use this decision to indicate whether the point being monitored is a
normal on/off type.
Allowable Entries
Default Value
592

Normal
Configuration Sheets
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element #_____________
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: HW______________
(Table #)
HARDWARE POINTS DEFINITION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
1st Channel Type
VALUE
POINT NUMBER
0 - 14
1st Sensor or Units
See below.
1st Channel Name

2nd Channel Type
0 - 14
2nd Sensor or Units
See below.
2nd Channel Name

0 - 14
3rd Channel Type

3rd Sensor or Units
See below.
3rd Channel Name

4th Channel Type
0 - 14
4th Sensor or Units
See below.
4th Channel Name

5th Channel Type
0 - 14
5th Sensor or Units
See below.
5th Channel Name

6th Channel Type
0 - 14
6th Sensor or Units
See below.
6th Channel Name

7th Channel Type
0 - 14
7th Sensor or Units
See below.
7th Channel Name

8th Channel Type
0 - 14
8th Sensor or Units
See below.
8th Channel Name

Channel (I/O) Types
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Not used
AITemperature
AIMilliamp
AICustom Milliamp
AIVoltage
AICustom Voltage
DISensed Discrete
DIPulsed Discrete
Sensor Types*/Units**
Channel (I/O) Types
Not used
1 - 4 (sensor type)
1 - 5 (sensor type)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 6 (sensor type)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 37 (units)
1 - 56 (units)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DIDiscrete Latched
AOMilliamp
AOCustom Milliamp
AOVoltage
AOCustom Voltage
DODiscrete
DOStepper
Sensor Types*/Units**
1 - 37 (units)
1 - 4 (sensor type)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 4 (sensor type)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 37 (units)
1 - 56 (units)
* For a description of the sensor types, refer to Appendix B in this manual.

** For a description of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
593
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: SW______________
(Table #)
SOFTWARE POINTS DEFINITION SHEET

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
DECISION NAME
1st Channel Type
VALUE
POINT NUMBER
0-4
1st Sensor or Units
See below.
1st Channel Name

2nd Channel Type
0-4
2nd Sensor or Units
See below.
2nd Channel Name

0-4
3rd Channel Type

3rd Sensor or Units
See below.
3rd Channel Name

4th Channel Type
0-4
4th Sensor or Units
See below.
4th Channel Name

5th Channel Type
0-4
5th Sensor or Units
See below.
5th Channel Name

6th Channel Type
0-4
6th Sensor or Units
See below.
6th Channel Name

7th Channel Type
0-4
7th Sensor or Units
See below.
7th Channel Name

8th Channel Type
0-4
8th Sensor or Units
See below.
8th Channel Name

Channel (I/O) Types
0
1
2
3
4
Not used
Discrete Software
Analog Software
Network Input
Network Output
Units*
Not used
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 56 (units)
1 - 56 (units)
* For a description of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.

3/95
594
595
Sheet ______ of ________
17th Function Units

18th Function Type
18th Function Units
19th Function Type
*
0-56**
*
0-56**
*
0-56**
*
0-56**
*
0-56**
*
0-56**
2nd Function Type
2nd Function Units
3rd Function Type
3rd Function Units

4th Function Type
4th Function Units
5th Function Type
5th Function Units
6th Function Type
6th Function Units
7th Function Type
7th Function Units
0-56**
*
0-56**
14th Function Units
15th Function Type
15th Function Units
*Refer to Appendix J in this manual for a list of allowable entries.

**Refer to Appendix C in this manual for a list of allowable entries.
0-56**
*
13th Function Type
14th Function Type
0-56**
12th Function Units
13th Function Units
0-56**
*
*
0-56**
10th Function Units
11th Function Type
12th Function Type
10th Function Type
11th Function Units
0-56**
0-56**
24th Function Type

24th Function Units
9th Function Type
9th Function Units
*
0-56**
23rd Function Type

23rd Function Units
*
0-56**
8th Function Type
8th Function Units
0-56**
0-56**
0-56**
0-56**
0-56**
0-56**
0-56**
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
22nd Function Units
22nd Function Type
21st Function Units
21st Function Type
20th Function Units
20th Function Type
19th Function Units
17th Function Type
16th Function Units
0-56**
1st Function Units
DECISION NAME
16th Function Type
VALUE
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
1st Function Type
DECISION NAME
VALUE
F u n c t i o n D e f i n i t i o n S h e e t - A l g o r i t h m s , A l a r m s , Ti m e S c h e d u l e s , B r o a d c a s t , & L i n k a g e
(Table #)
8/95
Table Description:_________________________________________________________________________________ Table Name: FNC________________
Controller Name:___________________________________________________ Bus #________________________ Element #_______________________
NETWORK
COMFORT
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #_____________ Element #_____________
Table Description:_________________________________________________ Table Name: NUMSYS
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS DEFINITION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
Holidays
0 - 16
0 - 16
Consumables
0-4
Runtimes
0-4
Loadsheds
0 - 16
Language Conversion
VALUE
Yes/No
1/95
596
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________________ Table Name: SETPTDEF
SETPOINT DEFINITION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES*
Setpoint 01 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 02 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 03 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 04 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 05 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 06 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 07 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 08 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 09 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 10 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 11 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 12 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 13 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 14 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 15 Units
0 - 56
Setpoint 16 Units
0 - 56
VALUE
* For a description of the allowable entries, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
597
COMFORT
Sheet ______ of ________
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element #____________
Name of Algorithm:__________________________________________ Occurrence:__________________
ALGORITHM OR ALARM CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
VALUE
1/95
598
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPI_________
(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Input Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
High Input Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
Low Input Fault
0.0 to 22.0
mA
High Input Fault
0.0 to 22.0
mA
Externally Powered
VALUE
Yes/No
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPI_________

(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Input Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
High Input Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
Low Input Fault
0.0 to 22.0
mA
High Input Fault
0.0 to 22.0
mA
Externally Powered
*Allowable entries are based on the units you select.
VALUE
Yes/No
For a list of the units, refer to Appendix C in this manual.
1/95
599
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPO_________
(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Output Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
0.0 to 22.0
mA
VALUE
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CMAMPO_________

(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM MILLIAMP (CMAMPO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Output Endpoint
0.0 to 22.0
mA
0.0 to 22.0
mA
VALUE
1/95
600
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTI__________
(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Input Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
High Input Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
High Input Fault
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
Low Input Fault
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
VALUE
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTI__________

(Pt. #)
AI-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Input Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
High Input Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
High Input Fault
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
Low Input Fault
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
VALUE
For a list of the units, refer to Appendix C in this mauual.
1/95
601
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTO__________
(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Output Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
VALUE
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: CVOLTO__________

(Pt. #)
AO-CUSTOM VOLTAGE (CVOLTO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Low Output Endpoint
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
0.0 to 11.0
Volts
VALUE
1/95
602
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: DISCRO___________
(Pt. #)
DO-DISCRETE (DISCRO_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Output Logic Type
Normal/Invert
N/A
Minimum Off Time
0 to 3600
min
Minimum On Time
0 to 3600
min
Delay Time
0 to 3600
seconds
DECISION NAME
VALUE

(Pt. #)

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Output Logic Type
Normal/Invert
N/A
Minimum Off Time
0 to 3600
min
Minimum On Time
0 to 3600
min
Delay Time
0 to 3600
seconds
DECISION NAME
VALUE

(Pt. #)

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Output Logic Type
Normal/Invert
N/A
Minimum Off Time
0 to 3600
min
Minimum On Time
0 to 3600
min
Delay Time
0 to 3600
seconds
DECISION NAME
VALUE
1/95
603
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Controller Name:_______________________________ Bus #______________ Element # ____________
Table Description:________________________________________ Table Name: HOLIDAY___________
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
Start Month
1 to 12
Start Day
1 to 31
Duration
0 to 365
UNITS
VALUE
Days

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
Start Month
1 to 12
Start Day
1 to 31
Duration
0 to 365
UNITS
VALUE
Days

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
Start Month
1 to 12
Start Day
1 to 31
Duration
0 to 365
UNITS
VALUE
Days

DECISION NAME
604
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
Start Month
1 to 12
Start Day
1 to 31
Duration
0 to 365
UNITS
VALUE
Days
1/95
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: MAMP__I_________
(Pt #)
AI-MILLIAMP (MAMP_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE
1/95
605
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:____________________________________________ Table Name: OCCPN__________S
(Table #)
TIME SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME

Period 1: Day of Week
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
0-4
UNITS
Hours
Period 1: Occupied from

Period 1: Occupied to
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
00:00 to 24:00

00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min

Hr:Min
Hr:Min
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
00:00 to 24:00
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min

00000000/11111111

00:00 to 24:00

Thermostat Override
Time Delay
Timed Override Minutes
VALUE
00:00 to 24:00
00000000/11111111
00:00 to 24:00
00:00 to 24:00
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
Hr:Min
Up to 8 alphanum. char.
Up to 8 alphanum. char.
0 to 60
Min
0 to 240
Min
1/95
606
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: PULSDI___________
(Pt. #)
DI-PULSED DISCRETE (PULSDI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
Conversion Factor
Sample Time
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
0000.00 to 9999.99
pulses
1 to 1800
seconds
VALUE

(Pt. #)

DECISION NAME
Conversion Factor
Sample Time
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
0000.00 to 9999.99
pulses
1 to 1800
seconds
VALUE

(Pt. #)

DECISION NAME
Conversion Factor
Sample Time
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
0000.00 to 9999.99
pulses
1 to 1800
seconds
VALUE
1/95
607
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: SENSDI ___________
(Pt. #)
DI-SENSED DISCRETE (SENSDI_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
Output Logic Type
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
VALUE
normal/invert

(Pt. #)

DECISION NAME
Output Logic Type
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
VALUE
normal/invert

(Pt. #)

DECISION NAME
Output Logic Type
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
VALUE
normal/invert

(Pt. #)

DECISION NAME
Output Logic Type
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
VALUE
normal/invert
1/95
608
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:___________________________________________ Table Name: SETPT ____________
(Table #)
SETPOINT SCHEDULE CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
VALUE

(Table #)

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
VALUE

(Table #)

DECISION NAME
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
VALUE

1/95
609
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: STPMOT___________
(Pt. #)
DO-STEPPER MOTOR (STPMOT_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Stepping Rate
1 to 1000
steps/
seconds
Duty Cycle
33 to 100
DECISION NAME
VALUE

(Pt. #)

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Stepping Rate
1 to 1000
steps/
seconds
Duty Cycle
33 to 100
DECISION NAME
VALUE

(Pt. #)

ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
Stepping Rate
1 to 1000
steps/
seconds
Duty Cycle
33 to 100
DECISION NAME
VALUE
1/95
610
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: TEMP __I_________
(Pt #)
AI-TEMPERATURE (TEMP_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-10.0 to 10.0F
(-23.3 to -12.2C)
F (C)
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-10.0 to 10.0F
(-23.3 to -12.2C)
F (C)
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-10.0 to 10.0F
(-23.3 to -12.2C)
F (C)
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-10.0 to 10.0F
(-23.3 to -12.2C)
F (C)
VALUE
1/95
611
Sheet ______ of ________
COMFORT
NETWORK
Table Description:__________________________________________ Table Name: VOLT__I_________
(Pt #)
AI-VOLTAGE (VOLT_I_C) CONFIGURATION SHEET

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
-999.0 to 999.0
UNITS
VALUE
N/A

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE

(Pt #)

DECISION NAME
Offset
ALLOWABLE ENTRIES
UNITS
-999.0 to 999.0
N/A
VALUE
1/95
612
Appendixes
Appendix A
CCN
Compatibility
The Comfort Controller is compatible with the following Carrier

Comfort Network (CCN) products. This list is current as of the
printing of this manual. It is subject to change.
Compatible Products
Air Side Linkage
Purpose & Name of Document

Where You Can Find More
Information About Product
Operation and Configuration
The software routine in the Terminal

System Manager II (TSM II) that
determines the relationship between
the TSM II(s) and the air handler(s) in
a system.
Terminal System Manager II Overview and Configuration Manual
(808-777)
Autodial Gateway III
Serves as an interface device between

a Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)
and a modem. The Gateway and
modem enable the CCN to communicate over telephone lines with other
Autodial Gateway-equipped CCNs.
Autodial Gateway III Overview and
Configuration Manual
(808-827)
CCN DATAPORT
Interface device that allows a nonCarrier device such as a dumb terminal, personal computer, or non-Carrier
controller to read values in system
elements connected to a CCN Communication Bus.
CCN DATAPORT Product Data Sheet
(808-538)
(Continued)
613
Compatible Products
Data Collection III

Used to collect consumable, runtime,

and history data.
Data Collection III/Data Transfer
Product Data Sheet (808-777)
Data Transfer
Transmits point data from one system

element to another.
Data Collection III/Data Transfer
Product Data Sheet (808-777)
Facility Time Schedule
Used to specify occupancy periods

that vary in length on a day-to-day
basis.
Facility Time Schedule Overview and
(808-726)
Loadshed
Reduces peak electrical consumption

within a building by measuring usage
and shedding (turning off or otherwise reducing) selected building loads
when a present limit is surpassed.
Loadshed Overview and Configuration Manual (808-555)
(Continued)
614
Compatible Products
Maintenance Management

Extends capabilities of the Building

Supervisor so that is can provide hard
copy service requests (work orders)
when equipment requires attention.
Maintenance Management Overview
and Configuration Manual
(808-746)
Tenant Billing
Records the amount of time, or timed

override, that a building tenant exceeds occupancy hours that have been
scheduled in the CCN.
Stores a configured dollar amount that
is charged to the customer for each
hour of override.
Tenant Billing Overview and Configuration Manual (808-730)
Timed Force
Extends users flexibility in forcing

points. Transmits a force command to
a point in a CCN controller to override what would otherwise be the
value or state of the point.
Timed Force Overview and Configuration Manual (808-717)
(Continued)
615
Compatible Products
Water System Manager

Provides linking functions so that the

operation of equipment supplying
cooled and heated water can be enabled and disabled in response to
conditions in the space(s) being
served.
Supplies reset values to adjust setpoint
in the water cooling and heating
equipment.
Water System Manager Overview and
(808-734)
616
Appendix B
Standard Input
and Output
Devices
The tables below provide the engineering units, ranges, resolutions,

and accuracy for the standard input and output devices that the
Comfort Controller supports.
Temperature Types
Analog Input
Sensor Type
Range
(US = Customary US)
(M = Metric)
Resolution
YSI 10K Thermistor

Temperature Sensor
US: -40F to 245F

M: -40C to 118C
0.1F
0.055C
+/-1.0F
+/-0.55C
1K RTD
Temperature
US: -40F to 220F

M: -40C to 104C
0.1F
0.055C
+/-2.0F
+/-0.55C
5K Thermistor
Temperature Sensor
US: -40F to 245F

M: -40C to 118C
0.1F
0.055C
+/-1.0F
+/-0.55C
PT100 Temperature
Sensor
Not supported.
MCI 10K Thermistor

Temperature Sensor
US: -40F to 245F

M: -18C to 118C
0.1F
0.055C
+/-1.0F
+/-0.55C
NTC 100K Thermistor

Temperature Sensor
US: 72F to 282F

M: 22C to 139C
0.1F
0.055C
+/-1.0F
+/-0.55C
Type
Accuracy
(Continued)
617
Analog Input Types (Milliamp)
Analog Input
Sensor Type
Range
(US = Customary US)
(M = Metric)
Resolution
Relative Humidity Sensor

(2-wire, 4-20 mA input)
US: 0% Rh to 100% Rh
M: 0% Rh to 100% Rh
0.16% Rh
0.16% Rh
Static Pressure Sensor

US: 0" H20 to 5.0" H20

M: 0 P to 1244 P
0.008" H20 0.016" H20

1.6 P
3.2 P
4-20 Milliamp Transducer
US: 0 mA to 22 mA
M: 0 mA to 22 mA
0.025 mA
0.025 mA
+/-0.05 mA
+/-0.05 mA
Platinum RTD
Temperature Sensor
US: -10F to 245F

M: -22.3C to 118C
0.4F
0.22C
0.8F
0.44C
Pressure Sensor
US: 3 to 15 psi
M: 20.7 to 103.4 kPa
0.02 psi
0.13 kPa
0.04 psi
0.26 kPa
Type
Accuracy
0.32% Rh
0.32% Rh
(Continued)
618
Analog Input Types (Voltage)
Analog Input
Type
Sensor Type
Range
(US = Customary US)
(M = Metric)
Resolution
Accuracy
Relative Humidity Sensor
US: 0% Rh to 100% Rh
M: 0% Rh to 100% Rh
0.16% Rh
0.16% Rh
0.32% Rh
0.32% Rh
US: 0" H20 to 5.0" H20

M: 0 P to 1244 P
0.008" H20 0.016" H20

1.6 P
3.2 P
0 to 10 Vdc Transducer
(Maximum Impedance
>10K ohms)
US: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc

M: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc
0.0125 Vdc +/-0.025 Vdc

0.0125 Vdc +/-0.025 Vdc
Platinum RTD
Temperature Sensor
US: -10F to 245F

M: -22.3C to 118C
0.4F
0.22C
0.8F
0.44C
Pressure Sensor
US: 3 to 15 psi
M: 20.7 to 103.4 kPa
0.02 psi
0.13 kPa
0.04 psi
0.26 kPa
T-56 Space Temperature

Sensor with Setpoint
Adjustment
US: 0.0% to 100.0%

M: 0.0% to 100.0%
not applicable
not applicable
(Continued)
619
Analog Output Types (Milliamp)
Type
Analog Output
Sensor Type
Range
(US = Customary US)
(M = Metric)
Resolution
Accuracy
Percentage
0-100%,
(4-20 mA output)
CS: 0 to 100%
M: 0 to 100%
0.5%
0.5%
3.75%
3.75%
Percentage
100%-0%,
(4-20 mA output)
CS: 100% to 0%
M: 100% to 0%
0.5%
0.5%
3.75%
3.75%
Pressure
(0-22 mA output)
CS: 0 psi to 16.5 psi

M: 0 kPa to 113.9 kPa
0.64 psi
0.44 kPa
0.45 psi
3.1 kpa
4-20 mA
Maximum Load 600 ohms
CS: 0 mA to 22.0 mA
M: 0 mA to 22.0 mA
0.085 mA
0.085 mA
+/-.6 mA
+/-.6 mA
Note:
Accuracy does not include accuracy of the transducer.

The UT203 FID IO modules only support Milliamp Analog Output Type 4. If another milliamp analog output is required, configure the point as a Custom Milliamp
Output. For more information, refer to Custom Milliamp Output in the How To
Configure Points chapter of this manual.
(Continued)
620
Analog Output Types (Voltage)
Type
Analog Output
Sensor Type
Range
(US = Customary US)
(M = Metric)
Resolution
Accuracy
Percentage
0-100%,
(0-10 V)
CS: 0 to 100%
M: 0 to 100%
0.5%
0.5%
3.75%
3.75%
Percentage
100%-0%,
(0-10 V)
CS: 100% to 0%
M: 100% to 0%
0.5%
0.5%
3.75%
3.75%
Pressure
(0-11 V)
CS: 0 psi to 16.5 psi

M: 0 kPa to 113.9 kPa
0.64 psi
0.44 kPa
0.45 psi
3.1 kpa
0-11 Vdc
CS: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc

M: 0 Vdc to 11 Vdc
0.04 Vdc
0.04 Vdc
0.3 Vdc
0.3 Vdc
Note:
Accuracy does not include accuracy of the transducer.

The UT203 FID IO modules do not support Voltage Analog Output Types.
621
Appendix C - Allowable Entries for AI/AO Display Units

Metric
Customary US
Display
Units
Entry
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57-72
622
Units
Displayed
not used
F
%
"H20
mA
^F
VOLTS
psi
gpm
gph
kgpm
kgph
psig
lbs/hr
klbs/hr
Btu/hr
MBtu/h
"H20
"Hg
kWh
kW
degF
%Rh
AMPS
VOLTS
CFM
CFH
fpm
kcfm
kcfh
tons
tons/h
rpm
%open
hours
gals
Btu/lb
gps
sqft
CFM
sec
Hz
min
hours
rpm
kWh/p
pulses
uS
pH
usec
steps
feet
GPM
in Hg
tons
tons
no units
custom units
Conversion Limits
Low
High
-40.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-9999.99
0.00
0.00
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
0.00
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
245.00
100.00
5.00
22.00
9999.99
11.00
16.50
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
100.00
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
-9999.99
9999.99
Units
Displayed
not used
C
%
Pa
mA
^C
VOLTS
Kpa
1/min
1/h
m3/min
m3/h
kPa
kg/h
kg/hr
kW
kW
mmH2O
mmHG
kWh
kW
degC
%Rh
AMPS
VOLTS
m3/min
m3/h
m/sec
m3/min
m3/h
tons
tons/h
rpm
%open
hours
liters
kJ/kg
1/sec
m2
1/sec
sec
Hz
min
hours
rpm
kWh/p
pulses
uS
pH
usec
steps
meters
LPS
kPag
kW
KCal/min
no units
custom units
Conversion Limits
Low
High
-40.00
0.00
0
0.00
-5555.55
0.00
0.00
-37849.96
-37849.96
-37849.96
-37849.96
-68949.93
-4535.996
-4535.996
-2.93000
-2929.997
-253999.8
-253999.8
-9999.99
-9999.99
-5573.33
0.00
-9999.99
-9999.99
-283.1997
-283.1997
-50.79995
-283199.7
-283199.7
-9069.99
-9069.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-37849.96
-23267.78
-37849.96
-928.9991
-4718.995
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-9999.99
-3047.85
-630.7993
-35139.97
-35139.97
-503999.51
118.33
100.00
1244
22.00
5555.55
11.00
113.77
37849.96
37849.96
37849.96
37849.96
68949.93
4535.996
4535.996
2.93000
2929.997
253999.8
253999.8
9999.99
9999.99
5573.77
100.00
9999.99
9999.99
283.1997
283.1997
50.79995
283199.7
283199.7
9069.99
9069.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
37849.96
23232.18
37849.96
928.9991
4718.995
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
9999.99
3047.85
630.7993
35139.97
35139.97
503999.51
-9999.99
9999.99
Appendix D
Allowable Entries
for DI/DO Display
Units
Display
Units
Entry
Conversion
for Discrete
Value 1
Conversion
for Discrete
Value 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38-53
1
Start
Stop
Enable
Disable
On
Off
Open
Close
High
Low
Alarm
Normal
Enable
Emstop
Yes
No
True
False
Analog
Nonlin
Energy
Invert
Blank
Dirty
Heat
Up
Fast
Auto
Auto
Brine
Full
CCN
Tone
Or
Metric
Slave
Custom units
0
Stop
Start
Disable
Enable
Off
On
Close
Open
Low
High
Normal
Alarm
Emstop
Enable
No
Yes
False
True
Discrete
Linear
Flow
Normal
Blank
Clean
Cool
Down
Slow
Manual
On
Water
Reduce
Local
Pulse
And
US
Master
Custom Units
623
Appendix E
Alarm Information
Refer to the information in this appendix when configuring the

following decisions in an ALRMDEF Table:
Alarm Level
Alarm Source
Alarm Message
A description of each of these decisions and their allowable entries

are given below.
Alarm Level
In the Alarm Level configuration decision, enter the priority level (0

to 6) that will be assigned to this alarm. The value in this decision is
used when sorting alarms.
Alarm levels range from zero to six, with zero being the highest and
six the lowest priority. Each level, along with a description of its
meaning, is listed below.
624
Alarm Level
Meaning
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fire/Life Safety
Critical
Service
Reserved
Maintenance
Reserved
Control
Alarm Source
Alarm Description
Index
In the Alarm Source configuration decision, enter the type (0 to 7) that

represents the equipment generating the alarm. The value entered in this
decision is used when sorting alarms from the same source by level.
Type
Equipment
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fire
Security
Reserved
Boiler/Furnace
Chiller
Air Handler
System (POC functions)
Thermostat
In the Alarm Description Index configuration decision, enter the index

number (0 to 15) that represents the standard alarm message that will be
generated when the alarm condition exists.
Index Number
Standard Alarm Message
If you enter 0 in the Alarm Description Index

configuration decision or a date in the Alarm
Message decision, the standard alarm message
will be ignored.
discrete state
total time exceeds
starts, limit is
commanded state is
safety chain first out
interlock
outside limit of
interlocked, exceeds limit of
I/O channel failure
has illegal configuration
additional cooling capacity required
communications error
clock error
communication alarm buffer full
directory not available
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
625
Alarm Message
There are four Alarm Message configuration decisions which allow

you to create a custom message of up to 64 characters that will be
sent when the alarm condition exists. In each decision, you can enter
up to 16 ASCII character and/or control characters listed in the table
below.
A control character consists of # and a number 2 to 4. When an alarm
is generated, the control characters in the custom message are replaced by the actual data supplied by the alarm, i.e., the point name.
The examples below show custom messages with and without control
characters.
Example custom alarm message entered without control
characters:
Bob, SPT exceeded limit of 72F. Call Joe at Ext. 5555 when
problem is fixed.
Same custom alarm message entered using control characters:

Bob, #2 #4. Call Joe at Ext. 5555 when alarm returns to normal.
Control Characters
Will be replaced with . . . when

alarm is sent
#1
#2
#3
#4
Not used
8-character point name*
current variable value and units
exceeded limit and units
*ComfortWORKS replaces the 8-character point name with the 24character description.
626
Appendix F
LID Operation
The Local Interface Device (LID) is a CCN operator interface that

gives you the capability to view and modify all configuration and
service data for the Comfort Controller. The LID also gives you the
capability to override all point display and maintenance data.
This section includes information about the LIDs:
Menu structure
Default screen
Keypad
Status modes
This section also includes instructions on how to:
Menu Structure
Log on and log off

Access configuration and maintenance data
The LID operates on a hierarchy of four levels (menus).

The top level contains the LIDs major functions. Each function has
a corresponding key on the LID. For an explanation of each function
key, refer to Table F-2.
The second level separates the major functions (items) into types with
corresponding type numbers that you can use for quick access. For a
list of functions and type numbers, refer to the Function Types,
Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage Summary Sheet
located in Appendix H of this manual. This table is useful when you
want to quickly access a particular item, such as an algorithm.
The third level gives you the capability to access each occurrence of
an item. For example, your application may require two DO
Analog Comparison algorithms. Thus, your Comfort Controller
would have two occurrences of the DOAnalog Comparison algorithm.
The fourth level gives you the capability to access maintenance and
configuration data associated with the selected occurrence of the
item.
627
Default Screen
Keypad and
Display
Figure F-1 shows a LID displaying the Default screen. This screen
provides you with the 24-character controller name and the
controllers current time, date, and alarm status. This screen appears
when the LID is powered up and communicating with the Comfort
Controller or there is no keyboard activity for ten minutes.
The LID consists of a keypad with 8 function keys, 4 operative keys,

12 numeric keys (0 to 9, ., and -) and a two-line, alphanumeric
liquid crystal display (LCD). Each line on the LCD can display up
to 24 characters.
The LID is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure F-1
Local Interface Device
Comfort Controller
14:00
S TAT
FUNCTION
KEYS
SET
OPERATIVE
KEYS
10-10-94
EXPN
EDIT
S RVC
SCHD
HIST
CLEAR
ENTER
NUMERIC
KEYS
628
TEST
ALRM
FUNCTION
KEYS
ALGO
OPERATIVE
KEYS
The table below defines the purpose of the LIDs function keys.
Table F-2
Function Keys
Function
Keys
Use
S TAT
Status gives you access to maintenance

values and configuration data for points.
TEST
ALRM
Alarm gives you access to maintenance

and configuration data for
alarms.
HIS T
History gives you access to maintenance

and configuration data for history system
functions.
SRVC
Service gives you access to maintenance

and configuration data for service system
functions.
SET
Setup gives you access to configuration

data for setup system functions.
SCHD
ALGO
EXPN
EDIT
Schedule gives you access to maintenance

and configuration data for schedules.
Algorithm gives you access to maintenance and configuration data for AO, DO ,
and global algorithms. It also give you access
to BEST++ custom programs.
Edit gives you the capability to switch
from status mode to edit
(configuration) mode for the selected item.
(EXPN is not used in conjunction with the
Comfort Controller.)
629
The table below defines the purpose of the LIDs operative keys.
Table F-3
Operative Keys
Operative
Keys
Use
Clear performs three operations:
CLEAR
Cancels a data entry before you press

Enter, thus leaving the current value
unchanged
Returns a forced point to automatic

control
Redisplays the previous menu level
Enter performs two operations:
ENTER
Selects the displayed item, thus displaying

either its maintenance or configuration
data, depending on whether you are in the
status mode or the edit mode.
Accepts the value entered in a configuration decision as new configuration data or

as a force.
Down arrow displays the next configured

item or decision. When the last configured
item or decision is displayed, the LID redisplays the first configured item or decision.
For example, when you press the down arrow
key while viewing the last configuration
decision of an algorithm, the LID re-displays
the first configuration decision.
Up arrow Displays the previous configured item or decision.
630
The table below defines the purpose of the LIDs numeric keys.
Table F-4
Numeric Keys
Operative
Keys
1
Use
9
Numeric keys.
Performs two operations:
Performs two operations:
How to Log On
How to Log Off
Negates the value of numeric keys.

Clears current data entry value any time it is
not the first key pressed during the data
entry sequence.
Follow the instructions below to log on to the Comfort Controller.

1.
Press 3, SET, and ENTER.
2.
Key in your password and press ENTER.

Note:
How to Set the

Comfort
Controller's
Address
Separates items, such as an algorithm from

its occurrence or hours from minutes.
Serves as a decimal point in numeric values.
The default password is 1111. To change the default

password, press 3, SET, EDIT, and ENTER. Enter a
new password of up to 8 digits and press ENTER.
Follow the instructions below to set the Comfort Controller's address.

1.
Press 7, SRVC, ENTER and EDIT.
2.
Key in the CCN element number and press ENTER.
3.
Press the down arrow, enter the CCN bus number, and press
ENTER.
Follow the instructions below to log off the Comfort Controller.

1.
Press 3, SET, and ENTER.
2.
Press the down arrow, 1, and ENTER.
631
Viewing Modes
Status Mode
You can view items in either the status (maintenance) mode or the
edit (configuration) mode.
When you first power up the LID, it displays the Comfort

Controllers items in the status (maintenance) mode. You may view
the current value or status of an item in the status mode without
actually logging on to the Comfort Controller. Knowing the current
values or status of items can be useful when troubleshooting. For
example, you could determine if a point was forced.
Note:
How to Access
Items in the Status
Mode
Not all items have maintenance data. If the item you

select does not have maintenance data, the LID will
display No maintenance.
You can access maintenance data in the status mode in two ways:
Pressing the appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) once to

access a category (i.e., alarms) and then continuing to press that
key (ALRM) to scroll through all the items in that category (i.e.,
Limit Alarm, Setpoint Alarm, Discrete Alarm, First Out Alarm,
Runtime Alarm, and Number of Starts Alarm). Press ENTER to
display the first maintenance decision.
Note:
Scrolling by repeatedly pressing the function key,

displays the name of all the items in that category,
whether or not they are actually configured.
Scrolling by pressing the up or down arrow, displays
only the configured items within that category.
632
Pressing the appropriate LID numeric key (i.e., 2) and the

appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) to directly access an item
without having to scroll through all the items in that category.
Press ENTER to display the first maintenance decision.
Edit Mode
Because the LID first displays items in the status mode when it is
powered up, you must log on to the connected Comfort Controller
and press the edit key to switch to the edit mode.
While in the edit mode, you can change the configuration of items.
For example, you could change the value of an algorithms configuration decision.
For instructions on accessing items in the edit mode, refer to the
next topic, How to Access Items in the Comfort Controller.
Note:
How to Access
Items in the Edit
Mode
Not all items have configuration data. If the item you

select does not have configuration data, pressing the Edit
key will have no effect. The LID will display No configuration.
The two ways to access items in the edit mode are the same as in the
status mode, except for an additional step pressing the EDIT key.
You can access configuration data in the edit mode in two ways:
Pressing the appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM) once to

access a category (i.e., alarms), pressing EDIT, and then continuing to press that key (ALRM) to scroll through all the items
in that category (i.e., Limit Alarm, Setpoint Alarm, Discrete
Alarm, First Out Alarm, Runtime Alarm, and Number of Starts
Alarm).
Note:
Scrolling by repeatedly pressing the function key,

displays the name of all the items in that category,
whether or not they are actually configured.
Scrolling by pressing the up or down arrow, displays
only the configured items within that category.
Pressing the appropriate LID numeric key (i.e., 2), the appropriate function key (i.e., ALRM), and EDIT to directly access an
item without having to scroll through all the items in that category.
633
Use the table below as a reference to directly access Comfort Con-
Quick Access in
troller items using a LID in either the status or edit modes. For
Either Status or Edit example, to access maintenance data for the AOHeating VAV
Mode
algorithm, press 6, ALGO, and ENTER. To access configuration
data for the AOHeating VAV algorithm, press 6, ALGO, EDIT,

and ENTER. If your database consisted of two AOHeating VAV
algorithms and you wished to access the second one, you could
press 6, . (decimal), 2, ALGO, EDIT, and ENTER.
Table F-5
Quick Access to Items
LID Function Keys
LID
Num. Algorithms
Key (ALGO)
Status
(STAT)
History
(HIST)
Service
(SRVC)
Alarm
(ALRM)
Setup
(SET)
Schedules
(SCHD)
1 ........ AOAdaptive Control ......... Hardware Points ............ Alarm History ............ Function Definition ... Limit ...... Set Clock ..................... Occupancy
2 ........ AOCooling CV ................... Software Points .............. Analog Point Trace .... Channel Definition .... Setpoint .. Real Time Clock ......... Setpoint
3 ........ AOCooling VAV ................ Temperature Input ........ Discrete Point Trace .. System Definition ...... Discrete .. Controller Password .. Holiday
4 ........ AOFan Tracking ................ Milliamp Input ............... Consumable Channel Setpoint Definition .... First out ........................................ S/W Setpoint
5 ........ AOHeating CV ................... Custom Milliamp Input . Internal Consumable . Database Control ....... Runtime ........................................ Network Time
6 ........ AOHeating VAV ................ Voltage Input .................. Runtime Channel ...... Comfort Controller ... # of starts
7 ........ AOHumidity Control ......... Custom Voltage Input .......................................... CCN Control
8 ........ AOMixed Air CV w IAQ ... Sensed Discrete Input .......................................... LID Preferences
9 ........ AOMixed Air VAV w IAQ Latched Discrete Input
10 ...... AOPermissive Intrlock ...... Pulsed Discrete Input
11 ...... AOReset .............................. Milliamp Output
12 ...... AOShared Transducer ...... Custom Milliamp Output
13 ...... AOStatic Pressure .............. Voltage Output
14 ...... DOAnalog ........................... Custom Voltage Output
15 ...... DODX-Staging VAV .......... Discrete Output
16 ...... DOElectric Heat CV .......... Stepper Motor Output
17 ...... DOElectric Heat VAV ....... Discrete Software Point
18 ...... DOEnthalpy Comparison .. Analog Software Point
19 ...... DOInterlock ....................... Network Data Out
20 ...... DOLighting Control .......... Network Data In
21 ...... DOPermissive Interlock
22 ...... DOPump Control
If you are in the edit mode and wish to
Note:
23 ...... DOProp Thermo
24 ...... DOProp Thermo 2 Pipe
switch to the status mode, you can
25 ...... DOProp Thermo 4 Pipe
press CLEAR or press EDIT again.
26 ...... DOStaged Thermostat
27 ...... DOStaging Control
28 ...... DOTime Clock
29 ...... DOTime Clock w Check
30 ...... AOSS Schedule
31 ...... Network Broadcast
32 ...... Linkage/AOSS Schedule
33 ...... NTFC w Enthalpy Check
34 ...... Sensor Group
35 ...... WSM Air Source
36 ...... WSM Cool Source
37 ...... Custom Program
634
Appendix G
How to Configure
a Newly Installed
Comfort Controller
Using a LID
Introduction
Appendix G, in conjunction with Appendix H, details the procedures necessary to configure a Comfort Controller using the hand
held Local Interface Device (also known as the HSIO II.) While
these procedures are technically correct, other more expedient
methods for controller configuration exist, such as the Network
Service Tool's Quickstart function, and the ComfortVIEW and
ComfortWORKS controller configuration tool. It is recommended
that you consider these other options before undertaking a full
controller configuration using the LID.
When installing a Comfort Controller, you must perform a number
of steps in a particular order. These steps are grouped into two
procedures:
Creating the Comfort Controllers database using the ServiceConfig Tables

Configuring the database using the configuration tables
The term define, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

specify information about the items being selected in the ServiceConfig Tables. You must specify information such as channel
types, sensor type or units, channel names, functions types and
function units. For example, the AO-Cooling CV algorithms
function type is 2 and its function units might be 2, which indicates
0100%.
The term configure, as it is used in relation to the Comfort Controller, means to specify to the Comfort Controller the information that
it needs to control and monitor HVAC devices in the desired manner. For example when configuring the AO-Cooling CV algorithm,
you must enter information such as the AO point that is controlling
the air handlers chilled water valve and the Sensor Group or space
temperature sensor that is providing the space temperature inputs.
635
In a newly installed Comfort Controller, the database is effectively a

blank page. Based on your application, you decide which algorithms, points, alarms, schedules, or system functions are needed to
create the database. The database, therefore, only consists of the
features and functions required by your application.
You select and define the required items in configuration tables.
These tables are listed below.
Table G-1
Configuration Tables
636
Table Name
Purpose
FNCxx-yy
Create a combination of up to 24 of the

following functions in a Comfort Controller
1600 or up to 96 in a Comfort Controller
6400: AO, DO, and global (i.e., AOSS,
Linkage) algorithms, alarms, and time
schedules.
HWxx-yy
(hardware points)
Create up to 8 hardware points per table

for a total of 16 points in a Comfort Controller 1600 or 64 points in a Comfort
Controller 6400
NUMSYS
Create up to 16 holidays, up to16 network

time schedules, up to 4 Consumable tables
of up to 16 schedules each, up to 4 Runtime
tables of up to 16 schedules each, and up to
16 Loadshed tables.
SETPTDEF
Create up to 16 setpoint schedules
SWxx-yy
(software points)
Create up to 8 software points per table

for a total of 16 points in a Comfort Controller 1600 or 32 points in a Comfort
Controller 6400
UPDATEDB
Update the Comfort Controllers database
Configuration
Process
Creating the Database
Follow the steps below to configure a newly installed Comfort

Controller. Only complete the steps needed to configure your
application. For example, if your application does not require
software points, then omit Steps 3, h through l.
1.
Complete the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point

Configuration Sheets located in Appendix H (Quickstart) of
this manual. Use these sheets as a reference when creating
the database.
2.
Connect the LID to the Comfort Controller, log on, and set
the Comfort Controller's address. For instructions on connecting the LID, refer to the Comfort Controller Installation
and Start-up Manual. For instructions on how to log on and
set the address, refer to Appendix F in this manual.
3.
Configure each HWxx-yy and SWxx-yy table by completing

the steps below. In these steps you are defining the hardware
points, and then the software points, in groups of eight points
per table.
a.
Press 2, SRVC, EDIT (if in status mode), and ENTER to

display the HW01-08 Table.
b.
Press ENTER to display the first configuration decision,

1st Channel Type.
c.
Enter the channel type and press ENTER.
d.
Press the down arrow to display the next configuration

decision, 1st Sensor or Units.
e.
Enter the sensor type or units and press ENTER.
f.
Repeat Steps a through e for each point.
g.
Press CLEAR to back up a level, then press the down

arrow to access the HW09-16 Table.
If you must configure this table, repeat steps b through f.
If you do not have to configure more hardware points,
but do have to configure software points, press the down
arrow until the SW65-72 Table is displayed.
h.
Press ENTER to display the first software point configuration decision, 1st Channel Type.
i.
Enter the channel type and press ENTER.

637
4.
j.

decision, 1st Sensor or Units.
k.
Enter the sensor type or units and press ENTER.
l.
Repeat Steps h through k for each table.
Configure the SETPTDEF Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining the engineering units
(degrees F, % RH, inches of water, etc.) for each Setpoint
Schedule.
Note:
5.
638
Any Setpoint Schedule left at 0 is undefined and not

created.
a.

display the first configuration decision in the SETPTDEF
Table, Setpoint 01 Units.
b.
Enter the engineering units for the first Setpoint Schedule and press ENTER.
c.

decision, Setpoint 02 Units.
e.
Repeat Steps b and c as until you have defined the

engineering unit for all the Setpoint Schedules.
Configure the FNCxx-yy Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are defining each desired algorithm, alarm, time schedule, broadcast and linkage routine in
the following steps:
a.

display the first configuration decision in the table, 1st
Function Type.
b.
Enter the function type and press ENTER.
c.

decision, 1st Function Units.
d.
Enter the engineering units and press ENTER.

An entry of 0 will display the function's default unit. For
a list of algorithm and alarm default units, refer to the
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet located in
Appendix H of this manual.
6.
e.
Press the down arrow to display the next decision.
f.
Repeat Steps b through e until you have defined all of the

functions.
Configure the NUMSYS Table by completing the steps below.

In these steps you are defining the number of Holiday Schedules, Network Time Schedules, Consumables, Runtimes, and
Loadsheds required. You are also indicating if language
conversion will be performed.
a.

display the first configuration decision in the NUMSYS
Table, Holidays.
b.
Enter the quantity of desired Holiday Schedules and press

ENTER.
c.

decision, Network Time Schedules.
d.
Enter the quantity of desired Network Time Schedules

and press ENTER.
e.

decision, Consumables.
f.
Enter the quantity of desired Consumables and press

ENTER.
g.

decision, Runtimes.
h.
Enter the quantity of desired Runtimes and press ENTER.

639
7.
i.

decision, Loadsheds.
j.
Enter the quantity of desired Loadshed Tables and press

ENTER.
k.

decision, Language Conversion.
l.
If necessary, press 1 to toggle the default from No to Yes.
Configure the UPDATEDB Table by completing the steps

below. In these steps you are updating the Comfort
Controllers database with the items selected in the ServiceConfig Tables.
a.
Press 5 SRVC, EDIT (if in status mode), and ENTER to

display the configuration decision, Update Database.
b.
Press the 1 to toggle the default from No to Yes.
Note:
Although you may not see the LID toggle the value
from No to Yes because the change occurs so
quickly, you can verify that the update is occurring
by watching the Comfort Controllers red LID blink
at the rate of 5 Hz. The download time varies with
the size of the database.
How to Change
Default Point Names
and Descriptions
You must use a Network Service Tool or Building Supervisor III to

change default point names and descriptions. For instructions, refer
to the How to Configure a Newly Installed Comfort Controller
chapter of this manual.
Configuring the
Database
Using the configuration sheets and Table G-1 in this manual as

references, enter the appropriate values in the configuration tables
for points, algorithms, alarms, etc.
This completes the configuration process. You can now view point
values and statuses, and force points.
640
Appendix H
Configuration
Sheets for LIDbased
Configuration
Appendix H, in conjunction with Appendix G, details the procedures necessary to configure a Comfort Controller using the hand
held Local Interface Device (also known as the HSIO II.) While
these procedures are technically correct, other more expedient
methods for controller configuration exist, such as the Network
Service Tool's Quickstart function, and the ComfortVIEW and
ComfortWORKS controller configuration tool. It is recommended
that you consider these other options before undertaking a full
controller configuration using the LID.
The configuration sheets included in this section are designed to
facilitate LID-based controller configuration and are not appropriate
for use with PC-based configuration tools. A set of Microsoft Excelbased wire lists and configuration sheets is available from Carrier
for use with Carrier's PC-based configuration tools.
This appendix is a handy reference that provides you with forms and
reference sheets to configure the Comfort Controller as quickly as
possible using the LID. This tear-out section provides the best way
to quickly see the big configuration picture plus some important
details.
After reading this section and photocopying and completing the
configuration sheets, refer to the How to Configure a Newly Installed Comfort Controller chapter of this manual for step-by-step
instructions on configuring a Comfort Controllers database using a
Building Supervisor or Network Service Tool. For instructions on
configuring a Comfort Controllers database using a LID, refer to
Appendix G in this manual.
This section consists of the following reference and configuration
sheets:
Reference Sheets
Sample 6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
Function Types, Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage
Summary Sheet
Types/Units Reference Sheet
Comfort Controller Function Requirements
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet
641
Configuration Sheets
1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet
6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet
The configuration sheets provide a convenient means of organizing
all hardware and software point configuration information used in
configuring the Service-Config Tables. A sample of a completed
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet is included.
The Function Types, Default Names and EEPROM Memory Usage
Summary Sheet lists the eight-character default names, function
types, and memory usage of all the Comfort Controller functions. It
also lists the default names and memory usage of hardware and
software points, and miscellaneous tables, and the default names for
the Service-Config Tables.
The Types/Units Reference Sheet uses an at-a-glance approach to
provide the allowable entries for all sensor types and units. Refer to
Appendixes B through D for further details such as range, resolution, accuracy, and metric conversion limits.
The Comfort Controller Function Requirements sheet assists you in
determining the requirements for configuring a function by showing
you the functions points, schedules, and system functions.
The Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet assists you in
configuring the FNCxx-yy Tables Function Unit decision by indicating the pre-configured algorithm and alarm engineering units.
Those units that are not pre-configured are indicated with **.
642
643
644
645
5K Thermistor
Temperature
Sensor
PT100
Temperature
Sensor
MCI 10K
Thermistor
Temperature
Sensor
NTC 100K
Thermistor
Temperature
Sensor
Relative Humidity
Sensor
Platinum RTD
Temperature Sensor
Pressure Sensor
4-20 Milliamp
Transducer
Function
Units
Setpoint
Type
Pressure Sensor
T-56 Space
Temperature
Sensor with Setpoint
Adjustment
5
6
0 to 10 Vdc
Transducer
(Maximum
Impedance
>10K ohms)
Platinum RTD
Temperature
Sensor
Static Pressure
Sensor
Relative Humidity
Sensor
Analog Input
Sensor Type
Type
Type 3
Cust mA
Input
Analog Input
Sensor Type
1K RTD
Temperature
Type
YSI 10K
Thermistor
Temperature
Sensor
Analog Input
Sensor Type
Type
Type 1 Type 2
Temp
mA
Inpt
Input
not used
F
%
"H20
mA
^F
VOLTS
psi
gpm
gph
kgpm
kgph
psig
lbs/hr
klbs/hr
Btu/hr
MBtu/h
"H20
"Hg
kWh
kW
degF
%RH
AMPS
VOLTS
CFM
CFH
fpm
kcfm
kcfh
tons
tons/h
rpm
%open
hours
gals
Btu/lb
gps
sqft
CFM
sec
Hz
min
hours
rpm
kWh/p
pulses
uS
pH
usec
steps
feet
GPM
in Hg
tons
tons
no units
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Display
Units
Units
Displayed
Entry
Pa
mA
^C
VOLTS
Kpa
1/min
1/h
m3/min
m3/h
kPa
kg/h
kg/h
kW
kW
mmH2O
mmHG
kWh
kW
degC
%RH
AMPS
VOLTS
m3/min
m3/h
m/sec
m3/min
m3/h
tons
tons/h
rpm
%open
hours
liters
kJ/kg
1/sec
m2
1/sec
sec
Hz
min
hours
rpm
kWh/p
pulses
uS
pH
usec
steps
meters
LPS
kPag
kW
KCal/min
no units
not used
C
%
Units
Displayed
Pressure
(0-22 mA output)
4-20 mA
Maximum Load
600 ohms
(4-20 mA output)
Percentage
100% - 0%,
(4-20 mA output)
Percentage
0 - 100%,
Type
0 - 11 Vdc
Pressure
0 - 11V
0- 10 V
Percentage
0 - 100%,
Percentage
100% - 0%,
0 - 10 V
Type 14
Stepper
Motor
Analog Output
Device Type
Type
Type 12 Type 13
Cust Volt Discrete
Output Output
Analog Output
Device Type
Type 11
Volt
Output
Types/Units Reference Sheet

Hardware Point Types for HWxx-yy Table
Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 Type 7 Type 8 Type 9 Type 10
Volt Cust Volt Sensed Pulsed Latch
mA
Cust mA
Input
Input
DI
DI
DI
Output Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Display
Units
Entry
1
Start
Stop
Enable
Disable
On
Off
Open
Close
High
Low
Alarm
Normal
Enable
Emstop
Yes
No
True
False
Analog
Nonlin
Energy
Invert
Blank
Dirty
Heat
Up
Fast
Auto
Auto
Brine
Full
CCN
Tone
Or
Metric
Slave
Conversion
for Discrete
Value 1
0
Stop
Start
Disable
Enable
Off
On
Close
Open
Low
High
Normal
Alarm
Emstop
Enable
No
Yes
False
True
Discrete
Linear
Flow
Normal
Blank
Clean
Cool
Down
Slow
Manual
On
Water
Reduce
Local
Pulse
And
US
Master
Conversion
for Discrete
Value 0
Software Point Types for SWxx-yy Table

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Type 4
Discr Analog Net In Net Out
Points Points
Points
Points
Rev. 12/00
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
Index
Index
1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 14,16,

1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet 14, 16,
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet14, 16,
6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet 14, 16,
A
Accuracy
input/output devices 617
Adding the Comfort Controller 14
Address Setting 14, 21
AI/AO Display Units
allowable entries 622
Airside Linkage 484
Alarm Description Index 624
Alarm Level 624
Alarm Message 624
Alarm Source 624
Alarms
definition 511
Discrete State 512
First Out alarm 520
Limit alarm 529
Number of Starts alarm 538
Runtime alarm 545
Setpoint Limit alarm 552
Algorithm
definition 9, 93
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet 641
Algorithms
analog algorithms
AO-Adaptive Control 95
AO-Cooling CV 105
AO-Cooling VAV 118
AO-Fan Tracking 131
AO-Heating CV 141
AO-Heating VAV 155
AO-Humidity Control 170
AO-Mixed Air CV w IAQ 179
AO-Mixed Air VAV w IAQ 197
AO-Permissive Intrlock 213
AO-Reset 221
AO-Shared Transducer 231
AO-Static Pressure 247
function types 93
discrete algorithms
DO-Analog Comparison 255
DO-DX Staging VAV 262
DO-Electric Heat CV 278
DO-Electric Heat VAV 294
DO-Enthalpy Comparison 311
DO-Interlock 317
DO-Lighting Control 322
DO-Permissive Intrlock 326
DO-Proportional Thermostat 335
DO-Proportional Thermostat 2 Pipe 347
641,
641,
641,
641,
649
650
651
652
DO-Pump Control 369

DO-Staged Thermostat 381
DO-Staging 393
DO-Time Clock 406
DO-Time Clock with Check 413
function types 94
global algorithms
function types 94
Linkage/AOSS Schedule 444
Network Broadcast 440
NTFC w Enthalpy Check 466
Occupancy 477
Sensor Group 478
WSM Air Source 484
WSM Cool Source 490
Allowable Entries
AI/AO display units 622
DI/DO display units 623
ALRMDEF Table 624
Analog Software Point 28
description 28
maintenance decisions, description of
maintenance decisions, list of 28
typical application 28
Analog Trace Point 566
configuration decisions, description of
configuration decisions, list of 566
description 566
description 95
AO-Cooling CV 105
description 105
AO-Cooling VAV 118
description 118
AO-Fan Tracking 131
description 131
28
567
569
98
102
109
114
122
127
134
137
653
AO-Heating CV 141
description 141
AO-Heating VAV 155
description 155
description 170
description 179
description 197
description 213
AO-Reset 221
description 221
description 231
description 247
654
145
151
159
165
173
176

AOSS Schedule 423
Adaptive Optimal Start 430, 436
Adaptive Optimal Stop 431, 437
AOSS Setpoint Schedule 435
AOSS Time Schedule 433
description 423
factors that affect offset calculations
K Factor 424
start mode 424
stop mode 424
T56 Slider Bias 432, 439
253
429
424
432
B
184
192
BEST++ 12
downloading 22
Broadcast 440
enabling time 588
C
201
208
216
219
224
228
235
242
250
CCN Compatibility 613

Comfort Controller
1600
description 7
supported sensors and devices 7
6400
description 5
HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) 7
supported sensors and devices 6
supported UT203 FID Modules 7
database description 9
function requirements, summary of 641
language conversion 12
operator interfaces 5
purpose 5
types 5
Comfort Controller Function Requirements 641
Communication Status, determining 591
Configuring
Alarms 511, 624
Discrete State alarm 512
First Out alarm 520
Limit alarm 529
Number of Starts alarm 538
Runtime alarm 545
Setpoint Limit alarm 552
algorithms 93
AO-Cooling CV 105
AO-Cooling VAV 118
AO-Fan Tracking 131
AO-Heating CV 141
AO-Heating VAV 155

AO-Reset 221
AOSS Schedule 423
DO-Interlock 317
DO-Permissive Interlock 326
DO-Pump Control 369
DO-Staging 393
DO-Time Clock 406
Occupancy 477
Sensor Group 478
WSM Air Source 484
WSM Cool Source 490
Building Supervisor III, with a 13
Comfort Controller, newly installed 13
configuration tables 10, 20
conversion equation 30
database 13
FNCxx-yy Table 16
HWxx-yy Table 16
Network Service Tool, with a 13
NUMSYS Table 17
points 27
analog software 28
custom milliamp input 30
custom milliamp output 35
custom voltage input 40
custom voltage output 45
discrete output 50
discrete software point 55
latched discrete input 57
milliamp input 59
milliamp output 63
network input 66
network output 70
pulsed discrete input 73
sensed discrete input 77
stepper motor output 80
temperature input 83
voltage input 86
voltage output 89
procedure 14
schedules 495
Holiday Schedule 496
Network Time Schedule 498
Occupancy Schedule 501
Setpoint Schedule 499
Time Schedule 501
Service-Config Tables 10, 13, 16
FNCxx-yy Table 16, 93, 511
HWxx-yy Table 16
NUMSYS Table 17
SETPTDEF Table 17
SWxx-yy Table 18
UPDATEDB Table 18
SETPTDEF Table 17
SWxx-yy Table 18
system functions 563
Consumable 572
Ctlr-ID 571
Discrete Trace Point 575
Internal Consumable 580
Real Time Clock 587
Runtime 592
UPDATEDB Table 18
Consumable 572
Configuration decisions, description of 572
description 572
Creating the Database 13, 20
Ctlr-ID 571
description 571
maintenance decision 571
pre-configured decisions, description of 571
pre-configured decisions, list of 571
Custom Milliamp Input Point 30
configuration decisions, description of 31
description 30
maintenance decisions, description of 33
Custom Milliamp Output Point 35
description 35
Custom Programming 12
Custom Voltage Input Point 40
description 40
655
Custom Voltage Output 45

description 45
D
Database
configuration errors, encountering 19
configuring 10, 13
creating 10, 13, 20
description 9
size 9
updating 15, 18
uploading 19
verifying 19, 22
DBSTATUS
DBSTATUS Maintenance Screen 19
Default Names 644
Default Names, summary of 641
DI/DO Display Units
allowable entries 623
Discrete Output Point 50
description 50
Discrete Software Point 55
description 55
description 512
description 575
description 255
typical applications 255
656
573
52
53
55
513
518
576
578
258
260
266

description 262
description 278
description 294
description 311
DO-Interlock 317
description 317
description 322
DO-Permissive Intrlock 326
description 326
control modes 335
description 335
operating modes 335
control modes 347
description 347
273
282
288
298
304
313
315
319
321
324
325
329
332
339
344
351

operating modes 347
control modes 358
description 358
operating modes 358
DO-Pump Control 369
activating primary pump 369
description 369
control modes 381
description 381
operating modes 381
DO-Staging 393
description 393
DO-Time Clock 406
description 406
description 413
Downloading
BEST++ 22
controller 21
existing database 20
status messages 21
E
Engineering Units
input/output devices
617
356
362
367
373
F
First Out Alarm
description 520
Flow Diagrams
interpreting 10
FNCxx-yy Table 15, 16, 93, 511
Force Levels
points 33
Function Requirements 646, 647
Function Types 644
G
378
385
391
Global Algorithms
AOSS Schedule 423
Occupancy 477
Sensor Group 478
WSM Air Source 484, 493
WSM Cool Source 490
H
396
402
409
411
Hardware and Software Point Configuration

Sheets 14, 16, 649, 650, 651, 652
Holiday
determining if today is a holiday 591
determining if tomorrow is a holiday 591
Holiday Schedule
description 496
HWxx-yy Table 15, 16
I
416
420
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) 179, 190, 196, 197, 206, 211
Initializing the Controller 21
description 580
permissible display units 580
L
Language Conversion 12
Latched Discrete Input Point 57
description 57
657

LID 627
accessing items
directly (reference chart) 634
edit mode 633
status mode 632
configuring
Comfort Controller, newly installed
default screen 628
edit (configuration) mode 632
function keys 629
logging on 631
menu structure 627
numeric keys 631
operative keys 630
status (maintenance) mode 632
LID Processor
description 583
Limit Alarm
description 529
Adaptive Optimal Start 449, 454
Adaptive Optimal Stop 452, 462
applicable algorithms 445
description 444
Linkage Setpoint Schedule 457
Linkage Time Schedule 456
Local Interface Device 627
accessing items
directly (reference chart) 634
edit mode 633
status mode 632
configuring
Comfort Controller, newly installed
default screen 628
edit (configuration) mode 632
function keys 629
logging on 631
menu structure 627
numeric keys 631
operative keys 630
status (maintenance) mode 632
M
Memory Usage, summary of
658
641
635
583
586
531
536
449
453
635
Milliamp Input Point 59

description 59
Milliamp Output Point 63
description 63
Mixed Air Dampers 179, 197
Modify
controller 20
point descriptions 19
Service-Config Tables 20
Morning Warm-up 294, 307
description 155
maintenance decisions 166
N
description 440
Network Input Point 66
description 66
Network Output Point 70
description 70
description 498
Night Time Free Cooling 466
description 466
description 538
NUMSYS Table 15, 17
441
443
66
67
70
71
469
474
539
543
Occupancy 477
Occupancy Schedule
configuration rules 502, 503
description 501
sample 503
timed override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509
typical application 502, 503
Operator Interfaces 5
RAM flush 20
Ranges
Real Time Clock 587
description 587
Resolutions
Runtime 592
description 592
Runtime Alarm
description 545
P
Point Configuration Sheets 14, 16
Point Descriptions
modifying 19
Points
analog software 28
custom milliamp input 30
custom milliamp output 35
custom voltage input 40
custom voltage output 45
description 27
discrete output 50
discrete software point 55
latched discrete input 57
milliamp input 59
milliamp output 63
network input 66
network output 70
pulsed discrete input 73
sensed discrete input 77
stepper motor output 80
supported by 1600, number of 27
supported by 6400, number of 27
temperature input 83
voltage input 86
voltage output 89
PROM
upgrading 20
Pulsed Discrete Input Point 73
description 73
Q
Quickstart 14, 641
1600 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 641
1600 Software Point Configuration Sheet 641
6400 Hardware Point Configuration Sheet 641
6400 Software Point Configuration Sheet 641
Algorithm and Alarm Units Summary Sheet 641
default names, summary of 641
function types, summary of 641
memory usage, summary of 641
Types/Units Reference Sheet 641
588
590
592
546
550
S
Schedules
definition 495
Holiday Schedule 496
Network Time Schedule 498
Occupancy Schedule 501
Setpoint Schedule 499
Time Schedule 501
Sensed Discrete Input Point 77
description 77
Sensor Group 478
description 478
sensor values-high, low, average 478
Service-Config Tables 10
accessing 14
configuration errors, encountering 19
configuring 13, 14, 16
FNCxx-yy 15, 93, 511
HWxx-yy 15
modifying (caution) 20
NUMSYS 15
order of 19
SETPTDEF Table 15, 499
SWxx-yy 15
UPDATEDB 15, 21
77
78
481
482
659

description 552
Setpoint Schedule
biased input from T-56 sensor 499
description 499
SETPTDEF Table 15, 17, 499
Setting the Address 14, 21
Software and Hardware Point Configuration
Sheets 14, 16, 649, 650, 651, 652
Standard Discrete Output Point 50
Standard Input and Output Devices 617
Standard Milliamp Input Point 59
Standard Milliamp Output Point 63
Standard Voltage Input Point 86
Standard Voltage Output Point 89
Stepper Motor Output Point 80
description 80
SWxx-yy Table 15, 18
System Functions
Consumable 572
Ctlr-ID 571
definition 563
function types 565
LID, additional functions 563
Real Time Clock 587
Runtime 592
T
Temperature Input Point 83
description 83
Time and Date, determining current 590
Time Broadcast
enabling 588
Time Schedule
configuration rules 502, 503
description 501
660

sample 503
timed override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509
typical application 502, 503
Timed Override 501, 504, 506, 507, 509
Types/Units Reference Sheet 641, 645
U
UPDATEDB Table 15, 18, 21
Updating
database 15, 18
Upgrading PROM 20
Uploading
database 20
Uploading the Database 19
V
Voltage Input Point 86
description 86
Voltage Output Point 89
description 89
W
Waterside Linkage 490
WSM Air Source 484, 493
description 484
WSM Cool Source 490
description 490
485
486
491
492
Reader's
Comments
Your comments regarding this manual will help us improve future

editions. Please comment on the usefulness and readability of this
manual, suggest additions and deletions, and list specific errors and
omissions.
Document Name:
Publication Date:
Usefulness and Readability:
Suggested Additions and Deletions:
Errors and Omissions (Please give page numbers):
Date:
Name:
Title or Position:
Organization:
Address:
Fold so that the mailing address is visible, staple closed,

and mail.
Carrier Corporation
Carrier World Headquarters Building
One Carrier Place
Farmington, CT 06034-4015
Attn: CCN Documentation
Printed in U.S.A.
808 - 891
Rev. 06/03

808 891 060103

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

808 891 060103

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Comfort Controller

Overview and Configuration

Stepper Motor Output ........................................... 80

808-891 Rev. 06/03

Occupancy ........................................................... 477

How To Configure Schedules ............................... 495

Before changing an existing Comfort

Under Discrete State Alarm, revised the introductory

This manual contains information about the operations of the Comfort

Presents an overview of the manual and

Provides an overview of the Comfort

Provides the procedure for configuring

Describes the operations that change the

Provides the following information for

This chapter provides the following

This chapter provides the following

This chapter provides the following

This chapter provides the following

This chapter contains perforated

This appendix lists the CCN system

This appendix lists the engineering

This appendix lists the allowable

This appendix lists the allowable

This appendix lists alarm levels, alarm

This appendix describes the Local

This appendix provides instructions

This appendix, called Quickstart, is a

This manual makes reference to the following CCN manuals. All of

BEST++ Programmers Reference Manual (808-893)

Network Service Tool III

There are two types of Comfort Controllers:

Figure 2-1 illustrates one possible way to connect 40 points.

Comfort Controller 6400:

16 I/O field points

The Comfort Controller 6400 gives you the capability to deactivate

Low Voltage DSIO

You must install High Voltage DSIO Module(s) in their own

You can connect 16 field points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) to the

The Comfort Controller contains a software library and a blank

An algorithm is a pre-engineered group of processes that provides

After the Comfort Controller is installed, you must create and

Flow diagrams are used in this manual to illustrate the flow of

Fan Status Point

High Humidity Switch

High Humidity Sensor

Occupied Low Setpoint

Interpretation: If D=1, then C=-3 otherwise C=0

The industry-proven, pre-engineered algorithms provide the type of

You can convert the Comfort Controller software to any language

Creating the Comfort Controllers database using the ServiceConfig Tables

The term create, as it applies to the Comfort Controller, means to

Follow the steps below to configure a newly installed Comfort

Complete the 1600 or 6400 Hardware and Software Point

Set the address of the Comfort Controller with the Network

Select Add, Controller, and Upload to add and upload the

If the Upload fails, reset the Comfort Controller

Select the desired Comfort Controller.

To create up to 8 hardware points per

To create up to 16 holidays, 16 Network Time Schedules, 4 Consumable

To create up to 16 setpoint schedules.

To create up to 8 software points per

To update the Comfort Controllers

Configure the FNCxx-yy Tables by completing the steps